ELEC Specifications

FALCON CLINIC
Table of Contents
SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
16010
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
16110
RACEWAYS, BOXES AND FITTINGS
16114
CABLE TRAY
16116
CABLE TRUNKING
16120
WIRES AND CABLES
16140
WIRING DEVICES
16150
MISCELLANEOUS CONTROL EQUIPMENT
16170
SAFETY AND MOTOR ISOLATORS (DISCONNECTS)
16195
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16320
DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER
16425
SWITCHGEAR ASSEMBLIES MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD
16450
EARTHING SYSTEM
16470
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS (POWER AND LIGHTING PANEL BOARDS)
16482
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
16485
CONTACTORS
16490
AUTOMATIC REACTIVE POWER COMPENSATION

(POWER FACTOR CAPACITORS CORRECTION)
16500
LIGHTING
16620
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
16625
EMERGENCY DIESEL GENERATOR PLANT
16722
FIRE ALARM & VOICE EVACUATION SYSTEM
16723
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION & ALARM MONITORING SYSTEM
16725
ACCESS CONTROL & ALARM MONITORING SYSTEM
16750
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM
16780
TV & SATELLITE RECEPTION SYSTEM
16790
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
16800
HOSPITAL SPECIALTY ITEMS
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Issued for Construction
Page 1 of 2
Table of Content
FALCON CLINIC
16950
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
16999
SCHEDULE OF PREFERRED ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS & SUPPLIERS
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 2 of 2
Table of Content
FALCON CLINIC
SECTION 16010
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special Conditions and
Division-1 (General requirements), apply to work of this section.
B.
Its the Contractor responsibility to be fully aware of and comply with all of the requirements of the
above.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The requirements of the Contract Documents, including the General Conditions and special
Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work of this division.
B.
In case of conflict between these requirements and the general requirements of Division 1, the
more restrictive requirements govern as determined by the owner's authorized representative.
C.
Drawings are diagrammatic and are a graphic representation of contract requirements to the best
available standards at the scale required.
D.
Light and power and system riser diagrams and schematic diagrams generally indicate equipment
connections to be used for various systems. Provide system raceway and wiring as required for
actual systems installed on this project. Provide all work shown on diagrams whether or not it is
duplicated on the plans.
E.
Specifications include incomplete sentences. Words or phrases such as "the contractor shall,"
"shall be," "furnish," "provide," "a," "an," "the," and "all" have been omitted for brevity.
F.
Except where modified by a specific notation to the contrary, the indication and/or description of
any item, in the Drawings of Specification or both, carries with it the instruction to furnish and
install the item complete with all appurtenances or accessories necessary to complete any
required system, regardless of whether or not this instruction is explicitly stated as part of the
indication or description.
G.
Specifications and Drawings are complimentary and are to be taken together for a complete
interpretation of the work.
H.
Drawings of necessity utilize symbols and schematic diagrams to indicate various items of work.
Neither of these have any dimensional significance nor do they delineate every item required for
the intended installation.
Install the work in accordance with the diagrammatic intent expressed on the electrical and
mechanical drawings, and in conformity with the dimensions indicated on final architectural and
structural working drawings and on equipment shop drawings.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 1 of 29
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL

WORK
16010
FALCON CLINIC
1.3
1.4
I.
Certain details appear on the drawings which are specific with regard to the dimensioning and
positioning of the work. These details are intended only for the purpose of establishing general
feasibility. They do not obviate field coordination for the indicated work.
J.
Derive information as to the general construction from structural and architectural drawings and
specifications.
K.
Where a discrepancy exists between the drawings and / or between drawings and other parts of
the Contractor Documents or where the interpretation of either is in doubt, the contractor shall
obtain written clarification from the Owner's authorized representative on such matters before
commencing the Work.
PREPARATION OF CONTRACTOR'S DRAWINGS

A.
The contractor's drawings shall be prepared by staff experienced in such work and the Contractor
shall submit for consultant review and approval evidence of the suitability and number of his staff
who will undertake these tasks.
B.
The construction Drawings indicate the approximate position of equipment, etc., and the
Contractor shall allow for any minor modifications to location that may be necessary.
COMMISSIONING AND PERFORMANCE TESTING

A.
1.5
1.6
1.7
The commissioning and performance testing be carried out by a specialist firm. Full details of the
capability and experience of such firm shall be submitted to the consultant for review and approval
CONDITIONS RELATING TO SUPPLIERS

A.
Submit a detailed list of manufacturers' names and addresses for materials and equipment
proposed for the Work.
B.
Once accepted by the Consultant materials and equipment shall not be purchased from other
sources without the prior written agreement of the consultant .
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE CONTRACT

A.
The Contractor shall submit a supplementary proposal for an annual system Maintenance
Contract under which the Contractor would undertake, in addition to his obligations under this
contract, to fully maintain the system in efficient working order, including routing checks,
adjustments, lubrication and replacement of consumable spares, etc.,
B.
The proposal shall set out the terms of the offer, the work to be carried out, the guarantees of
performance, the inclusive price for the twelve months following practical Completion, and terms
under which annual maintenance may be carried out thereafter.
CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
A.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
All electrical equipment shall be designed for operating in a 50oC ambient temperature with 100%
relative humidity. Copies of test certificates shall be provided prior to ordering equipment.
Page 2 of 29

WORK
16010
FALCON CLINIC
PART 2 - DEFINITIONS
2.1
GENERAL DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

A.
The following initials, words and phrases shall have the following meanings:
KAHRAMAA
QTEL
IEC
DIN
VDE
BS
EN
NFPA
NEC
IEEE
NEMA
ICEA
INETA
NESC
UL
FM
FIA
ANSI
NECA
OSHA
CDA
2.2
Qatar General Electricity and Water Corporation.

Qatar Telecommunications.
International Electrotechnical Commission.
German Standard Institute.
Association of German Electrical Engineers.
British Standards.
European Standards.
National Fire Protection Association.
National Electrical Code (NFPA 70).
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
Insulated Cable Engineers Association.
International Electrical Testing Association.
National Electrical Safety Code.
Underwriters Laboratories.
Factory Mutual.
Factory Insurance Association.
American National Standard Institute.
National Electrical Contractors Association Standard of Installation
Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
Civil Defense Authority.
" Architect "," Engineer "," Consultant "," Project Manager "," Owner's Authorized
Representative "," Owner". The party or parties responsible for interpreting, accepting and
otherwise ruling on the performance under
" The contract ".
" This contract ", " The contract " the agreement covering the work to be performed by " The
contractor".
"The work"
"The works"
"Directed"
"Inspected"
Submitted or submit
"Specification"
"IEE Regulations"
That part of the project dependent upon or subsequent to the

statement.
The works referred to in the Specification and which are fully shown
and described in the Contract Documents.
Directed by the Owner's authorized representative
Inspected by consultant.
Submitted to or submit to the Owner's authorized representative
The description of performance requirements, materials and
workmanship contained in the Contract Documentation.
The Wiring Regulations for Electrical Installations within Buildings
as issued by the IEE 16th edition.
DEFINITION OF "AGREEMENT", ACCEPTANCE" AND "APPROVAL"

A. "Agreement" Acceptance" and "Approval" shall have the following meanings:
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 3 of 29

WORK
16010
FALCON CLINIC
"Agreed" or
"Agreement"
- Agreed by or agreement of the consultant in writing
"Accepted" or
"Acceptance"
"Approved" or
"Approval"
- Accepted or acceptance by the consultant in writing

- Approved by or approval of the consultant in writing
"Agreement", "Acceptance" or "Approval" by or of the consultant shall have the following limitation:
1. When given in respect to samples of materials, workmanship or methods of construction
submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents shall not be construed
as denoting any degree of satisfaction with the materials used in, or the execution of the Works.
2.3
2.
When given in respect of drawings, documents or schemes called for by the contract Documents
or proposed by the Contractor, is only for conformance with the design intent and information
given in the Contract Documents or contained in subsequent Instructions.
3.
When given in respect to the methods of keeping records shall mean those methods are
satisfactory.
DEFINITIONS OF TECHNICAL WORDS AND ABBREVIATIONS
A. The definitions for words and phrased commonly associated with the design, manufacture and site
work for public health, mechanical and electrical installations shall be those of the IEE Regulations, the
IOP, plumbing Services Design Guide, CIBSE Guides, BS, CP and associated Statutory Acts.
B. The terminology related to the voltages stated in the Contract Documents shall be that used in the IEE
Regulations unless specifically identified by values or descriptions are not covered by such
terminology.
C. L.V. shall be taken as meaning "Low voltage", and H.V. shall be taken as meaning "high voltage" under
the IEE Regulations.
D. Any reference to H.V. shall be for voltages in excess of 1000V a.c. or 1500V d.c. between conductors,
or 600V a.c. or 900V, d.c. between any conductor and earth.
E. "Systems" - Includes all necessary equipment, accessories, controls, racks, suspension members,
sheet metal supports, miscellaneous steel members, etc.
F. "Fixing only" or - Includes the unloading, getting in, unpacking, returning fix only"
empty cases,
wrappings, etc., carriage paid, stacking, safely storing, protecting, taking from store, handling, hoisting
lowering, fitting, placing in position, fixing and connecting.
G. "Allow" - Means that the cost of the item will be at the sole risk and expense of the Contractor who is
given the opportunity of inserting such prices in the Bill of Quantities as he considers relevant including
overheads, profit and establishment charges, as no subsequent claim for such items will be accepted.
H. "As Necessary" - Means that the work referred to shall be carried out to the extent and by a method
consistent with good practice
I.
Words in the documents importing the singular only, also include the plural, and vice versa where the
context requires.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 4 of 29

WORK
16010
FALCON CLINIC
J.
2.4
Where any possible doubt exists as to the meaning of words or terms used in the Contract Documents
the matter shall be referred by the Contractor to the Owner's authorized representative for clarification.
CURRENCY OF DOCUMENTS
A. All publications referred to shall be the latest edition thereof together with any amendments current ten
days before the date of issue of contract documents.
2.5
INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS
A. The Contract Documents shall be deemed to include, whether or not specifically mentioned or shown,
any materials, accessories or works as may be necessary for the satisfactory completion of the
contract Works in accordance with accepted current practice or procedure.
B. Where a discrepancy exists between the drawings and/or between drawings and other parts of the
Contract Documents or where the interpretation of either is in doubt, the Contractor shall obtain written
clarification from the Owner's authorized representative on such matters before commencing the work.
2.6
SYMBOLS
A. The symbol notation for all drawings to be produced by the Contractor shall be in accordance with
applicable standards and regulations and shall be agreed by the consultant and shown on a separate
drawing.
2.7
ORGANIZATION OF THE WORK

A. Implement the wok called for under this Division simultaneously with the work of other trades in a
manner such as not to delay the overall progress of the project. Be prepared to furnish promptly to
other Trades involved at the project all information and measurements relating to the work which they
may require. Cooperate with them in order to secure the harmony necessary in the interest of the
project as a hole.
B. Put work in place as fast as possible to meet all construction schedules.
C. Keep a competent superintendent in charge of the work. Replace such superintendent if unsatisfactory
to the project manager.
D. Maintain a complete file of Contract and shop drawings at the Site available for inspection by Architect
and Project Manager. Upon installation, initial and date shop drawings.
E. Provide every facility to permit inspection or observation of the work by Architect during the course of
construction.
F. Be responsible for work until its completion and final acceptance; replace any of the same which may
be damaged, lost or stolen, without additional cost to the Owner.
2.8
EXAMINATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONDS

A. Before submitting a proposal, the Contractor is responsible for visiting the site of the work, and
becoming thoroughly familiar with all conditions and limitations related to routing of 11 K.V cables. The
submission of a proposal will be construed as evidence that such an examination has been made, and
later claims for labor, equipment or materials required for difficulties encountered which could have
been foreseen had such an examination been made will not be recognized.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 5 of 29

WORK
16010
FALCON CLINIC
B. Verify all grades, elevations, dimensions and clearances at the site.

C. Examine all work prepared under other specification Divisions to receive the work of this Division and
report any defects affecting installation to the Architect.
2.9
COORDINATION OF WORK WITH OTHER TRADES

A.
Coordinate the work of this Division with the work of all other Trades, the 11K.V cables and so
arrange that there will be no delay in the proper installation and completion of any part or parts of
each respective work wherein it may be interrelated with that of this Division so that generally all
construction work can proceed without delaying the completion of the project.
B.
Examine contract drawings and specifications for all other trades relating to the project, verify all
governing conditions at the site, and become fully informed as to the extent and character of the
work required and its relation to the other work in the building. No consideration will be granted for
any alleged misunderstanding of the materials to be furnished for work to be done.
C.
Scaled and figured dimensions with respect to the items are approximate only; sizes of equipment
have been taken from typical equipment items. Before proceeding with work, carefully check all
dimensions and sizes and assume full responsibility for the fitting-in of equipment and materials to
the building and to meet architectural and structural conditions.
D.
Coordinate work with other trades, Confer with other trade whose work might affect this installation;
and arrange all parts of this work and equipment in proper relation to the work and equipment of
others, with the building construction and with Architectural finish so that this work will harmonize in
service, appearance and function.
E.
Refer to the Architectural and Interior Designers Drawings for ceiling heights, locations and types of
hung ceilings.
F.
Furnish to other Trades detailed advance information regarding all requirements related to work
under other Divisions. Furnish sizes, accurate data and locations of any and all pads, pits, chases,
sleeves and slots through floor slabs, walls, foundations, ceilings, roof and other special openings
required for work under this Division.
PART 3 - DEFINITIONS OF TYPES OF ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS

3.1
TENDER DRAWINGS
A.
3.2
Shall mean the drawings prepared in such detail as may be necessary to enable those tendering to
interpret the design for the Works and to submit competitive Tenders for the execution of the Works.
CONTRACT DRAWINGS
A.
Shall mean the drawings contained in or forming part of the numbered documents which constitute
the Contract Documents.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 6 of 29

WORK
16010
FALCON CLINIC
3.3
TAKING DIMENSIONS FROM DRAWINGS

A.
3.4
The Contractor shall verify the accuracy of all dimensions abstracted from the consultant's
drawings, including verifying the accuracy by taking dimensions on site, in the preparation of any
drawings by the Contractor and before the relevant work proceeds.
DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN DRAWINGS
A.
Should any differences exist between the drawings or should there be any discrepancy in the
figures, scale or the respects, the Contractor shall refer the same to the Owner's authorized
representative for clarification before proceeding with the work.
PART 4 - DEFINITIONS OF TYPES OF CONTRACTOR'S DRAWINGS

4.1
INSTALLATION DRAWINGS (shop drawings)

A.
Shall mean the drawings, based on the Contract Drawings showing details of the Contractor's
proposals for the execution of the Works. The drawings shall be to such scales, in such detail and
with all necessary dimensions as to enable the Work to be installed and shall indicate all main cable
runs, conduit runs, risers, panelboards, switchboards, signal and miscellaneous cabinets, pull boxes
and junction boxes etc., necessary for installation and also particular installation methods to be
applied in certain instances, e.g. where connecting to existing services.
B.
These drawings shall also relate to builder's work drawings confirming relationships to valve pits,
cable intakes .. etc.
C.
The installations drawings shall include but not necessarily be limited to:
1.
Site distribution and cable routes including 11KV routing.
2.
General layout drawings of all plant and equipment included in the Contract.
3.
Schematics for main and sub-main distribution.
4.
Cabling and wiring connections showing cable types, sizes and loads.
5.
Trunking and cable tray routes with details of sizes, fixings, cables carried and terminations.
6.
Conduit routes with conduit sizes, methods of installation and details of cables, loads and
terminations, and all junction and pull-in boxes
7.
Power distribution for all equipment.
8.
Lighting layouts for normal and emergency purposes, detailing positions and types of
luminaries, switch positions and wiring connections, location of fiber optic illuminator.
9.
Fire detector and alarm positions and wiring routes with type details and functions.
10. Earthing system with precise details of routing, conductor sizes, capacity and connection.
11. Lightning protection system with precise details of position, routing, conductor sizes and
terminations.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 7 of 29

WORK
16010
FALCON CLINIC
12. Communication systems wiring, terminal equipment types and functions, wiring, terminal
equipment types and functions, wiring routes and details.
13. Standby generator distribution system, other power supply systems and changeover
arrangements including schematic and detailed wiring with identification of those sections of
the normal system operated from the standby source.
D.
E.
F.
4.2
The installation drawings must bear the contractors stamp certifying :

1.
That it has checked the submitted drawings.
2.
That the submitted drawings is fully coordinated with other trades where interference may
occur.
3. That the submitted drawing are in conformance with the contract documents.
The contractor shall submit a shop drawing submittal schedule delineating the sequencing of shop
drawings and dates of submittal prior to submittal in accordance with schedule so as to cause no
delay in the work.
Shop drawings which are submitted out of sequence or without supplemental information necessary
for proper evaluation of the submission may be subject to delays in processing.
BUILDER'S WORK INFORMATION DRAWINGS
A.
Shall mean the drawings and Schedules prepared to show requirements for architectural or
structural provisions necessary to facilitate the execution of the Works and allow their integration
into the project.
B.
Such drawings shall include requirements for foundations, bases, lifting and supporting structures
for plant or equipment, all holes in walls, floors and ceiling elements, provision of services
requirements within voids above false ceilings or below false floors, the integration of the services
installations into the false ceiling system and trenches, depressions, ducts, etc., in or through
building and site elements.
C.
General arrangements and floor plan drawings giving builder's work requirements shall be to a scale
of 1:50.
D.
Builder's work drawings for electrical, diesel generator, communication, ..etc. rooms shall be to a
scale of 1:20.
E.
In cases where preliminary builder's work and structural information has already been given by the
consultant such information shall be confirmed and amplified as required above by the contractor
(including confirmation of weights of items of equipment, sizes of access ways, etc.,) and
incorporated in his drawings.
4.3
MANUFACTURERS' AND EQUIPMENT DRAWINGS

A.
Shall mean the drawings of any item of plant or equipment produced by a manufacturer or
equipment supplier indicating principle dimensions, fixings, connections and all other relevant
details.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 8 of 29

WORK
16010
FALCON CLINIC
B.
Where manufactures' original drawings are used they shall be specific to the relevant Works and all
references to optional features, other machines of a range, etc., shall be deleted or the original
drawings redrawn to comply with this clause.
C.
Each drawing shall be stamped CERTIFIED by the Manufacturer which shall mean that:
1.
The drawing represents accurately the item concerned with correct dimensions and all
connections precisely located;
2.
The item conforms to the specific description given in the Documents, quoting the reference
numbers from the Contract Document;
3.
The item is shown complete and entire as it will be supplied for the works and no extraneous
or alternative parts are indicated;
D.
Individual and layout drawings from electrical component manufacturers shall include wiring internal
and external to panels and controls.
E.
All wiring diagrams shall indicate clearly that wiring which forms part of or is connected to the
equipment as delivered and shall include the following minimum information to enable the site
connections and wiring to be completed:
1.
2.
3.
4.
4.4
maximum electrical loading for each power cable

cable termination facilities
cable identification and all terminal numbers
inter-connections between different items.
CONTROLS DRAWINGS
A.
Shall mean the drawings and schematics of plant and equipment showing the control layout with
each item uniquely identified, and including a brief description of the controls operation and any
associated interlocking.
B.
In respect of electric controls shall mean logic sequence and wiring diagrams showing the
connections of all items of electric control equipment and interlocking on the plant control
schematics.
4.5
SWITCHGEAR, STARTER AND CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION PANEL DRAWINGS

A.
4.6
Shall mean the drawings showing the general arrangement, the construction, the external and
internal layout of panels, and wiring diagrams comprising internal wiring, schematics of interlocking
and external wiring diagrams, for the complete systems in the panels. The drawings shall also
indicate all pipe work and capillary connections from the panels to external equipment.
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
Before commencing work, provide complete set of black and white prints of Contract Drawings.
B.
Maintain prints in field office and permanently record, in colored pencil, on such prints, at time of
occurrence, deviations from Contract Drawings.
C.
Dimension underground utilities from permanent identifiable structural points.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 9 of 29

WORK
16010
FALCON CLINIC
D.
4.7
Make drawings available for the Owner's Authorized Representatives periodic inspection and submit
for review with As-Built Drawings.
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
Before commencing work, provide complete set of reproducible transparencies of Contract
Drawings and upon completion of works contractor shall submit 2 sets on CD, computer
reproducible as built drawings of electrical works and prints.
Neatly revise to conform with Record Drawings.
Conspicuously indicate major deviations by specific reference to shop drawings and provide an
accurate and complete record of the work as installed.
Upon completion of work, submit signed and certified reproducible transparencies as As-Built and
referenced Shop Drawings, along with marked up prints of Record Drawings, to the Owner's
Authorized Representatives of acceptance.
PART 5 - DRAWINGS TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE CONTRACTOR

5.1
SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS AND EQUIPMENT

Prepare and submit before the relevant work proceeds, all drawings necessary to install the Works.
Drawings shall be based on the Contract Drawings and must be fully coordinated with the
architectural works and other disciplines and shall take into account any modifications either to the
building or the installation which may have taken place, incorporating details of the actual items of
plant and equipment to be installed.
Prepare and submit all necessary Schedules of Equipment and devices with the relevant drawings.
Prepare and submit schedule of light fittings and luminaires.
The effect of any authorize variation or site instruction shall be carried through and shown on all
applicable drawings by the Contractor. The cost of so doing shall be reimbursed to the Contractor
as part of the cost of the variation of the instruction.
5.2
SIGNATURE ON CONTRACTOR'S DRAWINGS

Each drawing submitted by the Contractor shall be signed by the Contractor to confirm that:
The work shown thereon has been coordinated both in sequence of installation and in physical
relationship to the work of others.
The drawing does not contain any variations other than those authorized by the Owner's authorized
representative instruction.
On re-submittal, all alterations made since initial submission have been clearly annotated on the
drawing and listed separately down the right hand side of the drawing.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 10 of 29

WORK
16010
FALCON CLINIC
PART 6 - INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR

6.1
GENERAL
A.
Submit to the Owner's authorized representative to a program agreed with the Owner's authorized
representative comprehensively detailed drawings showing all builders work required for the Works.
B.
Provide the Owner's authorized representative with such information as the Owner's authorized
representative may require on any matter related to or affecting the Works.
6.2
INFORMATION LISTED IN CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

Submit to the Owner's authorized representative all items of information required by the Contract
Documents at the proper time so as not to impede the progress of the works.
6.3
INFORMATION FOR MANUALS

Where the Contractor sublets the preparation of the Operation and Maintenance Manual to a
specialist firm, the Contractor shall provide or obtain all necessary information in respect thereof.
6.4
MANUFACTURER'S TECHNICAL LITERATURE

Manufacturers' technical literature submitted for examination or for inclusion in the Operation and
Maintenance Manual shall be prepared and assembled specifically for the project and shall exclude
any irrelevant matter. Each item shall be clearly identified on the record Drawings and crossreferenced to the contract Documents.
6.5
6.6
MANUFACTURERS' GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES

A.
All manufacturers' guarantees and warranties on plant, equipment, etc., shall be valid at least up to
the end of the Defects Liability Period, or for at least twelve months after Practical Completion of the
total project, whichever is the longer period.
B.
All equipment normally guaranteed by the manufacturers for a period of time which goes beyond the
period defined above shall be held to remain under guarantee for the maximum period.
C.
Provide two copies of all such guarantees, one of which shall be included in the Operation and
Maintenance Manual.
PLANT ROOM SCHEDULES AND SCHEMATICS
In addition to the provision of Record Drawings, provide the following at a size to be easily readable
and frame under glass and hang in each plant room and other appropriate location as directed by
the Owner's authorized representative:
Circuit diagrams consisting of schematic drawings of circuit layouts showing identification and duties
of equipment, numbers and locations, control and circuits.
Control schematics.
Mechanical and electrical plant items.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 11 of 29

WORK
16010
FALCON CLINIC
First aid instructions for treatment of persons after electric shock.

All other items required under Statutory or other regulations.
Location of sprinkler fire main control valve.
Emergency operating procedures and telephone numbers for emergency call-out service applicable
to any system or item of plant.
6.7
RELAY COORDINATION
Submit to the Engineer a relay and C.B. coordination study.
The Current-time characteristics must be plotted on a log-log papers showing that the choice of the
C.B. settings are correct for coordination or by using a software program.
If selectivity coordination study is failed, contractor is responsible to change any number of
breakers, relays, such that the selectivity study is fully achieved with no extra cost to the owner.
6.8
SHORT CIRCUIT AND VOLTAGE DROP CALCULATION

A. Submit a comprehensive short circuit study as well as voltage drop calculation based on the actual
impedance values of the electrical components such as supply short circuit level at the 11KV (shall
not be less than 500 MVA), transformer, bus bars and cables per unit impedances ...etc.
PART 7 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

7.1
GENERAL
A. Provide Operation and Maintenance Manuals (which shall incorporate Instruction Manuals on
detailed requirements) covering and including the information detailed below:
7.2
SCOPE OF SYSTEMS
B. A full technical description of each of the systems installed, written to ensure that the Owner's staff
fully understand the scope and facilities provided.
C. A technical description of the mode of operation of all systems.
7.3
INSTALLATION RECORD
A. A photo reduction of all Record Drawings to A1 size together with an index.
B. Diagrammatic drawings of each system indicating principal items of plant, equipment, etc.
C. Legend for all color-coded services.
D. Schedules of plant, equipment, etc., by system, stating their locations within the building, duties and
performance figures, together with anticipated life expectancies.
E. A unique code for each item of plant, equipment, etc., installed number cross-referenced to the
record and diagrammatic drawings and Schedules. The name, address and telephone number of the
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 12 of 29

WORK
16010
FALCON CLINIC
manufacturer of every item of equipment and plant shall be listed together with catalogue list
numbers.
F. Manufacturers' literature including detailed drawings, electrical circuit details, and printed operating
and maintenance instructions for all items of plant and equipment supplied under this contract.
G. A copy of all test certificates including those for all plant, equipment, valves, etc., used in the
installations, including (but not limited to) electrical circuit tests, corrosion testes, type testes, works
tests, start-up and commissioning tests, including those for air and water balancing.
H. A copy of all manufacturers' guarantees.
7.4
SYSTEM OPERATION
A. Starting up, operating and shutting down instructions for all equipment and systems installed.
B. Control sequences for all systems installed.
C. Scheduled details of all equipment settings, and actual values maintained in controlled variables
during commissioning.
D. Procedures for seasonal changeovers.
7.5
MAINTENANCE
A. Detailed recommendations as to the preventive maintenance frequency and procedures, including
related health and safety procedures, which should be adopted by the Owner to ensure the most
efficient operation of the systems. Specific details of maintenance procedures to prevent any hazard
arising to health and safety e.g. Legionnaires Disease, shall be included.
B. Lubrication Schedules for all lubricated items of plant and equipment.
C. A list of normal consumable items.
D. A list of recommended "running spares" required, being those items subject to wear or deterioration
and which may involve the Owner in extended deliveries when replacements are required at some
future date.
E. Procedures for full diagnosis.
F. Emergency procedures.
7.6
NUMBER OF COPIES REQUIRED

A. Provide the Owner's authorized representative with one original and four copies of the final
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
7.7
PREPARATION OF MANUALS
A. The manuals shall be contained in A4 size, plastic-covered, lose leaf, four ring binders with stiff
covers, each indexed, divided and appropriately cover-titled.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 13 of 29

WORK
16010
FALCON CLINIC
B. Drawings larger than A4 shall be folded and accommodated in the binder so that they may be
unfolded without being in any detached from the rings.
C. Prepare the Operation and Maintenance Manuals in draft as soon as the Installation Drawings are in
hand.
D. Make two sets of temporary manuals (with provisional Record Drawings and preliminary
performance data) available at commencement of commissioning to enable Owner's staff to
familiarize themselves with the installation.
These shall be of the same format as the final manuals with temporary insertions for items which
cannot be finalized until the works are commissioned and performance tested.
7.8
OBLIGATIONS OF MANUFACTURERS TO PROVIDE LITERATURE

A. The requirements and obligations of manufacturers to provide literature as part of the installation
record shall form part of plant and equipment orders and such orders shall be considered unfulfilled
until literature requirements have been met.
PART 8 - INSPECTION, TEST AND APPROVAL CERTIFICATES

8.1
GENERAL
A. Submit Inspection, Test and Approval Certificates as required by the contract Documents.
PART 9 - PROVISION OF DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS

9.1
DRAWING PRODUCTION
A. Prepare and submit a master plan for drawing production covering the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
9.2
list of drawings to be produced

drawing/Schedule titles and numbers
symbols/notation/scales to be used
cross-references to other drawings
identification of drawings required for record purposes.
CHECKING PRIOR TO SUBMISSION

A. All drawings, Schedules and other information provided by manufacturers, suppliers, or approved
sub-contractors shall be checked by the contractor who shall ensure that all requirements of the
Contractor who shall ensure that all requirements of the Contract documents have been
incorporated prior to submission.
9.3
PREPARATION OF RECORD DRAWINGS

A. The preparation of the Record Drawings shall proceed during the installation of the Works as each
section is completed. The Owner's authorized representative and the consultant shall be allowed to
inspect these drawings on request during their preparation and each drawing shall be submitted to
the Owner's authorized representative prior to Practical Completion.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 14 of 29

WORK
16010
FALCON CLINIC
9.4
SUBMISSION OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. The final draft of the Operation and Maintenance Manual shall be submitted in due time, and in any
case not less than four weeks prior to Practical Completion, so that at least one copy of the
complete final version is in the possession of the Owner at Practical Completion.
B. The Operation and Maintenance Manual is an essential part of the works. The works will not be
accepted as complete and payment will be withheld until the required number of copies of the
complete final document have been received by the Owner's Authorized representative.
C. If partial possession is required by the Owner then the documentation shall also be phased
accordingly and so arranged to finally form one comprehensive document.
D. It shall be the contractor's responsibility, whenever a successive phase of the works is handed over,
to amend and update the previously issued version of the Operation and Maintenance Manual,
bring it to the appropriate stage of completion and submit same to the Owner's Authorized
representative in due time.
9.5
FAILURE TO PRODUCE RECORD DRAWINGS AND MANUALS

A. If the contractor fails to produce and submit the record drawings as required during the progress of
the works, or other information for the operation and Maintenance Manual by the due dates, then
the Owner's Authorized representative may instruct a third party to provide any or all of these
documents and the total cost of preparing such documents shall be borne by the contractor.
PART 10 - STATUTORY UNDERTAKINGS AND OTHER AUTHORITIES

10.1
GENERAL
A. The contractor will be responsible for programming, coordinating and progressing the involvement of
the Statutory Undertakings and other Authorities in the works.
B. Provide all necessary information so required by the Owner's Authorized representative in respect of
the Statuary Undertakings and other Authorities related to the works.
C. In addition, the contractor shall execute the following in connection with the applicable statutory
Undertaken and other Authorities.
10.2
COMPLETION OF NEGOTIATIONS
A. Take responsibility for and complete negotiations commenced by the Owner's Authorized
Representative or the Owner in respect of the provision or diversion of utility services.
10.3
APPLICATIONS BY OWNER
A. Take responsibility for and complete any application made by the Owner in respect of any matter
related to the works.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 15 of 29

WORK
16010
FALCON CLINIC
10.4
SAMPLES
A. Provide and submit prior to placing orders samples of workmanship for testing by the applicable
statutory undertaking or other authority.
10.5
CONNECTIONS OF NEW WORKS

A. Make arrangements to allow connection of the new works to the supply networks including providing
details of the proposed works and obtaining approval as necessary.
10.6
BY-LAWS AND REGULATIONS

A. Examine and check the contract Documents for compliance with the Statutory Requirements so that
written notice of any divergence the contractor may find between the contract Documents and the
Statuary Requirements, can be issued to the Owner's Authorized representative by the contractor in
due time so as not to delay the progress of the works, Where Statutory Undertakings and other
Authorities require to witness tests, the contractor shall give all necessary notice, carry out such
tests, provide attendance and facilities and copy any documents, etc., as required.
10.7
NOTICES AND FEES

A. Give all notices in accordance with BY-Laws and regulations and pay all fees and charges legally
demandable. Provisional Sums are included in the Bill of Quantities for fees and charges payable to
Statutory Undertakings and other Authorities.
10.8
BUILDERS WORK IN CONNECTION

A. Obtain details of any builders work required, and provide the Owner's Authorized representative with
all necessary details of same.
10.9
AMENDMENTS
A. Details of any amendments to the works deemed necessary by a Statutory Undertaking or other
Authority shall be submitted to the Owner's Authorized representative prior to work being executed
10.10
FORMALITIES
A. Comply with all formalities in connection with test notices, agreements, application for supply forms,
etc., and forward all such documents requiring the Owner's signature to the Owner's Authorized
representative in ample time.
B. Prepare installation Drawings for sprinkler systems, fire mains, pumps, alarms, fire prevention
systems and the like, together with related calculations and technical information in a suitable form
and submit same to the local Authorities and Fire Insurers as required by the Owner's Authorized
representative.
10.11
CORRESPONDENCE, ETC.
A. Provide copies of all correspondence, test certificates, notices, etc.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 16 of 29

WORK
16010
FALCON CLINIC
10.12
COST OF RE-CONNECTIONS, ETC.

A. The contractor shall be responsible for any cost changes for re-connections, re-visits, re-testing, etc.,
except for such charges arising from any direction of the Owner's Authorized representative arising
from any direction in respect of defective work.
10.13
GENERAL FACILITIES
A. Arrange for facilities to be provided for the purpose of laying new mains and services and adjusting
existing equipment.
B. Notify the owner's Authorized representative that the work of the Statutory Undertakings and other
Authorities is complete in order that the owner's Authorized representative can issue directions in
respect of covering up of the permanent works by other contractors.
PART 11 - CONTROL OF QUALITY

11.1
SPECIFIED MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND WORKMANSHIP

A. Unless otherwise specified all materials, plant and equipment, and the use and installation thereof,
shall comply with the material, test and other requirements of the relevant . IEE wiring regulations
16th edition, IEC standards and BS standard.
B. Materials or substances which are generally known at the time of use to be deleterious shall not be
used other than as allowed by standards or statutory regulation current at the time of use
C. Workmanship shall be of the best quality, and shall be produced by skilled and responsible craftsmen
fully experience and in their respective trades.
D. Allow for proper packing and safe delivery of all equipment and materials and for returning re-usable
packaging to the suppliers as appropriate
E. Include for obtaining materials from any source whatsoever to complete the works within the contract
period and no claim will be allowed for materials ex-stock or from any other source in the event of
difficulty of supply.
F. Identical parts of similar equipment shall be interchangeable and any items, fittings or accessories
which are used in quantity shall in each case be the produce of one manufacturer.
11.2
GUARANTEE AVAILABILITY OF SPARES

A. Guarantee or provide manufacturers' written guarantees that spares will be available for a minimum
period of ten years from the date of practical completion both to the Owner and to any other future
building Owner, occupier or contractor having responsibility for the maintenance of the works.
11.3
PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO FIXING

A. All installation materials, component parts or complete items of equipment shall be delivered and
stored on site in properly labeled boxes, crates or containers, suitably designed and constructed to
give protection against transportation and handling damage and deterioration during storage. The
packing shall be weather-proof.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 17 of 29

WORK
16010
FALCON CLINIC
B. Store all materials on raised boarded platforms under weather-proof cover and store
Trunking and the like on racking.
conduits,
C. Equipment or component parts of equipment specifically designed to operate in normal room

conditions, shall be delivered to and stored on site with suitable waterproof protection.
D. Take particular care to protect component parts specifically designed to act as heat transfer surfaces.
These surfaces shall have purpose-designed packing to protect them whilst in transit and storage
on site.
E. Examine all materials and equipment supplied under this contract on delivery to site and immediately
prior to installation. Any material or equipment which is damaged or faulty shall be replaced.
11.4
SETTING OUT
A. The contractor shall be responsible for the true and proper setting out of the works and for the
correctness of position, levels, dimensions and alignment for all parts of the works and for the
provision of all necessary instruments, appliances and labor in connection therewith. If any error
shall appear or arise in the position, levels, dimensions or alignment of any part of the works the
setting out for which the contractor was responsible, the contractor shall at his own expense rectify
such error.
B. The checking of any setting out or of any line or level by the Owner's authorized representative shall
not in any way relieve the contractor of his responsibility for the correctness thereof. The contractor
shall carefully protection preserve all bench-marks, sight rails, pegs and other things used in setting
out the works.
C. Take all necessary dimensions on site, check runs and levels and mark out for builder's work.
D. Any unnecessary work carried out by the Owner's authorized representative or other contractor due
to inaccuracy of the contractor's drawings, dimensions, or marking out shall be paid for by the
contractor.
11.5
PROTECTION OF NEW WORK

A. The contractor shall be entirely responsible for ensuring that all his work is adequately protected.
Protection shall be by the contractor at the completion of each day and during periods of inclement
weather, and all work exposed to view on completion in the works shall be protected from spillage,
stains and other damage. All systems shall be kept in a fully drained condition prior to
commissioning.
B. Test water shall be disposed of so as not to damage any part of the temporary or permanent works,
or any adjoining land or property.
11.6
INSPECTION AND TESTING GENERALLY

A. Agree procedures for notices, witnessing, reporting and recording tests with all parties involved
including local authorities and statutory undertakings, prior to the commencement of the works.
B. Submit copies of the formal test certificates signed by the contractor's representative not later than
seven days after completion of successful tests.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 18 of 29

WORK
16010
FALCON CLINIC
11.7
ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Re-test or carry out at no extra cost any additional tests required to establish acceptability of the
works following failure of any part thereof or any item therein to meet the required standard or
functional performance.
B.
11.8
INSTRUMENTS AND EQUIPMENT FOR TESTING
A. Supply, check, re-calibrates whenever necessary and maintain in good working order all instruments
and equipment for setting out, measurements, gauging, inspection, commissioning and
performance testing whether they are specifically called for or implied by the contract documents.
B. All such instruments and equipment shall be adequate for the purpose and shall satisfy the purposes
and accuracys required by the contract documents.
C. All instruments and equipment shall remain the property of the contractor.
11.9
PROVISION OF STAFF
A. Provide all necessary staff with the relevant skills and competence for all inspection, testing,
commissioning and performance testing.
11.10
ACCEPTABLE HARMONIC LEVELS

A. The acceptable limits of harmonics voltages and currents shall be as per the engineering
recommendation G 5/3 (1976) of the united kingdom.
These recommendations are as follows:
The following table permitted harmonic currents for any one consumer at point of common coupling
Harmonic number and current (A r.m.s.)
Supply system
voltage (KV) at
point of common
coupling
0.415
11
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
4
8
1
3
3
4
8
2
2
6
5
6
1
0
1
1
4
4
0
8
9
3
8
3
7
3
1
9
7
6
2
1
6
6
5
2
5
2
5
2
6
2
18
1
9
4
1
6
1
The following table permitted Harmonic voltage distortion limits at any point on the system (including
background levels)
Supply system
Voltage (KV) at
Point of common
Coupling
0.415
11
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Total harmonic voltage distortion,

VT
(%)
5
4
Page 19 of 29
Individual harmonic voltage distortion (%)

___________________________________
______
Odd
Even
4
3
2
1.75

WORK
16010
FALCON CLINIC
The contractor must include harmonic filters with appropriate size to be connected in the network
and/or at places where source of harmonics exists (such as elevator panels, UPS...etc.) in order not to
exceed the above mentioned figures.
11.11
ACCESS DOORS IN FINISHED CONSTRUCTION

A. Access doors as required for operation and maintenance of concealed equipment, controls, pull boxes,
etc., shall be provided by the contractor.
B. Coordinate and prepare a location, size, and function schedule of access doors required
and deliver to a representative of the installing trade and the architect for acceptance.
C. Refer to the pertinent architectural specification section for the type and quality of access doors to be
furnished for designated areas and ceiling conditions.
PART 12 - INSTRUMENTS AND EQUIPMENT FOR TESTING

A. Provide assistance and make available to the consultant and Owner's authorized representative any
instruments or other equipment he may require from time to time for examining the accuracy, quality
and performance of the contract works.
PART 13 - INSPECTION AND TESTING CERTIFICATES
13.1
PROCEDURES
A. Schedule and submit an integrated program in respect of those elements of the works for which
inspections and tests shall be carried out and for which inspection and test records shall be
maintained.
These elements shall include in particular those which will be covered up during construction, and
other matters described under certificates for materials and equipment.
B. Testing of individual items of plant and equipment at manufacturers' works shall be witnessed and
approved by Owner's consultant. On site, and final testing of completed installations or parts of
installations shall all be in accordance with the contract documents.
13.2
CERTIFICATES FOR MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. All materials shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with the appropriate British Standard or
as described. Should the contractor propose an alternative item without the appropriate certification,
independent testing shall be carried out at the contractor's expense to determine compliance with
the contract documents.
B. Where appropriate all materials delivered to the site shall bear the manufacturer's name, brand name
and any other data that may be required to verify their exact nature and relate it to the requirements
of the contract documents.
13.3
WORKS TESTS CERTIFICATES
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 20 of 29

WORK
16010
FALCON CLINIC
A. Works tests certificates shall include, whenever applicable, full information to enable the item tested
to be identified, such as project title, contractor's name, manufacturer's nameplate or serial
numbers, the location in the works and the delivery or batch which the sample represents.
13.4
INSPECTION, AND TESTING RECORDS

A. Maintain records of all inspections, and testing performed to substantiate conformity with the contract
documents including those carried out by the contractor and third party testing agencies, together
with manufacturers' or suppliers' certificates of test.
B. All records shall be retained on site and made available to the Owner's authorized representative on
request. On completion of the works all records shall be handed over to the Owner's authorized
representative unless otherwise directed.
C. These records shall include, as appropriate, but not be limited to, project title, contractor's name, the
identification of the element, item, batch or lot, the nature and number of the observations and tests,
the dates of testing, the name and signature of the person responsible for the testing, the number
and type of deficiencies found, and details of any corrective action taken.
D. Any record which indicates that any part of the works inspected or tested does not comply with the
contract documents shall be submitted without delay in order that the contractor's proposals for
rectification may be assessed.
13.5
MATERIALS AND SAMPLES

A. Each manufacturer must be willing to admit the Owner's authorized representative and the consultant
to his premises during normal working hours for the purpose of examining and witnessing the
testing of materials and equipment proposed for the works.
B. All materials and equipment shall be new.
C. Obtain and implement manufacturers' instructions on the assembly and installation of materials and
equipment.
D. Submit all samples required by the contract documents.
E. The procedure for submission of samples shall be agreed prior to commencement of the works.
F. Samples of materials, workmanship, components and equipment accepted as complying with the
contract documents will be retained by the consultant and all related items included in the works
shall be at least equal in all respects to these samples.
Provide safe storage of accepted samples on site including racks for display, reference and
inspection.
13.6
REJECTION OF MATERIALS OR WORKS NOT TO STANDARD OF SAMPLES

A. Any material or work which is inferior to an accepted sample or is different from parts of the works
already constructed or which is stained or damaged after installation will be treated as defective
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 21 of 29

WORK
16010
FALCON CLINIC
13.7
DEFECTIVE WORK
A. Defective work, and the opening up of the works to ascertain same, shall be dealt with strictly in
accordance with the requirements detailed elsewhere in the contract document.
B. Replace defective work with materials, goods or work in accordance with the contract documents.
Alternatively submit proposals for any treatment or making good that is considered will bring the
defective work to the standard required by the contract documents. Such proposals shall not relieve
the contractor of his responsibility to execute the works to the full intent of the contract documents.
C. The costs as defined in the contract conditions shall include the cost of any related delay or disruption
in the progress of the works, or any other consequential cost.
13.8
DAMAGE BY INCLEMENT WEATHER

A. The contractor shall not execute any work when it is likely to be adversely affected by inclement
weather and he shall make good any damage so caused at his own expense.
PART 14 - COMMISSIONING THE WORKS

13.9
GENERAL
A. All pre-commissioning checks, setting to work, commissioning and performance testing shall be
carried out as detailed elsewhere in the contract documents.
13.10
ATTENDANCE AND CO-OPERATION

A. Give at least seven days' notice to the Owner's authorized representative of requirements for the
attendance and co-operation by the Owner's authorized representative and by other contractors.
13.11
NOTICE TO CONSULTANT
A. Give at least seven days' notice to the Owner's authorized representative of any commissioning or
testing to be carried out to enable the consultant to witness all or any of such tests, etc.
13.12
UNSUCCESSFUL TESTS
A. The contractor shall pay any costs incurred by the Owner, Owner's authorized representative or the
consultant in connection with unsuccessful tests, including costs incurred due to the inability of the
contractor to make or complete a test, having given the notice required above.
13.13
CHECKING AND COMMISSIONING

A. Commissioning includes the setting to work and regulation of the installation.
B. Check all installations and commission in accordance with the contract documents including but not
limited to the following :
1.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Co-operation with the Owner's authorized representative to produce a coordinated program for
the testing and commissioning of the complete works.
Page 22 of 29

WORK
16010
FALCON CLINIC
2.
Provision of all consumable materials.
3.
Provision of such temporary communication apparatus as is necessary to enable members of

the commissioning team who are unable to be in visual or aural contact with each other to carry
out their tasks safely and effectively. Such apparatus shall not cause interference with
equipment owned or operated by any other parties.
4.
Provision of proper and permanent records of relevant readings of all quantities taken during
the checking, pre-commissioning and commissioning procedures.
The form of the records shall be agreed with the Owner's authorized representative in advance
of commissioning and the record for each complete commissioning procedure shall be dated
and signed by the person whom the contractor has appointed to be formally in charge of
commissioning.
13.14
PERFORMANCE TESTS
A. When the Contractor has completed the commissioning of the whole of works he shall give to the
Owner's authorized representative written certification of this fact. The certificate shall be signed by
the director or manager responsible for the contract.
B. Only when this written certification has been received by the Owner's authorized representative will
performance tests be allowed to commence. Unless otherwise agreed by the Owner's authorized
representative in writing, where engineering systems involve the works of more than one works
contractor, performance tests will only be allowed to commence when written certification from all
the relevant works contractors has been received.
C. Carry out during this period full tests on the complete works to demonstrate that the works meet the
requirements of the contract documents.
D. The Owner's authorized representative may at his discretion waive any part of the full test procedure
if he considers it has been satisfactorily demonstrated, recorded and properly certified at any earlier
time but the contractor shall however allow in his costs for carrying out all of the provisions in this
clause.
13.15
RECORDS OF WEATHER CONDITIONS

A. Keep a daily record throughout the contract period of the maximum, minimum and average outside
shade temperature, humidity and wind speed.
13.16
SUMMER AND WINTER PERFORMANCE TESTS

A. Test the performance of the whole of the works in both summer and winter design conditions and
allow for any special visits to site and provide any necessary attendance during the defects liability
period to set up, monitor and remove test and recording equipment.
13.17
SYSTEMS USED BEFORE PRACTICAL COMPLETION

A. No part of the permanent services installations shall be used by the contractor for his own benefit
without the written agreement of the Owner's authorized representative.
B. Should any part of the works be operated during the period of the contract for the benefit of the
contractor and/or the Owner's authorized representative, all consumable spares, including light
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 23 of 29

WORK
16010
FALCON CLINIC
bulbs and tubes which have been so put to use shall be replaced by new not more than seven days
prior to practical completion.
13.18
DEFECTS LIABILITY
A. Defects, shrinkages or other faults appearing at any time during the defects liability period which
have led, or, in the opinion of the Engineer, are likely to lead to failure or malfunction of any part of
the works shall be made good immediately upon receipt of any instruction or direction of the
Owner's authorized representative.
B. Prepare and submit a record of any failure or malfunction of any part of the works, the remedial action
taken, subsequent re-testing and the results thereof.
C. Notify the Owner's authorized representative of any malfunction in, or damage to, the works which the
contractor can demonstrate had been caused by incorrect operation of the system, vandalism or
action of a third party.
D. Inform the Owner's authorized representative in writing when all defects are finally rectified so that an
inspection may be carried out prior to the issue of the final certificate.
PART 15 - PREVENTION OF NUISANCE AND DANGER TO PERSONS

15.1
SITE SAFETY GENERALLY

A. The contractor before commencing work shall inform the, Owner's authorized representative of the
person who will be on site during working hours and who will have the authority to take action on
and be responsible for all aspects of safety, health and welfare in connection with the contract
works.
B. Take all the necessary precautions to ensure the safety of all site personnel, and the general public,
and in respect of the contract works provide for the safety, health and welfare of work-people
employed on the site to comply with the requirements of the following and of all other relevant
statutes, statutory instruments, statutory regulations or industrial agreements.
15.2
FIRE PRECAUTIONS
A. Take all reasonable precautions to avoid the outbreak of fire, particularly in work involving the use of
naked flames and impress on workmen the dangers involved in the careless disposal of matches
and cigarettes, etc., and the accumulation of rubbish on site. Where considered necessary due to
the nature of the works or as directed by the Owner's authorized representative, institute a "No
smoking" regime.
B. The use of naked lights shall be prohibited except in cases of absolute necessity, and extreme care
taken in the use of all equipment likely to cause fire damage.
15.3
NOISE AND NUISANCE CONTROL

A. Conduct operations in such a manner that nuisance shall not be caused to the general public,
adjoining residents and users of adjacent buildings.
B. If such nuisance is being caused the contractor shall immediately make such arrangements as will
prevent a recurrence of the same and indemnify the Owner against any claims arising there from.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 24 of 29

WORK
16010
FALCON CLINIC
C. Attention is also drawn to the necessity to comply with BS 5225 Code or Practice for noise control on
construction and demolition sites.
15.4
POLLUTION CONTROL
A. Comply with local regulations and satisfy the requirements of the environmental health office under
whose authority the works are being executed.
15.5
RADIO AND TV INTERFERENCE

A. All apparatus where the normal operation is such that interruption of low frequency or direct electrical
currents occur shall be fitted with means of suppressing the radio and TV interference so caused.
B. The equipment and methods to be used in determining the level of radio interference shall be as
specified in BS 727 and the limits of interference shall in all cases be those specified in BS 800.
C. Reference shall be made to CP 1006 for guidance on the provision and installation of equipment to
meet the above standards.
D. C.B. radio shall not be used except with the written consent of the Owner's authorized representative.
PART 16 - EXISTING SITE SERVICES

A. Co-ordinate and co-operate with the Owner's authorized representative in the location, protection and
any necessary temporary diversion of existing site services.
B. Make a dimensioned sketch describing the exposed service and locating it in plan and section to
permanent and accessible reference points date and sign the sketch and submit same to the
C. Any service so exposed shall only be covered up by permanent works with the written consent of the
PART 17 - EXISTING TREES AND PLANTS
A. Carefully protect and maintain if applicable all trees, hedges, shrubs, etc., in proximity to the works
and which are to be retained in the permanent works.
PART 18 - INSTRUCTING THE OWNER'S STAFF IN OPERATION OF SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT PRIOR
TO PRACTICAL COMPLETION
A. Prior to practical completion of the installation, the Owner will be appointing maintenance staff or
maintenance contractor to undertake the operation and maintenance of the building services
installation.
The contractor shall include for providing assistance to the Owner's staff during the course of the
installation to explain the purpose and function of the works.
B. Include for a minimum period of 25 plant operating days prior to practical completion, to instruct the
Owner's maintenance staff or maintenance contractor in the day to day running of the plant and
systems. The location and function of all items listed on the record schedules shall be explained and
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 25 of 29

WORK
16010
FALCON CLINIC
the procedures given in the operating and maintenance manuals for starting up, shutting down,
isolating sections, emergency procedures, etc., shall be comprehensively explained and
demonstrated to the Owner's satisfaction.
PART 19 - SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS
19.1
ADDITIONAL SPARE PARTS

A. Six weeks prior to practical completion, submit a schedule of the additional spare parts that the
contractor recommends should be supplied over and above those consumable spares required up
to practical completion and for routine maintenance.
B. Each item on the schedule shall have the manufacturer's current price inserted, which shall also
include for packaging and delivery to site.
C. These additional spare parts may or may not be ordered during the currency of the contract and
therefore the cost thereof shall only be included in the contract sum when the subject of an
instruction by the Owner's authorized representative.
D. Spare parts shall be completely interchangeable and suitable for use in place of the corresponding
part supplied with the plant. They shall be greased and/or painted before packing to prevent
deterioration during delivery and storage.
E. Where spare parts are supplied by the contractor, each package shall be clearly marked and
numbered for identification in accordance with the schedule of spare parts and referenced to the
equipment list in the operation and maintenance manual.
F. Spare parts shall be handed over to the appointed representative of the Owner.
19.2
TOOLS
A. At practical completion, provide two complete sets of tools and portable indicating instruments for the
operation and maintenance of all plant and equipment together with suitable means of identifying,
storing and securing same.
PART 20 - FUEL AND POWER FOR COMMISSIONING

A. Fuel and power for commissioning and performance testing the works including payment of statutory
undertakings for same.
B. Fuel, water and power for running the contract heating system to dry out the building including
payment of statutory undertakings for same.
PART 21 - ATTENDANCE UPON OTHERS
A. Attendance upon and co-ordination of other contractors as necessary for the commissioning and
performance testing of the contract work.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 26 of 29

WORK
16010
FALCON CLINIC
PART 22 - TEMPORARY WORKS

A. All temporary works required for the proper and safe construction of the permanent works and for the
protection of personnel on site.
B. Advise the Owner's authorized representative and the consultant of all temporary works required to
be carried out together with all details of work required to uphold existing services and intended
temporary connections thereto.
PART 23 - CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SERVICES
A. All necessary notifications and authorizations in respect of connection of temporary or permanent
connection to existing services or investigator opening up thereof.
B. No temporary or permanent connection to existing services or investigator opening up thereof shall
be carried out without prior notification to the Owner's authorized representative and any necessary
authorization obtained from the Owner's authorized representative.
PART 24 - SAFETY EQUIPMENT
A. The contractor shall provide and maintain in full working order all necessary safety equipment for
access and inspection purposes for use by the contractor and for use by other personnel on site as
instructed by the Owner's authorized representative. Such equipment shall include, but not be limited
to, protective clothing, safety harness, gas detection and emergency breathing apparatus for
inspection of confined spaces.
PART 25 - RELATED WORK
There will be other Contract Works associated with and related to this Contract.
The Contractor shall make himself fully aware of the interfaces between the requirements of his Works
and the works of other. The Contractor's Works related to the Works of others shall include but not be
limited to the be following.
A. Associated Contract Works
1.
2.
Substructure and under slab drainage

Lifts
B. Associated Local Supply Company Works

1.
2.
3.
4.
Water Company
Electricity Company
Telephone company
Sewerage company
C. Associated Works in Other Divisions of this Contract

Division 14 Division 15 -
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Conveying System
Mechanical
Page 27 of 29

WORK
16010
FALCON CLINIC
The Contractor shall, before commencement his contract work, make himself fully aware of the special
setting-out and installation requirements of other contract Works that affect the Works of this Section.
PART 26 - SCOPE OF WORKS
A. The electrical works shall be executed in strict compliance with the regulations and standards
effective at the time of Tender. Such standards & regulation shall refer to Latest Kahramaa
"Regulations for the Installation of Electrical Wiring, Electrical Equipment and Air Conditioning
Equipment" as issued by the Ministry of Electricity and Water Doha. In case of any doubt, not stated
or covered in the latest local regulations, the British Standards as issued by British Standard
Institution and the relevant code of practice, and the Regulations for the Electrical Installations 16th
Edition as issued by the Institution of Electrical Engineers, shall be applied. The Contractor shall keep
a copy of the said regulations & standards, supplements, etc. on site at all times during the
continuance of the Contract.
The electrical works related to (telephone, Structured cabling, fire alarm and detection systems)
shall be in full compliance to Q-Tel and Civil Defense Department requirements to secure their
approval at handing-over.
B. The works covered by this contract are the design, selection, manufacturing, works testing, supplying
and delivery to site, erecting, connecting up, testing, commissioning, performance testing and
handing over in working order the complete engineering services installations described in the
contract document. The contract works includes but is not limited to the following items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Transformers, and interconnecting 415 V cables.

Main distribution boards (MV Panels), sub main distribution boards, distribution boards
lighting control panels ( LCP).
Emergency generator plant, parallel operation panels and related accessories.
Lighting installation.
Emergency and exit lighting fixtures.
Master antenna and satellite reception system.
Intelligent/Addressable fire alarm life safety system.
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) system.
Public Address system.
Structured cabling System.
Earthing system.
Automatic reactive power compensation.
Lightning Protection system.
C.C.T.V System and alarm monitoring system.
Testing & commissioning.
and
PART 27 - TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

A. The contractor shall be required to demonstrate that the equipment and systems under this Contract
function and operate in full accordance with the Specification and the testing and commissioning
procedures described elsewhere in this Specification.
B. Once the Contractor has demonstrated the operation of the Works to the satisfaction of the Owner's
Authorized Representative the complete integration of the Contractors Works with the Works of
others will be the responsibility of others.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 28 of 29

WORK
16010
FALCON CLINIC
C. Not withstanding this, the Contractor's Works will not be deemed complete until the works are fully
integrated and demonstrated in function and operation as being fully integrated with the associated
works by others.
D. The Contractor shall allow for full attendance to the Owner's Authorized Representative and others in
order that the whole of the Works under this contract can be successfully demonstrated to be
functioning and operating with all other associated works to the satisfaction of the Owner's
Authorized Representative.
E. This shall not relieve the contractor in any way of his responsibilities under the Contract.
END OF SECTION 16010
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 29 of 29

WORK
16010
FALCON CLINIC
SECTION 16110
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special Conditions and Division-1
(General Requirements) apply to work of this section.
B. General Provisions for Electrical Work Section 16010.
C. The requirements of this section apply to raceways specified elsewhere in this specification.
D. Specification Section 15547: Mounting and Isolation of Mechanical and Electrical Systems and related
contract drawings, apply to this section of the work.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work includes providing completely coordinated grounded raceway systems complete with boxes,
fittings, supports, anchors, sleeves, hangers, clamps, straps, seals, flexible connections to vibrating
equipment and accessories, as specified and as required for a complete system. Conduit or tubing
sizes referred to in the specifications and on the Drawings are nominal internal diameters. Raceway is
required for all wiring unless specifically indicated or specified otherwise.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of raceway systems, boxes and fittings of
types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less
than 5 years and shall be of one manufacturer, approved by the kahramaa, and conform to the
requirements set forth in this specification.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, kahramaa regulations
latest edition, VDE/DIN, IEC, BS, NEC, UL and NEMA Standards pertaining to raceways, boxes and
fittings. Provide raceways, boxes and components which have been UL listed and labelled.
C. In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more stringent provision will govern.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including specifications and installation
instructions, for each type of raceway system and box required. Include data substantiating that
materials comply with requirements.
B. Samples: Submit 15cm length of exposed type surface raceways with required finish, in accordance
with requirements of Division 1.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 1 of 13

16110
FALCON CLINIC
C. Shop Drawings: submit dimensioned layout drawings on architectural backgrounds of raceways, boxes
and fitting including, but not limited to size of raceways, boxes and fittings elevations, type and
reference no.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
RACEWAYS
A.
Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC): Full weight steel pipe hot dipped galvanized inside and outside, threaded,
minimum 20mm, unless otherwise noted; minimum 15mm for switch legs.
B.
Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid intermediate grade, hot dipped galvanized outside, threaded,
minimum 20mm, unless otherwise noted; minimum 15mm for switch legs.
C.
Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Thin wall steel, galvanized, threadless, minimum 20mm, unless
otherwise noted; minimum 15mm for switch legs.
D.
Flexible Steel Conduit: Continuous length of specially wound interlocked, galvanized strip steel,
minimum 20mm.
E.
Liquid Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Continuous length of flexible interlocked, galvanized inside and
outside steel tubing, with a continuous copper bonding conductor wound specially between the
convolution, coated with a liquid tight jacket of flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum 20mm
F.
Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit

1.
2.
3.
4.
G.
Self-extinguishing and heavy gauge conduits and conduit fittings to meet BS 4607, BS 6099 and
BS7671 wiring regulations.
For concrete encasement.
For direct burial, Schedule 40 conduits.
Minimum 20 mm for lighting and power wiring, minimum 16 mm for telephone installation.
Wire ways: Steel, minimum 1.5mm thickness, with screw-on covers, raceway knockout, elbow fittings,
hangers, wire retainers, and cabinet adapter; size as noted or required.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 2 of 13

16110
FALCON CLINIC
2.2
FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES

A.
GENERAL
1.
Accessories as required including, but not limited to, bushings, knockout closures, locknuts,
mounting brackets, device box extensions, switch box supports, plaster ears, and plasterboard
expandable grip fasteners, which are compatible with device boxes being utilized to fulfil installation
requirements for individual wiring situation.
2.
Die-cast fittings not permitted.
3.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Earthing (grounding) Bushings: With lug suitable for the size and type of earthing (grounding)
conductor to be terminated.
Page 3 of 13

16110
FALCON CLINIC
B.
RIGID STEEL AND INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT FITTINGS

1.
Steel or malleable iron, standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings, and elbows.
2.
Conductive type thread compounds to insure low resistance ground continuity through conduit.
Watertight couplings and connections in concrete.
3.
Locknuts of the bonding type with sharp edges for digging into the metal wall of the enclosure.
4.
Bushings of the metallic insulating type, consisting of an insulating insert moulded or locked
into the metallic body of the fitting.
5.
Corrosion resistant metallic conduit fittings.
6.
Sealing fittings of the threaded cast iron type. Where sealing fittings are used to prevent
passage of water vapour, utilize the continuous drain type.
C.
Electrical Metallic Tubing Fittings: Steel or malleable iron concrete tight couplings and connectors of
the gland and ring compression type; set screw type connectors are permitted for interior dry locations
only, indent type connectors are not permitted.
D.
Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: Steel or malleable iron, insulated throat angle wedge type.
E.
Surface Metal Raceway Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer to match integrity of raceway

system.
F.
Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit Fittings: As recommended by the manufacturer to match integrity of each
type of raceway system.
G.
EXPANSION AND DEFLECTION COUPLINGS
H.
1.
Comply with approved applicable standards.
2.
Accommodate 1.9 cm deflection, expansion and contraction in any direction.
3.
Allow 30 degree angular deflection.
4.
Include internal flexible metal braid sized to guarantee conduit ground continuity and fault
currents.
5.
Watertight, seismically qualified corrosion resistant threaded and compatible with associated
conduit.
6.
Jacket: Flexible, corrosion resistant, watertight, moisture and heat resistant moulded rubber
material with stainless steel jacket clamps.
SUPPORTS
1.
2.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Zinc coated or equivalent.

Conduit hangers designed for the purpose and have pre-assembled closure bolt and nut and
provision for receiving hanger rod.
Page 4 of 13

16110
FALCON CLINIC
3.
4.
2.3
Multiple conduit (trapeze) hangers not less than 38cm x 38cm, 2,7mm thickness steel, cold
formed dipped clamps. Hanger rods not less than 0.95 cm diameter steel.
Anchors of types, sizes and materials designed for the purpose.
OUTLET BOXES
A.
OUTLET BOXES
1.
PVC heavy gauge for concealed work, and galvanized cast iron or aluminium with threaded
hubs for exposed work; boxes of shapes, cubic inch capacity, and sizes as required, suitable for
installation at respective location.
2.
With mounting holes and with cable and conduit size knockout openings.
3.
With threaded screw holes, with corrosion resistant ridged cover and grounding screws for
fastening surface and device type box covers, and for equipment grounding.
4.
For concealed work, utilize 10cm square or octagon outlet boxes, except as otherwise required
by construction devices or wiring and as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.4
2.5
Above ceiling: 3.8cm deep.

In ceiling or slab: 7.6cm deep.
In wall for fixtures: 7cm deep.
In wall for receptacles and switches: 3.8cm deep.
With raised covers and fixture studs where required.
Gangable type boxes are not permitted.
For installation of more than two devices in a common outlet box, utilize boxes and
device rings manufactured specifically for this purpose.
Outlet box device rings used to be of sufficient depth so as to make the use of
extension boxes and rings unnecessary.
5.
For exposed work utilize 10cm round x 5cm deep for mounting on ceilings and 10cm square x
5cm deep for mounting on walls, except as otherwise required by construction, devices, or
wiring.
6.
Provide blank covers for outlet boxes without devices. Covers to match adjacent plates.
WIRING TROUGHS, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES

A.
Heavy gauge PVC, galvanized sheet steel with screw-on covers for interior work, and galvanized cast
iron and/or 2.7mm thickness stainless steel with threaded hubs, gaskets for outdoors and damp
locations; boxes of shapes, cubic cm capacity, and sizes as required, suitable for installation at
respectable location.
B.
Insulated cable supports.

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
Refer To the "Schedule of Preferred Electrical Manufacturers & Suppliers".
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 5 of 13

16110
FALCON CLINIC
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
Examine conditions under which raceways, boxes, accessories, and fittings are to be installed and
substrate which will support raceways. Notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper
completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 6 of 13

16110
FALCON CLINIC
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
GENERAL
1.
Install raceways, boxes, accessories, and fittings as indicated, in accordance with

manufacturers written installation instructions, requirements of applicable standards, and in
accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that installation complies with
requirements and serve intended function.
2.
Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of electrical raceways, boxes, and components

with other work. Run raceways concealed, except as noted.
3.
Mechanically fasten together metal conduits, enclosures, and raceways for conductors to form
continuous electrical conductor. Connect to electrical boxes, fittings and cabinets to provide
electrical continuity and firm mechanical assembly. Maintain grounding continuity of interrupted
metallic raceways with ground conductor.
4.
Avoid use of dissimilar metals throughout system to eliminate possibility of electrolysis. Where
dissimilar metals are in contact, coat surfaces with corrosion inhibiting compound before
assembling.
5.
Support raceways by means of ceiling trapeze, strap hangers, wall brackets with back spacer,
structural steel angles or channels. Support riser raceways at each floor. Secure raceways to
supports with pipe straps or U-bolts. Space supports as per applicable electrical code and per
manufacturer's recommendations, unless otherwise indicated.
6.
Mount supports to structure with toggle bolts on hollow masonry, expansion shields or inserts
on concrete and brick, machine screws on metal, wood screws on wood. Nails, raw plugs,
wood, and/or plastic plugs are not permitted.
7.
Keep raceways clear of motor foundations. Also, do not obstruct headroom, doorways, or
walkways, with raceway.
8.
Install miscellaneous fittings such as reducers, chase nipples, 3-piece unions, split couplings,
and plugs that have been specifically designed and manufactured for their particular
application.
9.
Use roughing-in dimensions of electrically operated equipment furnished by equipment supplier.

Set conduit and boxes for connection to equipment only after receiving dimensioned drawings
from equipment installer and after checking location with other trades.
10.
Test conduits required to be installed, but left empty, with ball mandrel. Clear any conduit
which rejects ball mandrel.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 7 of 13

16110
FALCON CLINIC
11.
Provide long radius bends for empty raceway systems where required to satisfy the system
cabling requirements.
12.
Install complete raceway runs before pulling in wire or cable. Install raceways so that required
conductors may be drawn in without injury or excessive strain to raceway or cable. Where
raceway size is not indicated, follow applicable code.
13.
Keep end of raceways plugged or capped during construction.
14.
For empty raceways over 3m long, provide fish or pull wire. For 3.8m and larger pull wire to
consist of steel core nylon rope and terminal ball.
15.
Remove damaged or deformed raceways.
16.
Do not support branch circuit conduits by the suspended ceiling or its supporting members,
lighting fixtures, mechanical piping, or air conditioning ducts.
17.
Conduits are not to cross pipe shafts or ventilating duct openings. Avoid present and future
openings in floor, wall or ceiling construction, when so indicated on drawings.
18.
Keep conduits a minimum distance of 45cm from parallel runs of fuels or similar and 15cm from
hot water pipes or other sources of heat. Wherever possible, install horizontal raceway runs
above water and steam piping. Provide thermal insulation where these separations cannot be
maintained.
19.
Support riser conduit at each floor level with clamp hangers.
20.
Use of running threads at conduit joints and terminations is prohibited. Where required, use
3-piece union or split coupling.
21.
Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed.
22.
Install electrical boxes in those locations which ensure ready accessibility to enclosed electrical
wiring.
23.
Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls. Provide not less than 150 mm separation.
24.
Do not install aluminium products in concrete. Plug and seal conduit interconnections.
25.
Position recessed outlet boxes accurately to allow for surface finish thickness.
26.
Fasten electrical boxes firmly and rigidly to substrates or structural surfaces to which attached
or solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete or masonry.
27.
Subsequent to installation of boxes, protect boxes from construction debris and damage.
28.
Set boxes square and true with the building finish. Secure boxes to the building structure and
adequately support all boxes during construction to prevent movement.
29.
Verify outlet locations in finished spaces with Architectural Drawings or Interior Design
drawings, details and finishes. Take caution in locating outlet to allow for overhead pipes, ducts,
and variations in arrangement, thickness in finish, window trim and other Architectural
Construction Details.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 8 of 13

16110
FALCON CLINIC
30.
Correct any inaccuracy in locating outlets without additional expense to the Owner. Refer to
Architect any condition that would place an outlet box in an unsuitable location, such as a
moulding, break glass in wall finish, or behind a heating enclosure.
31.
Mount outlet boxes for similar equipment at uniform height within same or similar areas. Where
mounting height or location of outlets is not shown or specified, mount outlet as best suited for
equipment connected thereto, or as directed.
32.
Provide barriers between switches connected to different phases.
33.
Except where special outlets are required, provide 10cm square wall outlets with single gang
raised cover and bushed plate for signalling systems.
34.
In cold rooms, walk-in refrigeration boxes, etc., when applicable weatherproof raceway
installations and use sealing fittings and compounds as entries.
35.
For conduit or cable tray runs exposed inside the building, mark (stencil 3 M on centres,
including in hung ceiling, with the notation, "Danger, Volts," indicating the actual voltage (i.e.
"Danger 11,000 Volts," "Danger415Volts").
36.
Install conduits located underground beyond the building as follows:
37.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
a.
With a minimum of 60 cm top cover, above the conduits, and sloped away from the
building.
b.
Placed over well tamped trench bottom and on concrete block 1.5 M on center.
Anchor conduits to prevent their movement. Stagger conduit joints a minimum of 15
cm apart. Make all joints watertight.
c.
With a minimum clear separation between the electric and telephone conduits of 30
cm of well tamped earth or 15 cm of concrete.
For conduits and direct burial cable entering the building when applicable perform the following:
a.
Plug all empty raceways.
b.
Enter through floor or wall entrance fittings. For the entrance fittings utilize a gland
assembly cable of provide seal around the conduit or cable to withstand 15M head
of water without leakage.
c.
Slope away from building.
d.
In lieu of wall entrance fittings through floor or wall, 2.5 mm metal plates may be
utilized subject to the following:
1)
Plate extends a minimum of 100mm from raceway in every direction.
2)
Plate is welded to raceways forming a watertight seal.
3)
Raceways are not damaged.
Page 9 of 13

16110
FALCON CLINIC
B.
38.
Work with extreme care near existing ducts, conduits, cables and other utilities to avoid
damaging them.
39.
Provide weather-tight outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or moisture.
40.
Set floor boxes level and flush with finish flooring material. Coordinate trim with type of finish,
i.e., tile, carpet, etc.
For all vibrating equipment adjacent or above acoustically treated areas, provide the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
D.
RIGID STEEL CONDUIT

1.
Use rigid steel conduit for underground installation, in wet or damp locations, for exposed runs
on the exterior of the building, in concrete slabs, for all feeder conduits, in mechanical
equipment spaces, and as noted.
2.
Where conduit is directly buried, provide two coats of polyurethane. Dry thoroughly between
coats and before backfilling.
3.
Where located under the building, encase conduit for all runs above 5mm with concrete
envelope with walls not less than 8cm thick.
INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT

1.
2.
E.
Flexible conduit at the entries, exits, and outlets.

Sealing fittings with compound at the entries and exits.
Supports of rubber-in-shear ceiling hangers.
Expansion fittings at isolating slab joints.
Rubber gasketed recessed outlets.
Back plaster recessed outlets.
Free-standing equipment with vibration isolators.
Use intermediate metal conduit in lieu of rigid steel conduit where permitted by applicable
electrical codes.
Where located under the building, encase conduit for all runs above 5cm with concrete
envelope not less than 8cm thick.
ELECTRIC METALLIC TUBING (EMT)

1.
Use electrical metallic tubing for branch circuits only, in dry locations (hung ceilings, hollow
block walls and furred spaces) and for fire alarm, smoke and fire detection system where in
accordance with all applicable codes, authorities, etc.
2.
EMT is not permitted to be used in mechanical equipment spaces and where subject to
moisture, dampness, and mechanical damage.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 10 of 13

16110
FALCON CLINIC
F.
G.
H.
FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT

1.
Use flexible steel conduit with an internal earth (ground) connection for short connections where
rigid conduit or tubing is impracticable and for final connections to vibrating equipment.
2.
Provide a minimum length of 46cm with slack. Connect the earth (ground) conductor to the
enclosure or raceway at each end.
LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

1.
For damp and wet conditions and in all plenums.
2.
Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit for final connections to motor terminal boxes, transformers
and other vibrating equipment.
3.
Provide a minimum length of 45cm with slack. Connect the ground conductor to the enclosure
or raceway at each end.
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE CONDUIT (PVC)

1.
Use in or below slabs for service entrance conductors (sleeves) for lighting system, telephone
service, lightning protection down conductors and only as otherwise indicated. Provide
separate earthing (ground) wire.
2.
Cut ends square, ream smooth, wipe clean, and apply approved solvent cement and quarter
turn as drawing up tight in accordance with recommendations of manufacturer.
3.
Convert to steel conduit using adapters when entering the building from underground locations.
4.
Maintain a 1M minimum clearance of PVC conduits from hot water and steam lines, where
applicable.
5.
Where located under building, parking lot, and roadways, concrete encase conduit for all runs
above 50mm, where applicable.
6.
Conduit, fittings and accessories shall be of the same manufacture to provide a consistent
system with compatible appearance. The use of alternative designs and different
manufacturer's products will not be permitted.
7.
All conduit joints shall be made in accordance with the manufacture's installation
recommendations using a solvent adhesive recommended by the maker of the conduit. All such
joints shall be watertight.
The same conditions shall apply to joints between conduit, fittings and accessories. The dipping
of conduit or fittings into solvent adhesives is expressly forbidden. Before joints are made,
conduit ends shall be cut square and all burrs and sharp edges shall be removed. Care should
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 11 of 13

16110
FALCON CLINIC
be taken to remove all damp, grease, cement dust and oil from all faces of conduits and
accessories prior to jointing. Conduits shall be entered fully into box spouts and butted into
couplers, other than expansion couplers, for jointing purposes.
8.
Screwed PVC conduit shall not be used unless specifically called for on the drawings or when
the PVC conduit is to be connected to metal equipment, conduit and fittings with screwed
entries. Where such entries are not available, non-screwed male bushes and couplers shall be
used.
9.
Where conduit crosses building expansion joints or where there are changes of temperature in
excess of 25 C, flexibility of the conduit to cope with the associated movement shall be
achieved by a method approved by the manufacturer of the conduit.
10.
All bends shall be made using the correct size spring. Conduit sizes of 25 mm and below may
be set cold but all larger sizes shall be set hot. A pipe vice shall not be used during this or any
other operation. The radius of any conduit bend shall not be less than 4 time the outside
diameter of the conduit. Naked flames shall not be used directly to heat conduit for bending
purposes. The use of conduit bends having factures and conduits with any wrinkles on formed
bends is not permitted.
11.
Concealed conduit and accessories shall be securely fixed before any operations involving
casting, concrete pouring, screed laying and plastering. Fixing shall be by means purpose
made clips which shall not cause deformation of the conduit. Fixings shall be used at regular
intervals not exceeding 1.5 meters and the distance of clips on each side of bends or
accessories shall not exceed 150 mm.
12.
A protective conductor of not less than 2.5 mm2 with green and yellow insulation shall be
installed throughout, sufficiently long to allow looping in and of fittings and accessories. Where
expansion couplers are used allowance shall be made in the length of the protective conductor
to accommodate any expansion.
13.
Where luminaries are to be connected to a ceiling conduit system, metal conduit boxes shall be
used. Fittings may not be hung from the PVC conduit system and full details of the means of
support shall be shown on the Co-ordination and shop Drawings.
14.
Where a number of conduits converge, large adaptable PVC boxes shall be employed to avoid
the conduits crossing. Conduits shall be connected to the boxes by means of male bushes and
couplers.
15.
Different colours shall be applied for conduits of different systems.
I.
Provide expansion-deflection fittings at expansion joints and on length of runs in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations. Utilize expansion-deflection fittings of size as required complete
with bonding jumper.
J.
For Hazardous Locations where applicable
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 12 of 13

16110
FALCON CLINIC
K.
1.
Utilize rigid steel only, unless otherwise noted.
2.
Install approved sealing fittings to prevent passage of explosive vapours as required by the
applicable electrical codes.
For Wet, Damp, or Moist Locations where applicable

1.
3.3
A.
Provide sealing fittings to prevent passage of water vapour, where conduits pass from warm to
cold locations, such as refrigerated spaces, air conditioned spaces, or similar spaces.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Upon completion of installation of raceways, perform continuity tests by testing the resistance of all
feeder conduits from the service to the point of their final distribution using 1 conductor return. Limit the
maximum resistance to 25 ohms. When possible, field-correct malfunctioning equipment, then retest to
demonstrate compliance. Replace equipment which cannot be satisfactorily corrected, at no additional
cost to the Owner.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 13 of 13

16110
FALCON CLINIC
SECTION 16114
CABLE TRAY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
General Provisions for Electrical Work Section 16010.
C.
The requirements specified in this section apply to all related sections in this Division. The
requirements of all related sections, elsewhere in this division also apply to this section unless
specified to the contrary.
D.
Specification Section 15547: Mounting and Isolation of Mechanical and Electrical Systems and
related contract drawings, apply to this section of the work.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.3
1.4
Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to
complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all cable trays shall be in accordance with
Drawings and Specifications.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of cable trays of the types and
capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less
B.
Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, kahramaa

regulations latest edition, DIN/VDE, IEC, NEC, UL, NEMA, IEEE, and ANSI Standards pertaining
to cable trays. Provide cable trays products and components which have been listed and
labelled.
C.
In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more stringent provision will
govern.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for cable trays.
B.
Samples: - Submit 30 cm length of each size of cable tray complete with its accessories and
fittings.
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned layout drawings on architectural backgrounds of cable
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 1 of 6
CABLE TRAY
16114
FALCON CLINIC
trays including, but not limited to, offsets and connections. Show accurately scaled cable trays
with locations of supports and fittings, including fire stops and weather seals. Indicate
relationship of cable trays to other associated equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CABLE TRAY
A. GENERAL
1. A complete cable support system with all required straight sections, fittings, connectors and
accessories.
2. All trays and system components as defined by and in conformance with approved Standards
or latest applicable revisions.
3. Cable Support System:
a.
Exposed non-plenum rated areas; ladder type.
b.
Plenum rated accessible ceilings; solid bottom type complete with flange type solid cover.
c.
Width as required or as shown on the drawings; radius of fittings, 60cm minimum for
wiring 95mm and larger; 45cm for wiring 70mm and smaller or as shown on the
drawings.
4. Fittings such as elbows, tees, cross, etc., with a tangent, or straight section beyond the
curvature to accept one type of universal splice plate to simplify field erections.
5. Usable Minimum Clear Loading Depth: 8 cm.
6. Straight Sections: 3.7 - 4 meters in length.
7. Cable Support System: Aluminium: 6063T6 alloy for extruded parts and 5052 alloy for parts
fabricated from sheet.
8. Cable trays shall be perforated type and manufactured from mild steel and to be galvanized
after fabrication the galvanization must be hot dip galvanized.
9. Minimum thickness of cable trays shall be 1.5 mm thickness for cable tray 30 cm width and
below and shall be 2mm thickness for 40 cm width and above.
10. Cable trays shall be manufactured with plain return flanges
11. Adequate supports shall be provided to prevent stress on cables where they enter or leave the
tray. Where cable trays extend transversely through partitions and walls additional protection in
the form of fire-proof non-combustible barriers shall be provided.
12. All cables shall be fastened securely by purpose made straps or saddles to the cable trays.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 2 of 6
CABLE TRAY
16114
FALCON CLINIC
13. Cable trays shall be connected by means of flexible tinned straps to the nearest bare earthing
conductors and at maximum of 30 meters spacing.
14. Cable trays must be specially reinforced to have high load bearing capabilities across wide
spans, maximum deflection should not exceed 0.5% in the longest span. Also it shall be
mechanically designed to give high torsional rigidity and good resistance against lateral
loading.
15. Where the supported cables run in a vertical or horizontal direction, manufactured bends or
sets shall be provided in order that a continuous cable tray is provided throughout the length or
run.
16. Bends in either vertical or horizontal directions should be dimensioned such that cables may
not be curved less than 15 times its diameter.
17. Perforate-type cable tray shall be used above the suspended ceiling. It shall be manufactured
from mild steel 2 mm thick, finished hot-dip galvanized with a 20 mm return flange on both
edges. Edge height 80 mm.
18. All components and accessories shall be hot-dip galvanized steel after manufacture to give
resistance to corrosion.
19. Same typical details of trays, ladder and perforated type are shown in the drawings.
20. Cable tray width shall be chosen according to the number and diameter of cables lay on the
tray. All feeders and sub feeders shall be laid such that their outer radius is spaced a distance
equal to the diameter of the largest cable.
21. All Cable trays installed in mechanical rooms, all plenum rated areas, open space and on roof
shall be covered with cover.
B.
SAFETY FACTOR
1. Cable Tray at 2.5 meters Span: Capable of sustaining a working (allowable) load of 68 kg per
linear 30 cm with a safety factor of 2, when tested as a simple beam and in accordance with
approved load test method; test specimen to be a single section of cable tray.
2. In addition to and concurrent with the above working load, a 90 kg concentrated load applied at
mid span to result in no permanent deformation of the tray.
3. Design to be such that all like parts are interchangeable and those trays may be readily
assembled and joined without the use of special tools.
C.
Fittings: at least the same thickness and cross sectional area of side members and (rungs,
bottom) as straight sections.
D.
Connectors: High pressure rigid plate type connected by ribbed-neck or square-neck plated
steel bolts and free-spinning lock type nuts not requiring a washer; ribbed-neck or square-neck
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 3 of 6
CABLE TRAY
16114
FALCON CLINIC
portion of bolt to grip the tray side member and connector plate metal to prevent bolt from
rotating during tightening of nut.
E.
Where necessary, provide expansion guides and connectors per manufacturer's thermal
contraction and expansion table; install fixed hold down clamps approximately midway between
expansion connectors; install expansion guides at all other support locations to allow thermally
induced movement of the tray.
F.
Resistance of the connection between adjacent sections of cable trays: not more than 0.00033
ohms; use bonding jumpers of suitable ampacity at all expansion connections and at all
adjustable points.
G.
LADDER TYPE TRAY SECTIONS

1. Ladder-type cable tray shall be used to support heavy cabling as indicated on the drawing or as
directed by the Engineer. The tray shall be designed ladder-like, offering free circulation of air
around cable and minimum moisture and dust-gathering surfaces. Rungs shall be welded to the
ladder profiles. Rung width shall not be less than 30 mm, and center distance between rungs
shall not exceed 250 mm.
Cables are to be prevented from falling down the ladder system by 50 mm height edges along
the whole length of the ladder.
2. Rungs (transverse members) assembled to the side rails by welding to insure integrity of fault
ground path for the life of the system and maximum structural capability; non-welded joining of
rungs to side rails are not acceptable.
3. Cable ladder shall be manufactured from hot dip mild steel and galvanized after fabrication.
4. The ladder thickness should not be less than 1.5 mm.
5. Bearing Surface of Transverse Members: Minimum of 1.9 cm.
H.
SOLID BOTTOM TRAY SECTIONS (PLENUM RATED AREAS ONLY)

1. Trays shall be of corrugated bottom to provide additional strength with cable bearing surfaces
15cm on center. Tray sections shall be complete with flange type flat covers.
I.
LIGHT DUTY TRAYS

1. Aluminium with a maximum overall depth of 10 cm and a minimum usable loading depth of 8
cm.
2. Capable of sustaining working (allowable) load of 36 kg per 30 cm on a 2.5 meter simple span.
3. Safety factor of 1.5 mid-span deflections not to exceed 1.25 cm.
4. Trough Type Trays:
a. Three piece construction consisting of two longitudinal members (side rails) with a
corrugated bottom welded to the side rails.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 4 of 6
CABLE TRAY
16114
FALCON CLINIC
b. Peaks of the corrugated bottom with a minimum flat cable bearing surface of 7 cm and
spaced 15 cm on center.
c.
J.
1.5
To provide ventilation in the tray, the valleys of the corrugated bottom to have 6 cm x 10 cm
rectangular holes punched along the width of the bottom.
All cable trays shall be heavy duty type unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
3.2
Examine conditions under which cable trays are to be installed. Notify Architect in writing of
conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install cable trays and accessories as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions, requirements of applicable standards and in accordance with recognized industry
practices to ensure that installation complies with requirements and serves intended function.
B.
Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of cable trays work with other work.
C.
Install integral fire stops where cable trays penetrates fire-rated walls and floors. Seal between
cable trays and opening and around opening with fire-rated sealant not less than wall, or floor,
fire ratings.
D.
At floor openings provide concrete curb, 10 cm wide and 10 cm high, around cable trays and
seal with non-combustible material.
E.
Provide electrical bonding and equipment earthing (grounding) connections for cable trays.
Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified by manufacturers to assure
permanent and effective connections and grounds.
F.
Anchor mounting hardware firmly to walls, floors, or ceilings, to ensure enclosures are
permanently and mechanically secured. Provide all hardware and accessories for proper
mounting.
G.
Route cable trays as required and make final field measurements before ordering cable tray.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 5 of 6
CABLE TRAY
16114
FALCON CLINIC
3.3
H.
Where there is insufficient elevation or lateral change in direction to accommodate fittings

directly connected, adjustable vertical connectors or adjustable horizontal connectors with
straight section in between may be used. Avoid slopes that would cause cable to bend on
smaller radii; than that allowed by cable manufacturer.
I.
Provide hangers, rods, straps, special brackets, and other means of supporting cable tray as
required.

A.
Prior to installing cables in cable trays, test for electrical continuity of bonding, and earthing
connections, and to demonstrate compliance with earthing requirements.
B.
Electrically energize cable tray systems and demonstrate functioning in accordance with
requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate
compliance. Replace equipment which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 6 of 6
CABLE TRAY
16114
FALCON CLINIC
SECTION 16116
CABLE TRUNKING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special Conditions and Division-1
(General requirements), apply to work of this section.
B.
C.
Specification Section 15547: Mounting and Isolation of Mechanical and Electrical Systems and related
1.2
A.
1.3
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all cable trunking in accordance with Drawings
and Specifications.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of cable trunking of the types and
capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5
years and shall be of one manufacturer, approved by the kahramaa, and conform to the requirements
set forth in this specification.
B.
Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, kahramaa regulations
latest edition, DIN/VDE, IEC, NEC, UL, NEMA, IEEE, and ANSI Standards pertaining to cable trunking
Provide cable trunking products and components which have been listed and labeled.
C.
In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more stringent provision will govern.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for cable trunking.
B.
Samples: - Submit 50 cm length of cable trunking complete with its accessories and fittings.
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned layout drawings on architectural backgrounds of cable trunking
including, but not limited to, offsets and connections. Show accurately scaled cable trunking with
locations of supports and fittings, including fire stops and weather seals. Indicate spatial relationship of
cable trunkings to other associated equipment.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 1 of 4
CABLE TRUNKING
16116
FALCON CLINIC
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
CABLE TRUNKING
GENERAL
1. Trunking and connectors shall be manufactured generally in accordance with DIN/VDE or NEC
2. Trunking and connectors for internal use shall be finished with protection in accordance with
DIN/VDE or NEC.
3. Lengths of trunking shall be efficiently bonded to each other using strip copper links not less
than 12 mm wide x 1.5 mm thick and fixed with brass nuts, bolts and asked serrated washers.
4. Lids shall be lipped and fixed at intervals not exceeding 1 meter by means of quick release can
fasteners. Steel screws and fasteners shall be protected against corrosion by a finish at least
equivalent to zinc coating to DIN/VDE or NEC.
5. Metal partitions in trunking shall be a minimum thickness of 1.2 mm and the finish shall be of
the same standard as the trunking. The method of fixing partitions to the trunking shall not
cause long term corrosion or electrolytic action and shall be such that the partitions cannot be
inadvertently displaced.
6. Connectors shall span the complete internal surface of the trunking and shall be designed so
that the trunking sections mate with butting joints.
7. Vertical trunking shall be supplied with a cable support unit with insulated pins at intervals not
exceeding 3 meters.
8. Horizontal trunking sizes exceeding 100 mm x 50 mm shall be supplied with cable separators
with insulated pins at intervals not exceeding 2 meters.
9. Trunking shall consist of base, snap-on covers, coupling end plates, wall flanges, and panel to
trunking rubber grommet, elbows, tees, adaptor plates and all necessary hangers supports and
accessories.
10. Trunking shall be constructed of steel. All steel units shall be protected inside and outside with
a corrosion resistant finish such as zinc or cadmium, with a top coat of enamel.
11. All trunkings parts shall be mechanically and electrically coupled while protecting wires from
abrasion.
B.
Where any cutting or damage is caused during erection, the finish shall be made good. All burrs and
rough edges shall be removed. Where any corrosion has occurred it shall be removed and the area
treated with a rust- proofing agent. After this it shall be treated by the application of either a zinc rich
epoxy primer or equal alternative followed by a coat of color matching paint.
C.
Any fixing used for securing or fitting shall not cause any long term corrosion or electrolytic action black japanned fixing screws shall not be used. Where brackets are used they shall be constructed of
mild steel angle or channel iron finished to the same standard as the trunking.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 2 of 4
CABLE TRUNKING
16116
FALCON CLINIC
D.
Connections to conduit, multiple box, switchgear and distribution boards shall be made with flanged
units.
E.
Where trunking crosses settlement and expansion joints a trunking joints shall be made. The connector
at this point shall be made with slotted fixing holes to permit a movement of 10 mm in both the
horizontal and vertical planes. The earth continuity links across such joints shall be of braided copper
tape not less than 15 mm wide x 2 mm thick having a resistance from fixing to fixing equal to or less
than the links used for the standard trunking joints.
The braid shall be long enough to allow for the maximum movement of the trunking. The braid ends
shall be folded, and sweated soiled.
2.2
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
INSPECTION
Examine conditions under which cable trunkings are to be installed. Notify Engineer in writing of
conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until
INSTALLATION
A.
Install cable trunking and accessories as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions, requirements of applicable standards and in accordance with recognized industry
B.
Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of cable trunking work with other works.
C.
Install integral fire stops where cable trunking penetrates fire-rated walls and floors. Seal between
cable trunking and opening and around opening with fire-rated sealant not less than wall, or floor, fire
ratings.
D.
At floor openings provide concrete curb, 10 cm wide and 10 cm high, around cable trunking and seal
with non-combustible material.
E.
Provide electrical bonding and equipment earthing connections for cable trunking Tighten connections
to comply with tightening torques specified by manufacturers to assure permanent and effective
connections and grounds.
F.
Anchor mounting hardware firmly to walls, floors, or ceilings, to ensure enclosures are permanently
and mechanically secured. Provide all hardware and accessories for proper mounting.
G.
Route cable trunking as required and make final field measurements before ordering cable trunking.
H.
Where there is insufficient elevation or lateral change in direction to accommodate fittings directly
connected, adjustable vertical connectors or adjustable horizontal connectors with straight section in
between may be used. Avoid slopes that would cause cable to bend on smaller radii; than that allowed
by cable manufacturer.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 3 of 4
CABLE TRUNKING
16116
FALCON CLINIC
I.
3.3
Provide hangers, rods, straps, special brackets, and other means of supporting cable trunking as
required.
A.
Prior to installing cables in cable trunking, test for electrical continuity of bonding, and earthing
connections, and to demonstrate compliance with grounding requirements.
B.
Electrically energize cable trunking systems and demonstrate functioning in accordance with
requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate
compliance. Replace equipment which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 4 of 4
CABLE TRUNKING
16116
FALCON CLINIC
SECTION 16120
WIRES AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
C.
Testing and commissioning, section 16950
D.
The requirements of this section apply to wire and cable work specified elsewhere in these
specifications.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.3
Work includes providing all wires, cables and connections, complete with all accessories in
accordance with Drawings and Specifications and as required for a complete system. Wiring size
referenced in this Section is metric, except as noted. For special wiring for individual systems, refer to
respective Section of these Specifications.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of wires, cables, and connections of types,
sizes and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less
B.
latest edition, DIN/VDE, IEC, NEC, UL, NEMA, ICEA, IEEE, and ASTM Standards pertaining to wires,
cables and connections.
C.
govern.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on wires, cables and connectors.
B.
Samples: Submit 25 cm length cables of each type and size of wires and Cables, Manufacturer Name,
insulation class and reference no. Should be indicated on the Submitted Sample.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 1 of 10
WIRES AND CABLES

16120
FALCON CLINIC
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MAIN AND SUBFEEDER CABLES

A.
GENERAL
Provide all of the main cables shown on the drawings or detailed in the cable schedules.
All single and multi-core cables shall comply with IEC 502 and all conductors shall be copper
P.V.C. and XLPE insulated and P.V.C. sheathed (0.6/1 K.V), armoured or non-armoured type
as indicated on the drawings.
Copper conductors shall be stranded for sections 2.5 mm2, and above. Signal and control
cables shall have solid conductors. Flexible cords shall have finely stranded conductors.
Conductor sizes shall be metric, as shown on the Drawings. Conductors with cross-sectional
areas smaller than specified will not be accepted.
The current carrying capacity of conductors has been determined in accordance with the
Regulations for the specified type of insulation and the expected conditions of installation. No
change will be accepted in the specified type of insulation, unless warranted by special
conditions and approved by the Engineer.
The insulation of each conductor shall be colour coded or otherwise identified as required by
the Regulations. Colour coding shall be maintained throughout the entire installation.
For each lot of cable supply a certificate of origin issued by the manufacturer stating its origin,
manufacturer, constitution and standards to which it complies with. In the absence of such
documents, the Engineer reserves the right to require that tests, at the Contractor's expense,
be performed by an official laboratory on samples taken from lots of cables delivered to the
Site.
Be responsible for any delays in the work resulting from non-compliance with the requirements
mentioned above.
Cable installations whether so indicated or not shall include all joints and their accessories at
terminating ends or at tap-off points, earthing and bonding etc. Carried to completion.
Joints in cable shall not be accepted unless so required in the Drawings. Cables shall be
supplied in lengths sufficient for a straight-through pull from termination to termination.
The definition of "Low Voltage" given in the IEE wiring regulations shall apply and "High
Voltage" shall mean any voltage higher than low voltage.
All cables shall be delivered to site with the manufacturer's seals, labels, or other proof of origin
intact. Such labels and seals shall not be removed until the cable is required for use, and shall
be retained for inspection.
Unless otherwise specified herein or indicated on the drawings or in the cable schedules all
cable over sheaths shall be black.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 2 of 10
WIRES AND CABLES

16120
FALCON CLINIC
Cables shall be handled, terminated and installed in accordance with the cable manufacturer's
recommendations. The technical advice of the manufacturer's recommendations. The technical
advice of the manufacturer's specialists shall be followed if any special conditions or unusual
circumstances apply.
Where cable sizes are not indicated on the drawings or in the cable schedules, the contractor
shall be responsible for determining the correct size of each cable.
Cable sizes shall be determined on the basis of current rating and voltage drop and earth loop
impedance, together within allowance for grouping with other cables and the method of
installation, whichever is relevant, after taking into account the type of cable, the ambient
conditions, the method of installation and the disposition of each cable relative to other cables.
Full details, with illustrations, of all cable supports and fixing devices shall be submitted before
any orders are placed or work put in hand. All cable supports and fixing devices shall be
designed to have a factor of safety of not less than 4
Wherever cables pass through walls, ceilings, partitions and the like, a heavy-gauge PVC
sleeve shall be provided, of internal diameter greater by at least 12 mm, but not more than 25
mm, than the diameter of the cable.
The length of any such sleeve shall be such that each end projects by 5 mm beyond the
surface of the element through which it passes, and the ends of they bore shall be provided
with an adequate radius to prevent chafing of the cable sheath.
Wherever cables pass through floors a heavy-gravy-gauge steel sleeve shall be provided, of
internal diameter greater by at least 12 mm, but not more than 25 mm, than the diameter of the
cable and projecting above floor level by at least 50 mm.
Where cables pass through walls and/or floors which form part of the building's fire
compartmentation, the hole(s) through which the cables pass shall be sealed after the cables
have been installed, so as to give the same standard of fire resistance as the original wall or
floor. Details of the proposed sealing method shall be submitted prior to implementation.
All cables shall be separated from water, gas, and other piped services by a distance of not
less than 150 mm unless the circumstances of the installation make this impossible.
Fire resistant cables will be used as indicated on the drawings and it shall be copper
conductors, XLPE/Steel wire armoured type fire rated for 3hours (950 C), category C,W and Z
with normal operating temperature (90 C) to meet BS 6387.
Cables used for emergency lighting system shall be Pirelli FP200 flex or approved equal and
shall be installed in metal conduit.
2.2
CABLE INSTALLATION
A.
FEEDER AND SUB-FEEDER INSTALLATIONS

Cabling and wiring installation shall be performed strictly in compliance with the kahramaa and
IEE wiring regulation.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 3 of 10
WIRES AND CABLES

16120
FALCON CLINIC
Indoor distribution feeders and sub-feeders such as to distribution panel boards, motor
control-gear, isolating switches etc. shall be in the form of single conductor pulled inside
conduits, or raceways or multi-conductor cables clipped on cable trays, all as generally shown
on the Drawings.
Where two or more cables are run in parallel, they shall be fixed on galvanized steel trays or in
approved special cable supporting and protecting raceways.
Cables shall be fixed to the supporting structures with approved galvanized cast steel clamps at
distances not exceeding 20 diameters.
No joints or splices shall be accepted on main feeders and sub- feeders.
Wires and cables shall be routed in such a way that they are not exposed to excessive heat or
to corrosive agents. If such a condition cannot be complied with the wires and cables shall be
of a type designed for the particular condition or enclosed in the necessary protective raceway,
duct, concrete etc.
B.
FINAL SUB-CIRCUIT WIRING

Final sub-circuit work originating from distribution boards shall be arranged as shown on the
Drawings.
Unless otherwise specifically indicated on the Drawings, all final sub-circuit for corridor lighting
and sockets shall be multi core cables installed on cable tray above false ceiling.
At least 150 mm of free conductor shall be left at each outlet, switch point and pull box for the
making up of joints, or the connection of fixtures or devices, except where conductors are
intended to loop without joints through lamp holders, receptacles and similar device boxes.
Generally, branch circuit conductor sizes are indicated on the drawings. Such sizes are
minimum requirements and must be increased, where required, to suit the length of run and
voltage drop, at no extra cost. Voltage drop from distribution transformers to furthest outlets
shall be as per kahramaa regulations.
C.
WIRES AND CABLES-LIGHT AND POWER-LOW VOLTAGE

All wires and cables shall be manufactured to comply with the relevant Standard Specification
I.E.C. or equal standard. The cables delivered to the Site shall bear the mark of identification of
the manufacturer and the Standard to which it is manufactured. Any cable not having
identification marks shall be rejected.
D.
TERMINATIONS OF L.V. WIRES AND CABLES

Terminations of wires and cables of sizes up to 10 mm, shall be tightly twisted and where
possible doubled back before being clamped. Where two or more wires are looped into the
same terminal these conductors shall be tightly twisted together before being inserted into the
terminals.
Wires and cables of sizes over 10 mm shall terminate with sweated or compression type lugs.
Insulating sleeve shall be used to protect any exposed part of the conductor or sleeve
projecting beyond any insulated shrouding or mounting of a live terminal. Glands for the various
types of multi core cables shall be purpose made and suitable for the equipment enclosure.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 4 of 10
WIRES AND CABLES

16120
FALCON CLINIC
E.
JOINTS AND TAPS ON L.V. WIRES AND CABLES

Joints and taps in multi core or single core feeders and sub- feeders shall be affected in
purpose made kits consisting of outer containing mould, thermosetting insulating compound (or
resin) and by use of appropriate tinned copper ferrules crimped onto the conductors and taped
before pouring in the compound.
Joints or taps on L.V. wires and cables shall be permanently accessible, and unless permitted
otherwise shall be made only in tap boxes or cabinet gutters.
Joints in branch circuits of conductor sizes up to 10 mm shall be made by barrel type
connectors with pinching screws, the whole shielded in porcelain or self-setting compound
shroud. Shrouds of polythene or similar non-heat resistant materials will not be permitted.
Joints in branch circuit conductor sizes larger than 10 mm shall be made by means of preinsulated spring-type spring shall be corrosion resistant tempered metal. Enclosure shall be a
steel shell with an overall vinyl cap and skirt. Connector shall be equal to "Scotch lock" as
manufactured by the 3M Company.
Joints in branch circuit conductor sizes 16 mm, and larger shall be made by two-bolt clamps
protected with an insulating phenolic cover.
2.3
IDENTIFICATION OF L.V CABLES

Except in the case where it is terminated in full view onto a clearly labelled switch, starter,
distribution board or similar piece of apparatus, or onto a motor or other item of equipment the
function of which is evident, each and every cable end shall be provided with an approved
means of identification. In particular, this requirement shall apply to all cables terminating on
the back, or in the base, of cubicle type or similar switchboard or control panel and in any other
case where the function of the cable is not immediately obvious.
The means of identification shall be as follows:A.
An engraved brass or aluminium label securely fixed to the cable sealing box.
B.
An engraved brass or aluminium label securely tied to the cable with galvanized iron or
tinned copper binding wire.
Self-adhesive embossed plastic labels will not be accepted as permanent means of

identification.
The means of identification shall give the cable size, number of cores, and function together
with the cable reference number if one has been allocated.
The cores of all control cables shall be individually identified, at terminations, by means of
approved plastic ferrules bearing indelible characters, in accordance with the numbering on the
relevant wiring diagrams.
All cables run above and under ground shall be identified by means of engraved brass or
aluminium label at intervals not exceeding 30 meters. The labels shall bear details of the cable
size, number of cores, function, and reference number (if any) and shall be securely attached to
the cables with galvanized iron or tinned copper binding wires.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 5 of 10
WIRES AND CABLES

16120
FALCON CLINIC
2.4
INSPECTION AND TEST PROCEDURES

The tests to be carried out shall include but not necessarily be limited to:-
2.4.1
A.
Cables, Low-Voltage, 600 Volt Maximum

Visual and Mechanical Inspection
1.
2.
Inspect exposed sections of cables for physical damage and evidence of overheating.
Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods:
a. Use of low-resistance ohmmeter.
b. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench
method.
c.
3.
B.
Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and indentation.
Electrical Tests
1.
2.
C.
Perform thermographic survey.
Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with low-resistance ohmmeter, if

applicable.
Perform insulation-resistance test on each conductor with respect to ground and adjacent
conductors. Applied potential shall be 500 volts dc for 300 volt rated cable and 1000 volts dc for
600 volt rated cable. Test duration shall be one minute.
Test Values
1.
Compare bolted connection resistances to values of similar connections.
2.
Bolt-torque levels.
3.
Microhm or millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the normal range as
indicated in the manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer's data is not available,
investigate any values which deviate from similar connections by more than 50 percent of the
lowest value.
4.
Minimum insulation-resistance values should be comparable to previously obtained results but

not less than two mega ohms.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 6 of 10
WIRES AND CABLES

16120
FALCON CLINIC
2.5
SMALL WIRING
For the purpose of this specification, the description "small wiring" shall apply to all low voltage
cables and wiring connected directly or indirectly to the public electricity supply system, or to
any independent private supply system for the purpose of supplying electricity to general power
and lighting circuits, except the following:
A.
Telephone, public address, and other communication circuits.
B.
Fire detection, alarm, and other security circuits operating at a voltage level of 24 volts
or less between conductors.
C.
Cables and wiring forming part of a system for the control and/or supervision of the
building engineering services.
All of the above cables and wiring included are fully described elsewhere in this Specification
under appropriate headings.
All cables to be used for small wiring shall comply with the relevant British Standards.
The contractor shall submit with his Tender details of any internationally recognized Standards
and Codes of practice he proposes to use in lieu of, or in addition to, those stated.
All wiring shall be carried out using one or more of the following wring systems, as indicated on
the drawings.
A.
Single-core unsheathed cables drawn into metallic or non-metallic conduit and/or

trunking as specified elsewhere.
B.
Twin- and/or multi-core sheathed cables, armoured or unarmored, clipped to building

surfaces or structures or to cable tray as specified elsewhere.
C.
Mineral insulated cables sheathed or clipped to building surfaces or structures or to

cable tray as specified elsewhere.
D.
Flexible cords and/or cables.
All cables to be used for small wiring shall comply with the relevant DIN/VDE and IEC
Standards.
PVC cables to and rubber cables to IEC/DIN/VDE shall not under any circumstances be run
underground.
No cables shall be installed unless the ambient temperature and the temperature of the cable
are above 0 oC, and have been so for the preceding 24 hours.
Where cables have subjected to temperatures below 0 oC, care shall be taken to ensure that
they are above that temperature for 24 hours before installation.
2.6
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 7 of 10
WIRES AND CABLES

16120
FALCON CLINIC
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
3.2
Examine conditions under which wires, cables and connections are to be installed. Notify Engineer in
writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until
BRANCH CIRCUIT BALANCING
A.
Connect all branch lighting and power circuits to panel boards so as to balance the actual loads
(wattage) within 5%. If required, transpose branch circuits when the work is complete to meet this
requirement.
B.
At the request of the Project Manager or Consultant, perform all necessary tests to show the above
requirement has been fulfilled. Make such tests after the building is occupied.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Install wires, cables and connectors as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions, requirements of applicable Standards and in accordance with recognized industry
B.
Coordinate as necessary to properly interface installation of wires/cables with other work.
C.
Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same raceway.
D.
Use anti-seize compound for copper lug connections to bus bars.
E.
Use pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor
or insulation.
F.
Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope and basket weave wire/cable grips which will not
damage cables or raceway.
G.
Install exposed cable, parallel and perpendicular to surfaces, or exposed structural members, and
follow surface contours, where possible.
H.
Complete conduit or raceway installation (joints made up tightly and the entire run secured in place)
before pulling wire and cable.
I.
Do not pull thermoplastic wires at temperatures lower than-170 oC
J.
Support wires and cables at the upper end of all risers and at intermediate points as required by the
approved manufacturer and applicable electrical codes.
K.
Seal, between the wire and conduit with a non-hardening compound approved for the purpose, cable
and wire entering a building from underground where cable exits the conduit.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 8 of 10
WIRES AND CABLES

16120
FALCON CLINIC
L.
Install cable spacers where required. Provide conduit fittings for spacing of cables at terminations,
consisting of galvanized or cadmium plates, steel or malleable iron threaded conduit and fittings and
inserts of non-metallic insulating material with openings adequate to accommodate cables being
spaced.
M.
In certain systems, equipment furnished by an approved manufacturer may require a different number
and arrangement of conductors from that indicated on the Drawings. In such cases, comply with such
requirements at no additional cost to the Owner.
N.
In wire ways and large pull boxes, lace and tie off conductors in groups of 3 phases and neutral (if
used) as installed in conduits to limit conductor unbalanced loading.
O.
Leave all wires with sufficient slack at terminal ends and lighting fixtures for convenient connections
and servicing. Stow loose ends neatly in outlet box.
P.
Provide splices and taps in accessible boxes, panel boards fittings, gutters, terminal panels, etc., only.
Provide materials compatible with the conductors, insulations and protective jackets on the cables
and wires.
Q.
Keep conductor splices to minimum.
R.
Install splices and taps which possess equivalent-or- better mechanical strength and insulation ratings
than conductors being spliced. Use connectors which are compatible with conductor material.
S.
Tie all circuit and control wiring in cabinets, panels, pull boxes, and junction boxes.
T.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with
manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are
not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques as specified by
approved manufacturer.
U.
Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in accordance with equipment
manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams. Mate and match conductors of electrical
connections for proper interface between electrical power supplies and installed equipment.
V.
Cover splices with electrical insulating material equivalent to, or of greater insulation resistivity rating
than, electrical insulation rating of those conductors being spliced.
W.
Prepare cables and wires, by cutting and stripping covering armour, jacket, and insulation properly to
ensure uniform and neat appearance where cables and wires are terminated. Exercise care to avoid
cutting through tapes which will remain on conductors. Also avoid "ringing" copper conductors while
skinning wire. Cut armoured jackets with tools made specifically for that purpose.
X.
Do not install where applicable thermoplastic wires in computer area raised floors.
Y.
All wires and cables installed in the return air ceiling spaces or similar areas to be installed in metallic
raceways.
Z.
The underground cables where applicable shall be laid below the ground level. After the cables are
laid, the trenches shall be back-Filled to a depth of 15 cm with fine selected soil free from lumps
metallic or other foreign inclusions or where required by engineer by fine sand. A continuous row of
bricks shall be laid, and then the remainder of the trench shall be back filled in an approved manner
with soil, which shall be thoroughly consolidated.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 9 of 10
WIRES AND CABLES

16120
FALCON CLINIC
Where the cables cross the asphalt roads and enter into building, they shall pass through PVC heavy
duty of size as indicated on the drawings.
3.4

A.
Check for physical damage and proper connection in accordance with drawings.
B.
Megger conductors phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for continuity and insulation tests before
connection to utilization devices for the following:
1. 100 percent of feeders
2. 10 percent of branch circuits
3. 100 percent of 3-phase motor branch circuits, 18.5 K.W. (25 HP) and above.
C.
Perform tests prior to connecting equipment and in presence of authorized representatives.
D.
Submit written reports of test results.
E.
Prior to energization, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short circuits.
F.
Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuits and demonstrate functioning in accordance
with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate
compliance. Replace units which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 10 of 10
WIRES AND CABLES

16120
FALCON CLINIC
SECTION 16140
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
C.
Testing and commissioning, section 16950.
D.
The requirements of this section apply to wiring devices specified elsewhere in these specifications.
1.2
A.
1.3
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all wiring devices in accordance with drawings
and specifications.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical wiring devices, of types, sizes,
and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than
3 years and shall be of one manufacturer, approved by the kahramaa, and conform to the
B.
latest edition, DIN/VDE, IEC, NEC, UL, NEMA, and IEEE Standards pertaining to wiring devices.
Provide wiring devices which are DIN listed and labeled. Provide device plates which are DIN listed.
C.
In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes kahramaa regulations latest edition, the
more stringent provision will govern.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on wiring devices.
B.
Samples : Submit samples of all wiring devices included in the contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
GENERAL
Samples of all wiring devices detailed in this section and a choice of cover plates shall be submitted to
the Owner Authorized Representative for approval/selection.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 1 of 6
WIRING DEVICES
16140
FALCON CLINIC
B.
Wiring devices shall comply fully with the relevant European or International Standards.
C.
Each type of wiring devices where applicable shall be of the same manufacturer and where necessary
of the same maker's, catalogue number or description to provide consistent appearance and finish.
D.
Flush mounting wiring devices shall be fitted into purpose made metal boxes only. All wiring devices
shall be flush mounted except in plant rooms.
E.
All boxes or sections of boxes for use with wiring devices must incorporate a suitably marked earth
terminal. Accessory plates shall be secured to boxes by not less than two fixing screws. Where these
screws do not provide adequate earth continuity to metal plates or plates including parts to be earthen
then a bonding connection shall be provided from the earth terminal to the plate or part. The bonding
shall be protected with a green/yellow insulated sleeve. The above requirement shall not apply to the
earth socket on a socket outlet when directly connected to a protective conductor.
F.
All sockets and disconnect switches marked weather-proof shall not be less than IP-55 for (indoor
installation) and IP-67 for (outdoor installation)
G.
Where more than one phase of a supply exists in a multi gang box the following requirements shall
apply :
A clearly visible label showing the maximum voltage present shall be arranged as a warning notice
before access can be gained to live parts.
Wiring and accessories connected to each phase shall be separated from each other by fixed screens
or barriers.
H.
2.2
All faceplates for switches and sockets flush mounted type should be metal.
SWITCHES
A.
All switches for lighting and associated circuits shall comply with BS 3676 and shall be quick make and
break for use on a.c. supplies. Switches shall be single pole and rated not less than 20 A, 240 V for
use only on a.c. systems, including fluorescent or inductive loads to BS standard.
B.
Switches shall be one-way or two-way as indicated on the drawings.
C.
Switches for lighting shall be metal plate switch type with rocker operation, and in single or multi gang
formation where installed in groups.
D.
In damp, outside positions or where marked weather-proof switches shall be IP-55 of non-tracking
plastic, single pole, operated by external means. The switch enclosure shall be polycarbonate
/polypropylene housing
E.
All switches located in corridors or stairs shall be illuminated type.
F.
CEILING ROSES
Ceiling roses where applicable shall be designed for the safe and efficient permanent connecting of
pendant flexible cables to a wiring system.
Ceiling roses shall consist of a base and cover moulded in white non-tracking insulating material.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 2 of 6
WIRING DEVICES
16140
FALCON CLINIC
The cover shall either screw on to the base or be held on the base by not less than two screw. No
connections or terminations shall be incorporated into the cover but it may include an outgoing flexible
cable clamp.
The base shall include terminals for incoming cable and outgoing flexible connecting with a separate
terminal unit for the earth connecting.
Additional terminals shall be included for loop-in cabling. Fixing screw hole centers shall be suitable for
mounting the base on conduit boxes. Knockout sections shall be included in the base for the entry of
sheathed incoming and loop cables.
The complete ceiling rose and its attachment to the ceiling shall be designed to support safely either
the maximum weight suspended by a flexible cord from the ceiling rose in accordance with IEE wiring
regulations, or a luminaries directly attached to the ceiling rose and having a weight up to maximum of
5 kg complete including shades and lamps.
Ceiling roses shall incorporate means for avoiding any mechanical load or strain from flexible pendant
cables being transmitted to the terminals.
2.3
SOCKET OUTLETS
A.
Socket outlets shall comply to BS 1363, switched and shuttered and mounted in ring or multiple
assemblies and shall be of the type and rating as specified / indicated on the drawings.
B.
Matching plugs shall be provided for each socket outlet installed. Half of the plugs shall house 13A
fuses and half 3A fuses.
C.
Plugs tops shall be fitted with the correct rated fuse for the appliance to which it is connected.
D.
Socket outlets shall be complete with boxes not less than 35 mm deep and the box shall have a
suitably mounted brass protective conductor terminal.
E.
Socket outlets installed in flush installations shall have overlapping front plates.
F.
In surface installations front plates shall be flush with the sides of the box and shall be metal clad
unless otherwise specified.
G.
Where socket outlets are installed on perimeter paneling, metal frames for panel mounting shall be
provided.
2.4
A.
2.5
SWITCHED / UN-SWITCHED SPUR UNITS

These shall be to BS 5733, double-pole, un-switched or switched with neon indicator and fuse as
specified, insulated pattern, with satin chrome face plates or to match socket outlets. Indicating type as
for socket outlets.
FLOOR BOXES
Floor box where applicable shall be made of zinc die-cast , cover to be made of nickel galvanized to
withstand 300 kg with non-permanent deformation.
The floor box should have hinged lid without recess, lid offset for used position (cable outlet).
The floor box must suite the No. of approved outlets as indicated on the drawings.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 3 of 6
WIRING DEVICES
16140
FALCON CLINIC
The floor box should have a degree of protection IP65 for outdoor installation.
The floor box should be suitable to the used tiles (carpet or marble) floor and to be approved by Arch.
consultant.
2.6
OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A.
Occupancy sensors should have the following specification.

1. Dual technology (Passive infrared and ultrasonic).
2. Ceiling mounted type 360o.
3. Time delays 5, 10, 15, 20 or 30 minutes.
4. Operating voltage 240V, AC, 50Hz.
5. UL listed and 5 year warranty.
6. Temperature and humidity resistant.
The indicated quantity of sensors on the drawings is the min. and the contractor should supply
occupancy sensors to achieve the best performance.
2.7

The tests to be carried out shall include but not necessarily be limited to:A.

1.
Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
2.
Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding, if applicable.
3.
Prior to cleaning the unit, perform as-found tests
4.
Clean the unit.
5.
a.
b.
c.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Use of low-resistance ohmmeter.

Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench
method in accordance with manufacturers published data. In the absence of
manufacturers published data.
6.
Verify correct blade alignment, blade penetration, travel stops, latching mechanism, and
mechanical operation.
7.
Inspect insulating assemblies for evidence of physical damage or contaminated surfaces.
8.
Verify that fuse size and types are in accordance with drawings; short-circuit studies, and
coordination study.
9.
Verify that each fuse holder has adequate mechanical support and contact integrity.
Page 4 of 6
WIRING DEVICES
16140
FALCON CLINIC
10. Perform as-left tests.

B.
C.
2.8
Electrical Tests
1.
Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance

ohmmeter.
2.
Perform insulation-resistance tests on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with

switch closed and across each open pole for one minute. Test voltage shall be in
accordance with manufacturers published data.
3.
Perform an overpotential test on each pole, phase to ground with cutout closed. Ground
adjacent cutouts, if applicable. Test voltage shall be in accordance with manufacturers
published data. In the absence of manufacturers published data.
4.
Measure contact resistance across each cutout.
Test Values
1.
2.
Bolt-torque levels.
3.
Micro-ohm or millivolt drop values should not exceed the high levels of the normal range as
indicated in the manufacturers published data. If manufacturers data is not available,
investigate any values, which deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than
50 percent of the lowest value.
4.
Insulation-resistance values shall be in accordance with manufacturers data.
5.
The insulation shall withstand the overpotential test voltage applied.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
INSPECTION
Examine conditions under which wiring devices are to be installed. Notify Engineer in writing of
conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install wiring devices as indicated, in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions, requirements
of applicable standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that
installation complies with requirements and serves intended function.
B.
Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other work.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 5 of 6
WIRING DEVICES
16140
FALCON CLINIC
C.
Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean, free from excess building materials, dirt,
and debris.
D.
Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed and tested.
E.
Install wall-plates after painting work is completed.
F.
Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment
manufacturer's published torque tightening values for wiring devices.
G.
Protection of Wall-plates and Sockets upon installation of wall-plates and sockets advise Contractor
regarding proper and cautious use of convenience outlets. Prior to Owner accepting project, replace
those items which have been damaged, including those burned and scored by faulty plugs.
H.
Provide equipment earthing connections for wiring devices, unless otherwise indicated.
I.
Verify exact locations of switches and receptacles with architectural and interior design drawings.
J.
Install switches indicated on plans for the various rooms directly adjacent to the entrance door and as
shown on the approved shop drawings.
K.
Check the architectural drawings for the door swings and locate all switches on the lock side of the
openings. Verify in field prior to switch outlet installation.
L.
Coordinate all final mounting heights with Architect's elevations and details prior to installation. Where
heights are different than those indicated or specified, the architectural heights take precedence.
M.
Where two or more switches control more than one 240 volt branch circuit, barrier boxes to prevent
415 volts occurring in any one box.
N.
Where more than one wiring device is mounted in the same location, gang mount such devices on a
common face plate.
O.
Vertically align devices shown above other on the drawings on a common centerline unless shown
otherwise.
P.
Where an outlet is indicated as serving a specific piece of equipment, locate outlet as required by
equipment or layout roughing drawings. Work from approved equipment and roughing shop drawings
to locate outlets.
Q.
Fully coordinate switched mounted in metal architectural frames, posts and mullions with all trades
involved. Submit method of wiring and type and style switch to Architect for approval.
3.3
A.

Upon completion of installation of wiring devices, prior to energizing circuitry, test wiring devices for
electrical continuity and for short-circuits. Ensure proper polarity of connections is maintained.
Subsequent to energization, test wiring devices to demonstrate compliance with requirements.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 6 of 6
WIRING DEVICES
16140
FALCON CLINIC
SECTION 16150
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
1.2
A.
1.3
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all miscellaneous control equipment shall be in
accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of miscellaneous control equipment of the
types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not
less than 5 years and shall be of one manufacturer, approved by the kahramaa, and conform to the
requirements set forth in this specification. Provide miscellaneous control equipment produced by a
manufacturer listed as an Acceptable Manufacturer in this section.
B.
latest edition, DIN/VDE, IEC, EN, NEC, UL, NEMA, IEEE, and ANSI Standards pertaining to
miscellaneous control equipment. Provide miscellaneous control equipment which has been listed and
labeled.
C.
In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more stringent provision will govern.
1.4
A.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for miscellaneous control equipment, including sizes and
types of enclosures, finishes, and electrical ratings and characteristics.
1.5
PRODUCTS
1.6
CONTACTORS AND REMOTE CONTROL SWITCHES
A.
GENERAL
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 1 of 3

16150
FALCON CLINIC
B.
1.
Mechanically or electrically held with contacts normally open or normally closed and/or
combination as indicated on drawings as required.
2.
Rated for continuous operation with capacities and voltage at 50 Hz, as indicated on drawings
as required.
3.
Spring loaded contacts to maintain contact pressure in closed position, readily replaceable,
self-aligning type.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Suitable for inductive or non-inductive loads, unless otherwise noted.

With arc shields and magnetic blow coils if interrupting duty exceeds 300 ampere.
Interrupting capability not less than six times rated full load current.
Operating coils voltage: 240 volts, unless otherwise noted.
Enclosure: Dead front, NEMA type, soundproof, with vibration isolation mounting.
MECHANICALLY HELD CONTACTORS

1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
ELECTRICALLY HELD CONTACTORS

1.
2.
1.7
Single and/or dual coil operation.

Positive locking type without the use of latching hooks or magnets.
With a manual operator for hand operation giving positive indication of contactor position.
Control Circuit: For 3-wire operation with momentary contact open/close stations as indicated.
Spring assisted gravity open on normally open contacts and spring loaded magnetically open in
normally closed contacts.
Control Circuit: For 2-wire operation with maintained contact open/closed stations as indicated
or required.
MULTIPLE POLE RELAYS
A.
Electrically operated, mechanically held type, with 10 amperes minimum rated contacts.
B.
Open and close coils rated 240 volts or 415 volts, 50 Hz, unless otherwise indicated as required.
C.
Number of poles as indicated on drawings or schedules.
D.
Enclosure: Industry Standards.
1.8
LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMERS
A.
Rated as required for voltage, momentary volt-ampere load, and continuous volt-ampere load and
suitable for the intended application.
B.
With primary and secondary over current protection with fused switches in accordance with the codes
governing.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 2 of 3

16150
FALCON CLINIC
1.9
1.10
EXECUTION
1.11
INSPECTION
A.
1.12
Examine conditions under which miscellaneous control equipment is to be installed. Notify Architect in
writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
INSTALLATION
A.
Install miscellaneous control equipment and accessories as indicated in accordance with

manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of applicable Standards in accordance with
recognized industry practices to ensure that installation complies with requirements and serves
intended function.
B.
Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of miscellaneous control equipment work with other
work.
C.
Protect miscellaneous control equipment systems from dirt, moisture and construction debris
subsequent to and during installation until project is accepted by Owner.
D.
manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors.
E.
Mount all equipment in cabinets suitable for installation with all necessary bus bars and terminal strips.
Separate low and high voltage sections with barriers.
F.
Provide all wiring, conduit and accessories including but not limited to terminal strips, rectifiers,
switches, and fuses for systems to perform intended function.
G.
Provide emergency shut-down facilities at mechanical equipment locations and other locations
indicated on drawings and as required.
1.13
A.
Prior to energization of installed miscellaneous control equipment, test for electrical continuity of
circuitry and for possible short circuits.
B.
Electrically energize miscellaneous control equipment systems and demonstrate functioning in

accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units, and then retest to
demonstrate compliance. Replace equipment which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 3 of 3

16150
FALCON CLINIC
SECTION 16170
SAFETY AND MOTOR ISOLATORS (DISCONNECTS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
C.
D.
The requirements of this section apply to safety and motor disconnects specified elsewhere in
the specification.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.3
1.4
complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all safety and disconnect switches (fused
and un-fused) in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of safety and motor disconnect

switches of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 3 years and shall be of one manufacturer, approved by the
kahramaa, and conform to the requirements set forth in this specification. Provide safety and
motor disconnects produced by a manufacturer listed as an Acceptable Manufacturer in this
section.
B.
Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes,

kahramaa
regulations latest edition, DIN/VDE, IEC, EN, NEC, UL and NEMA Standards pertaining to
safety and motor disconnects. Provide disconnect switches which have been listed and
labelled.
C.
govern.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including printed technical literature, installation,
instructions, and catalog cuts for each type of safety and motor disconnect switches.
Page 1 of 5
SAFETY AND MOTOR ISOLATORS

(DISCONNECTS)
16170
FALCON CLINIC
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SAFETY AND MOTOR DISCONNECT

A.
SWITCH INTERIOR
1. Switchblades fully visible in the OFF position when the door is open.
2. Removable arc suppressor where necessary to permit easy access to line side lugs.
3. Industry listed lugs for aluminium and/or copper cable and front removable.
4. Plate all current carrying parts.
5. Provision for field installed fuse pullers.
6. Solid neutral where required
B.
SWITCH MECHANISM
1. Heavy duty load break type 4 poles.
2. Rating: Voltage, poles, amperes, horsepower, and maximum available fault current as required
or as shown on the drawings.
3. Quick-make and quick-break operating handle and mechanism integral with the box, not the
cover.
4. Defeatable dual cover interlock to prevent inadvertent opening of the switch door in the ON
position or closing of the switch mechanism with the door open.
5. Handle position to indicate if switch is ON or OFF.
6. Provision for padlocking handle.
C.
ENCLOSURE
1. Industry Standard except as otherwise noted or required, with multiple knockouts on all sides
and back.
2. Hinged door and cover.
3. Industry Standard for exterior installation.
4. Industry Standard type most suitable for the environmental condition of the area.
5. All disconnect switches marked weather proof type should be type NEMA4 (for indoor
installation) and type NEMA 4X for (outdoor installation).
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 2 of 5

(DISCONNECTS)
16170
FALCON CLINIC
2.2

The tests to be carried out shall include but not necessarily limited to:-
A.

1.
2.
Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and required area clearances.
3.
Prior to cleaning the unit, perform as-found tests, if required.
4.
Clean the unit.
5.
Verify correct blade alignment, blade penetration, travel stops, and mechanical operation.
6.
Verify that fuse sizes and types are in accordance with drawings; short-circuit studies, and
coordination study.
7.
Verify that each fuse holder has adequate mechanical support.
8.
-
9.
Use of low-resistance ohmmeter.

Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torquewrench method in accordance with manufacturer's published data.
- Perform thermographic survey.
Test all interlocking systems for correct operation and sequencing.
10. Inspect insulating assemblies for evidence of physical damage or contaminated surfaces.
11. Verify all indicating and control devices.
12. Lubrication requirements
- Use appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts.
- Use appropriate lubrication on moving and sliding surfaces.
B.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Electrical Tests
1.
Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance

ohmmeter, if applicable.
2.
Perform insulation-resistance tests on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with

switch closed and across each open pole for one minute. Test voltage shall be in
accordance with manufacturer's published data.
Page 3 of 5

(DISCONNECTS)
16170
FALCON CLINIC
C.
3.
Measure contact-resistance across each switchblade and fuse holder.
4.
Measure fuses resistance.
5.
Verify heater operation.
6.
Perform ground-fault test.
Test Values
1. Compare bolted connection resistances to values of similar connections.
2. Bolt-torque levels.
3. Micro-ohm or millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the normal range as
investigate any values which deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50
percent of the lowest value.
4. Minimum insulation resistance shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published data.
5. Investigate fuse-resistance values that deviate from each other by more than 15 percent.
2.3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
3.2
Examine conditions under which safety and motor disconnects are to be installed. Notify Engineer in
writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until
INSTALLATION
A.
Install safety and motor disconnect switches as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions, requirements of applicable Standards, and in accordance with recognized industry
B.
Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of safety and motor disconnects with other work.
C.
Protect disconnect switches from dirt, moisture and construction debris, subsequent and during
installation until project is accepted by Owner.
D.
Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws bolts and equipment grounding connections in
accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment
connectors.
E.
Install disconnect switches used with motor-driven appliances and motors and controllers within
sight of controller position unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Provide box with spare set of each size fuse used on project.
indicating equipment served.
G.
Install fuses in fused switches.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 4 of 5
Provide nameplate on switch,

(DISCONNECTS)
16170
FALCON CLINIC
H.
3.3
Provide equipment grounding connections, sufficiently tight to assure a permanent and effective
ground, for electrical disconnect switches.
A.
Upon completion of installation of electrical disconnect switches and after circuitry has been
energized, demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Close all switches to check for
proper energization of all loads. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units then retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 5 of 5

(DISCONNECTS)
16170
FALCON CLINIC
SECTION 16195
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
C.
The requirements of this section apply to electrical identification specified elsewhere in this
specification.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.3
Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, and services to complete and
make ready for the Owner, the identification of all electrical equipment as required by this section
and other sections of the specifications. This includes, but is not limited to buried cable warning,
power, control and communication conductors, operational instruction and warnings; danger
signs, and equipment system identification signs.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical identification products of
types required whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3
years and shall be of one manufacturer, approved by the kahramaa, and conform to the
requirements set forth in these specifications.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, kahramaa
regulations latest edition, DIN/VDE, IES, NEC, UL, and NEMA standards pertaining to electrical
identification.
C. In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more stringent provision will
govern.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical identification materials and products.
B. Samples, complete with nomenclature for the following:
1. Engraved lamacoid plates of each size of lettering.
2. Wraparound labels.
3. Metal tags.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 1 of 4
16195
FALCON CLINIC
4. Enamelled sheet metal signage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
LAMACOID NAMEPLATES
A. Identification switchgears and panel-boards: Engraved lamacoid nameplates with 6 mm high
white lettering on black background fastened to the outside face of the front.
B. Identification for distribution switches or circuit breakers of the following:
1. For Individually Enclosed Units: Engraved lamacoid nameplates with 3 mm high white lettering
on a black background fastened to outside front face of enclosure.
2. For Panel-boards Without Doors: Same as for individually enclosed.
3. For Panel-boards With Doors: Typewritten directories mounted behind transparent plastic
cover, in metal frames fastened on inside face of doors; directories to indicate circuit number,
designation of room and number and item being served in directories.
2.2
WRAPAROUND LABELS AND METAL TAGS

A. Identify the wires and cables of feeders by means of fibre or non-ferrous metal tags fastened with
non-ferrous metal wires or bands throughout; fastenings for metal tags of the same metal as the
tag.
2.3
ENGRAVED LETTERING
A. Engrave device plates for local toggle switches, toggle switch-type motor starters, pilot lights, and
the like, whose function is not readily apparent with 3mm high letter suitably describing the
equipment controlled or indicated.
2.4
STAMPED LETTERING
A. Stamp phase identification letters into the metal of the bus bars of each phase of the main busses
of each switchgear and panelboard; make letters visible without having to disassemble any
current carrying or supporting elements.
2.5
IDENTIFIABLE MARKINGS
A. Identify each outlet box, junction box and cabinet used in conjunction with empty raceway for
wires of a future system by means of identifiable markings on the inside denoting the system.
2.6
ENAMELED SHEET METAL SIGNAGE

A. Equip all electric switchboard rooms, electric closets, metal screened spaces assigned to electric
equipment and the like, with enamelled sheet metal "red on white" signs reading "Electric
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 2 of 4
16195
FALCON CLINIC
Equipment Room-No Storage Permitted"; mount signs at clearly visible locations within the
rooms.
2.7
ENGRAVE
A. Device plate for receptacles other than 240 volt 10 and 16 amperes receptacles with 3 mm high
black letters and designating the following:
1.
Voltage
2.
Number of phases
3.
Current rating.
B.
2.8
Device plates for receptacles on emergency, engraved "EMERGENCY".
MARK
A. Cabinets housing emergency lighting and receptacle panel-boards with the word "EMERGENCY"
stencilled in 5 cm high red letters on the outside of the cabinet, in addition to other lettering and
nameplates required above.
2.9
NOMENCLATURE
A. The nomenclature used to identify switchgear and panel-boards to match the nomenclature used
on the drawings.
B. The nomenclature used to identify switches or circuit breakers to:
1.
Designate where they disconnect mains or service together with suitable differentiating
nomenclature where more than one service or main is involved.
2.
Designate the feeder number and the name of the load supplied where they control feeders.
3.
Designate the name of the space and the load supplied where they control lighting and
appliance branch circuitry.
C. The nomenclature used to identify feeder wires and cables to designate the feeder number.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which electrical identification products are to be installed. Notify
Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work.
Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 3 of 4
16195
FALCON CLINIC
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. Install electrical identification products as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions, requirements of applicable Standards, and in accordance with recognized industry
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of electrical identification products with other
work.
C. Comply with governing regulations and requests of governing authority for identification of
electrical work.
D. Wherever reasonably required to ensure safe and efficient operation and maintenance of
electrical systems and electrically connected mechanical systems and general systems and
equipment, including prevention of misuse of electrical facilities by unauthorized personnel, install
signs or similar equivalent identifications, instruction or warnings on switches, outlets and other
controls, devices and covers of electrical enclosures. Where detailed instructions or explanations
are needed, provide plasticized tags with clearly written messages adequate for intended
purposes.
E. Install signs at location for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and
maintenance of equipment. Secure to substrate with fasteners, except use adhesive where
fasteners should not or cannot penetrate substrate.
F. Securely fasten signage and nameplates.
G. Identify each wire or cable in a feeder at its terminal points of connection and in each hand-hole,
pull box, junction box and panel gutter through which it passes.
H. Label all conductors in wire-ways and pull and junction boxes with panel-board designations and
circuit number.
I.
Identify Individually:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
HV switchgear
Transformer
Switchgears
Main and feeder devices in switchgears.
Distribution and circuit breaker panel-board
Safety switches
Audio-visual equipment cabinets
Boxes for fire alarm system
Cabinets, junction and pull boxes of all systems installed, i.e., fire alarm (life safety)
system, telephone, television, security, etc.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 4 of 4
16195
FALCON CLINIC
SECTION 16320
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special Conditions and
C. Wires and cables section 16120
D. Testing and commissioning, section 16950
E. Specification Section 15547 Mounting and Isolation of Mechanical and Electrical Systems and related
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to
complete and make ready for operation, all wiring devices in accordance with drawings and
specifications.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of transformers of the types, and
capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than
5 years and shall be of one manufacturer, approved by the kahramaa, and confirm to the requirement
set forth in these specifications.
B. Standard Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, kahramaa regulations
latest edition, DIN/VDE, IEC, EN, NEC, NEMA, ANSI, and IEEE Standards, pertaining to primary
switchgear. Provide primary switchgear products and components which have been UL listed and
labelled.
govern.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for transformer including, size enclosures, and electrical
ratings and characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings of primary
switchgear, single-line diagram, and outline drawings.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 1 of 10
16320
FALCON CLINIC
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A. The contractor shall supply, install, commission & test dry cast resin transformer complete with
connections, terminations and accessories. The cast resin transformer shall be designed and
manufactured for continuous indoor operation in a tropical climate on a 3 phase distribution system
with solidly earthed neutral. It shall be of a short circuit, impulse and moisture-proof design. The case
resin transformer shall be designed, manufactured and tested according to the latest edition of
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Standard 726. It shall be compact and suitable for
easy installation on site.
B. The transformer shall be designed to operate in an enclosure of the protection class IP23 without
derating.
C. The electrical connections to other equipment shall be properly coordinated to form a complete
system (s) complying with this specification.
D. Workshop drawings shall be provided for each transformer. These drawings shall include fully
dimensioned external and internal general arrangements showing all principle dimensions, weights,
foundation/cable/busbar entry details and the positions of all functional devices, schematic drawings
showing all windings, method of connection, terminal markings, and IP rating.
E. Transformers in the context of this specification shall comprise assemblies of a magnetic core,
primary and secondary windings, supporting framework and enclosure.
Unless otherwise specified all terse used shall comply with IEC 726 and DIN/VDE standards
F. The design, manufacture, selection, installation, testing, commissioning and subsequent
maintenance of all equipment and materials described in this specification shall comply with the
requirements of, the electricity at work regulations and the IEE wiring regulations.
Where more onerous requirements are specified herein, the conditions of this specification shall take
precedence.
2.2
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:
A. CORE CONSTRUCTION
The transformer core shall be built of lamination, comprising grain orientated silicon sheet steel
which is insulated on both sides. To protect the core against corrosion and improve noise levels the
core assembly shall be coated after assembly with resin based paint.
The lamination shall be clamped at top and bottom by steel channels, which are interconnected by
vertical steel bolts. The bottom steel channels shall be used to support the transformer and the top
steel channel shall incorporate lifting lugs.
The bottom core clamping channels shall be bolted to supporting steel cross-channels placed at 90o
to the transformer length, such that the whole unit is stable and able to support the whole weight of
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 2 of 10
16320
FALCON CLINIC
the transformer with a safety factor of two. Wheels shall be fitted to the cross-channels which shall
be bi-directional or steerable.
The supporting cross-channels shall be insulated from the core- clamping channels by anti-vibration
pads.
The core-clamping and supporting steel work after all forming, drilling and shaping operations shall
be thoroughly digressed and rinsed prior to application of a zinc phosphate primer, rinsed again and
finally coated with an oven baked epoxy paint.
B. COIL CONSTRUCTION
Each transformer shall be a double wound type with both the H.V. and L.V. windings individually
encapsulated in rigid steel mould. The coils shall be impregnated with quartz filled epoxy resin and
cast under vacuum, to produce a smooth finish without voids and undulations.
The size and spacing of the conductors used in the windings shall be such that the coils are selfsupporting prior to impregnation and where applicable, shall allow the epoxy resin to fill all of the
space in and between adjacent layers and turns.
The coefficients of expansion of the windings and epoxy resin shall not differ by more than 15%.
The windings shall be made of copper or aluminium, utilizing round or rectangular sections, or foil,
as detailed in the attached schedule(s)
C. MECHANICAL FORCED VENTILATION (AF)
Where specified mechanical forced ventilation shall be employed to further cool the transformer
windings and thus increase the performance rating during short highly loaded periods.
The cooling system shall be automatically controlled by sensing the low voltage top winding
temperature.
The system shall comprise a number of single-inlet, single-width centrifugal fans, each connected to
a discharge duct situated directly below the transformer coils, or axial fans, situated to direct the air
flow through the coils.
Duct work shall be of sheet metal construction to DW/142 low pressure classification, or of greater
thickness to suit manufacturing procedures, or incorporated as part of the base frame construction if
required.
Ducts shall have discharge outlets, protected with metal mesh screens to exclude debris, to
correspond with core positions on each side. Ends shall be capped.
Fans shall have spigot inlets, with 6 mm protective wire guard, and flanges outlets to connect to
mating flanges on the air ducts, and joint to incorporate a flexible gasket.
Fans shall be direct driven by an internally fitted external rotor type motor with extended lubricators.
Each motor shall be supplied from a starter, complying with DIN/VDE standards and shall be housed
in a purpose-mad cabinet also accommodating automatic control elements and status indication
lamps.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 3 of 10
16320
FALCON CLINIC
The duty of each fan shall be identical and selected so that the total quantity of air delivered is
sufficient to maintain the transformer temperature within the specified limits.
Fans shall be type tested to DIN/VDE Standards Impeller shall be mild steel to DIN/VDE standards
and of welded construction, shaft height machined steel, bearings roller type or sealed for life. Fan
scrolls shall be of welded construction.
For shaft powers below 1kW stamped formed strip impellers may be used provided required
efficiency and balance grade can be achieved.
Where fan static pressure is less than 1kpa lock-formed joints and spot welds may be used.
Fans and ductwork shall have a fully protective paint system to the same standard as the core
construction.
D. INTERTURN INSULATION
High and low voltage coils shall be provided with very high integrity interturn insulation to Class F, to
withstand the thermal and mechanical stresses under the specified operating conditions.
E. MOUNTING OF COILS
Coils shall be sandwiches between the core clamping channels but separated from them by
insulated support blocks. These blocks shall be radially located top and firmly fixed to withstand
vibration and absorb coil expansions and contractions.
F. INSULATION CLASS
The HV and L.V windings shall be of insulation class F in respect of mechanical and electrical
strength (Partial Discharge Test). The maximum continuous operation temperature shall be within
the limit of the maximum system temperature according to IEC 726 i.e. 155oC.The maximum
temperature rise shall be limited to 90K at 50oC ambient. The transformer shall operate at higher
ambient temperature with reduced load without getting damaged.
G. DEGREE OF PROTECTION
When specified, a transformer enclosure shall be designed to suit the location and anticipated
environmental conditions. This shall provide a degree of protection not less than IP23 in compliance
with IEC 529, and shall comply with there Electricity at work Regulations.
H. TYPE OF RESIN, FILLER ETC
The particular manufacturer's insulation system shall dictate the type of resin and filler but the
following guidelines shall be complied with.
The resin shall ensure a minimum power frequency breakdown stress 10KV/mm when tested to IEC
243.
The completed cast resin coil shall be self extinguishing in the event of fire. The testing method shall
comply with IEC, DIN/VDE standards. Type test certificates are required to confirm the above.
2.3
PERFORMANCE
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 4 of 10
16320
FALCON CLINIC
A. GENERAL
The transformers shall comply with the requirements of IEC 726 in respect of partial discharge,
impulse withstand short circuit strength.
B. RATED VOLTAGE
Unless otherwise specified the rated voltage class of the primary windings shall be 11KV and
secondary windings 0.433 KV, at a frequency of 50Hz. The windings shall be connected for vector
group DYn 11.
C. THERMAL RATING
Transformers shall be designed and manufactured to operate continuously at the nameplate rating,
in an ambient temperature not exceeding 50oC and RH not exceeding 100%, unless otherwise
specified.
The manufacturer shall confirm any de-rating necessary, should the transformers be required to
operate in conditions exceeding those specified.
Transformers which are mechanically cooled shall have in increased thermal rang not less than 40%
of the name plate rating.
D. LOSSES
Losses at no-load and loaded conditions shall be the lowest achievable for the transformer type
specified. These losses shall be stated in the schedule(s) which accompany this Specification.
E. NOISE LEVELS
The manufacturer shall confirm the guaranteed noise levels, Measurement of sound levels shall
comply with IEC Publication 551. The transformer shall be provided with noise reduction support
blocks in order to reduce noise level.
F. ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Radiation of electromagnetic signals shall not exceed the limits of BS 800 and BS 6667.
Where transformers may be vulnerable to voltage transients, they shall be protected by surge
suppressor, which will reduce transients below the levels of the type tests.
2.4
HANDLING FACILITIES
A. LIFTING
Transformers shall be provided with permanently fitted lifting lugs or eye bolts to facilitate handling
by crane or hoist.
Transformers shall be equipped with jacking points to facilitate the removal and or insulation pads.
The bottom supporting steel work shall be fitted with holes or have lugs attached for the attachment
of hauling apparatus.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 5 of 10
16320
FALCON CLINIC
B. FRAME WHEELS
Transformers shall be designed for floor mounting and be provided with removable bi-directional or
steerable rollers.
The rollers shall be lockable or means provided to prevent movement of the transformers after
installation.
2.5
CONNECTION FACILITIES
A. CONNECTION METHODS
Connection methods shall comply with IEC 76-4. Provision shall be made by the manufacturer for
the mounting and connection of cable boxes and/or busbars as specified for the HV and LV
conductor connections.
Where HV and LV cable boxes and/or busbars are specified these shall generally be arranged on
opposite sides of the transformer. However exact positions shall suit the specified requirements of
each individual situation.
LV cable terminations shall be kept separate from the HV cable connections and insulated to the
specified voltage and able to withstand the specified short circuit currents.
All HV coil interconnections shall be insulated for the specified voltage, and able to withstand the
specified short circuit currents.
An earthing terminal shall be provide at a convenient point on the supporting steel work. All steel
work shall be bonded to the earthing terminal if it is not electrically continuous. Provision shall be
made for making an earth connection to the neutral of the LV windings, should this be required.
B. TERMINAL MARKINGS
HV and LV winding terminals shall be clearly marked with characters in accordance with IEC 76-4.
The characters shall be stamped or engraved on securely fixed, durable and non-corrodible plates.
2.6
TAP CHANGING FACILITIES

A. TAP CONNECTIONS AND LINKS
Each transformer shall be provided with tapping on the HV winding to cater for supply voltage
variations in the range +2.5% and + 5% in compliance with IEC 76-4.
Tap changing shall be effected by off-circuit tapping links.
A visible warning notice shall be fixed adjacent to the tapping links and worded as follows:
" WARNING - OFF LOAD TAP CHANGING LINKS - ISOLATE
HV AND LV SUPPLIES TO TRANSFORMER BEFORE OPERATION"
2.7
THERMAL PROTECTION
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 6 of 10
16320
FALCON CLINIC
Each transformer shall be provided with a system of thermal protection and temperature monitoring.
Temperature sensing thermostats shall be mounted in each LV coil as close as practicable to its hot
spot. The thermostats shall be wired back to an electronic controller fitted on the transformer.
The thermostats shall be used to indicate winding temperature, and provide alarm and trip
indications, and to operate forced cooling fans and trip HV circuit breakers where specified. Voltfree contacts shall be provided for relaying signals to remote equipment.
Wiring from the thermostats to the temperature controller shall be carried out with single core copper
cables to DIN/VDE standards with LEF insulation. Cables shall be contained in galvanized steel
conduit supported from the transformer steel work.
The temperatures at which the cooling fans shall be switched on and off shall be adjustable within
preset limits.
The power supply for the cooling fans shall be provided from the particular transformer via a suitably
fused switch. This switch shall bear the inscription in yellow letters on a black background:
" WARNING - SUPPLY FOR TRANSFORMER COOLING FANS DO NOT SWITCH OFF"
The starter assembly for the cooling fans shall comply with this Specification. A warning label shall be
fixed adjacent to the main isolating switch bearing the inscription:
"WARNING - SUPPLY FOR TRANSFORMER COOLING FANS DO NOT SWITCH OFF"
2.8
RATING PLATES
Rating plates shall be fitted complying with IEC 726.
2.9
TESTING INSPECTION AND COMMISSIONING

The tests to be carried out in accordance to IEC 726 and kahramaa requirements. Test report shall
be provided as dictated by kahramaa and shall include but not necessarily be limited to:
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Inspect physical and mechanical condition including evidence of moisture and corona.
Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.
Clean the unit.
Verify that control and alarm settings on temperature indicators are as specified.
Verify that cooling fans operate.
-
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Use of low-resistance ohmmeter

method.
Page 7 of 10
16320
FALCON CLINIC
8. Perform specific inspections and mechanical tests as recommended by manufacturer.

10. Verify that as-left tap connections are as specified.
11. Verify the presence of surge arresters.
B. Electrical Tests
1. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance ohmmeter.
2. Perform insulation-resistance tests winding and each winding ground with test voltage. Calculate
polarization index.
3. Perform power-factor or dissipation-factor tests in accordance with the test equipment
manufacturer's published data.
4. Perform a power-factor or dissipation-factor tip-up test.
5. Perform turns-ratio tests at the designated tap position.
6. Perform an excitation-current test on each phase.
7. Measure the resistance of each winding at the designated position.
8. Measure core insulation-resistance at 500 volts dc if core is insulated and if the core ground strap
is removable.
9. Perform an over potential test on all high- and low-voltage windings-to-ground. See ANSI/IEEE
C57.12.91, Sections 10.2 and 10.9.
10. Verify correct secondary voltage phase and phase neutral after energization and prior to loading.
C. Test Values
1. Compare bolted connection resistances to values of similar connections.
2. Bolt-torque levels should be in accordance with Table 10.12 unless otherwise specified by
manufacturer.
3. Micro-ohm or millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the normal range as
indicated in the manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer's data is not available, investigate
any values which deviate from similar connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
4. Insulation-resistance test values at one minute should be in accordance with Table 10.5.
5. The polarization index shall be compared to previously obtained results and should not be less
than 1.0.
6. Turns-ratio test results should not deviate more than one half percent from either the adjacent
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 8 of 10
16320
FALCON CLINIC
coils or the calculated ratio.

7. CH and CL power-factor or dissipation-factor values will vary due to support insulators and bus
work utilized on dry transformers. The following should be expected on CHL power factors:
Distribution transformers: 5.0 percent or less
Consult transformer manufacturers or test equipment manufacturer's data for additional
information.
8. Tip-up test watts loss values should indicate no significant increase in power factor.
9. Temperature corrected winding-resistance test results should compare within one percent of
previously obtained results.
10. Typical excitation current test data pattern for three-legged core transformer is two similar
current readings and one lower current reading.
11. Core insulation-resistance values should be comparable to previously obtained results but not
less than one mega-ohm at 500 volts dc.
12. AC overpotential test shall not exceed 65 percent of factory test voltage for one minute duration.
DC overpotential test shall not exceed 100 percent of the ac rms test voltage specified in
ANSI C57.12.91, Section 10.2 for one minute duration. The insulation should withstand the
overpotential test voltage applied.
D.
(iv).
SITE TESTS
All site tests shall be carried out in accordance with this Specification.
After delivery to site each transformer shall be inspected in the presence of the Owner's
consultant, prior to installation.
After installation on properly prepared foundations each transformer shall be tested and
inspected in the presence of the Owner's consultant.
The HV and LV winding connections shall be demonstrated as providing the specified polarity
and phase rotation and tap connections.
The HV and LV windings shall be tested for continuity and insulation resistance with a 1000v
insulation tester. The insulation resistance between adjacent windings shall not be less than
100 M ohm.
After the HV windings are energized, it shall be demonstrated that the voltage and phase
rotation at the LV terminals are as specified.
2.10
PARTICULAR REQUIREMENT - ACCESS

The specified transformers are located as indicated on the drawings.
This places restrictions on the transformers' physical dimensions in case it is necessary to
remove/replace a transformer once the installation is handed over and in use.
The Contractor shall demonstrate to the Owner's consultant that the manufacturer's transformer
type selected could be removed/replaced (without incurring builders work) with access through the
proposed location.
If required by the Owner's consultant, detailed dimensioned drawings proving removal/replacement
is practical shall be provided.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 9 of 10
16320
FALCON CLINIC
2.11
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
HV Supply system
. Number of phases
. System neutral
. Fault level (nominal design)
11000V
3 phase
Not Applicable
500 MVA
LV Supply system
. No-load voltage
. Number of phases
. System neutral
. Rating
433 V
3 Phase
4 Wire
1600 K.V.A.
Supply frequency
50 HZ
(HZ)
HV winding connection
DELTA
LV winding connection
STAR
Vector group reference

o
Impedance at 75 C
DYn 11
HV Tapping (% of no-loads volts)
+ 2.5% +5%
Method of cooling
Natural + Forced ventilation for 40% extra

rating.
Secondary voltage at:

. Full Load
. No Load
415 V
433 V
6%
11000V
433/250V
12KV
75BIL
28KV
1.1KV
3KV
Rated Voltage
HV Insulation level
. Impulse KV peak
. Power frequency
Paint finish colour
HV conductor and type
LV conductor and type
Manufacturer Standard
Top entry XLPE cables
Top entry Busway
Indoor or outdoor
Installation/space limitations
Indoor - refer to layout

Drawing
coil material
coil material
2.12
(KV RMS)
(HV)
(LV)
Aluminium or copper
Copper
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 10 of 10
16320
FALCON CLINIC
SECTION 16425
SWITCHGEAR ASSEMBLIES MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
C. Wires and cables section 16120.
D. Distribution transformer section 16320.
E. Testing and commissioning, section 16950.
F. Specification Section 15547: Mounting and Isolation of Mechanical and Electrical Systems and
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
complete and make all switchgears ready for operation in accordance with drawings and
specifications.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of switchgears of the types, and
capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than
5 years and shall be of one manufacturer, approved by the Kahramaa, and conform to be
requirements set forth in these specifications.
B. Switchgear shall be manufactured in accordance with the following:1.
BS 5486, IEC 439 & IEC 947 which outlines the requirements for electrical power switchgear
and associated apparatus.
2.
Kahramaa Regulations for the installation of electrical wiring, electrical equipment and air
conditioning equipment, latest edition.
3.
Qatar Construction Specifications.

The switchgears manufacturer shall be on the prequalified list of the Kahramaa. The
contractor shall secure the particular approval of Kahramaa to manufacturers drawings and
diagrams prior to fabrication of the switchgear. Failure in securing Kahramaas approval
before and after the fabrication would mean rejection of the submittal and the works, thus the
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 1 of 18
SWITCHGEAR ASSEMBLIES MAIN

DISTRIBUTION BOARD
16425
FALCON CLINIC
installation. Any part of installation thus rejected shall be replaced or rectified by the
Contractor at his own expense, to the satisfaction of Kahramaa and the Engineer. Kahramaa
approval in no case shall mean approval of the Engineer, as these specifications might call for
higher than specification and performance required by regulations.
Specifications of components of switchgear shall apply to all components, used in any type of
distribution board, such as instruments, CTs, relays, BMS control etc.
govern.
D. The following terms used on the Drawings and in the Specifications are equivalent and may be used
interchangeably switchgear and Main Distribution Board.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for switchgears, including size, enclosures, and electrical
ratings and characteristics.
B.
Shop Drawings : submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings.
C.
Relay Coordination
a.
Submit to the Engineer a relay and C.B. coordination study.
b.
The Current-time characteristics must be plotted on a log-log papers showing that the choice of
the C.B. and relay settings are correct for coordination, curves plot on computer software are
permitted.
D.
If selectivity coordination study is failed, contractor is responsible to change any number of breakers,
relays, such that the selectivity coordination is fully achieved with no extra cost to the owner.
E.
Short circuit and Voltage Drop Calculation

Submit a comprehensive short circuit study as well as voltage drop calculations based on the actual
impedance values of the electrical components such as supply short circuit level at the 11 KV (shall
not be less than 500 MVA), transformer, bus bars and cables...etc. Calculations may be performed
by manual method or by computer software programs.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A. Main Distribution board(s) shall be complete factory assembled, built-in accordance with BS 5486,
tested and shipped ready for installation, complete including but not limited to the following main
components:-
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Bus-bar system for three phase and neutral, fully shrouded, insulated and electro-tinned.
Withdrawable motorized main air circuit breakers.
Page 2 of 18

DISTRIBUTION BOARD
16425
FALCON CLINIC
Tie breakers.
Outgoing moulded case circuit breakers.
Cubicle compartments for above, free standing type.
Restricted earth fault (REF) relay.
Ammeter with maximum demand indication.
Voltmeter 0-500V with selector switches for 'OFF', phase to phase and phase to neutral
measurements.
Current transformer of class X and class I category of suitable ratings.
Red, Yellow and green phase indication lamps.
HRC type control fuse.
Removable copper link between N & E busbars.
150 mm2 window-in-meter compartment.
Nonmagnetic aluminium gland plates for Kahramaa single core cables.
All the labels for incoming and outgoing feeders, circuit breakers, etc.
B. A power supply unit complete with battery charger and long life lead acid batteries shall be supplied
with MDB for tripping of ACB's through dc shunt trip. The unit shall be designed to operate on input
voltage of 240Vac, single phase, 50Hz and be on continuous duty at an ambient and recommended
by Kahramaa.
C. MDB's shall be rated for electricity supply of 415 volts, 3-phase and neutral, 5-wire, 50 Hz., with
neutral solidly earthed via removable link. The equipment shall be suitable for operation on a system
having a fault level of 44,000 A RMS symmetrical for 3 seconds (ATSA certified) or equivalent.
D. MDB's shall be of the size and number of sections indicated, and shall not exceed the dimensions
shown on the drawings or specification herein.
E. The entire MDB's shall be shipped in one section unless approval is given by the Engineer.
F. MDB's manufacturer shall be independently certified to ISO 9000/BS 5750 Quality specification. The
Contractor shall submit a copy of the certification to the Engineer for approval. The panel assembler
shall be ISO 9002 certified.
G. Refer to single line diagrams for rating and type of feeders required.
H. Provide Kahramaa meters and C.T.'s for each incoming and landlord's section. Meters shall be
mounted in separate components in each section. All meters shall be approved and calibrated by
Kahramaa.
I.
2.2
Prior to starting manufacturing of MDB's the Engineer's and Kahramaa's approval shall be secured.
CONSTRUCTION
A. The MDB shall be designed and manufactured to form 3b type 2 constructions as defined in IEC 4391. The enclosures shall be constructed and having additional gasketed and cover plates to achieve a
degree of ingress protection IP54. The MDB offered shall hold a current type-tested (ASTA certified)
or equivalent covering the principle elements of construction. The certificate must be obtained by the
manufacturer and third party compliance will not acceptable.
B. The enclosure shall be made up of steel frames bolted and welded together to form a rigid freeRev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 3 of 18

DISTRIBUTION BOARD
16425
FALCON CLINIC
standing dead front structure, with flush flange type sheet steel doors and covers plates as required.
All sections shall be uniform dimension and appearance.
C. All sections shall be fabricated of at least 2mm thick galvanized sheet steel, treated for corrosion
resistance after manufacturer, i.e. after forming, welding and holes punching have been completed.
The finishing coat shall be electrically deposited epoxy powder paint inside and outside light
blue/gray colour RAL 7032.
D. All incoming and outgoing feeders, cables and busbar trunkings entries shall be from the top with
front and near access unless otherwise stated or required due to lack of space or shown on
drawings; if the space is inadequate it shall be accessible only from front, giving full and unobstructed
access to all components, bus bars, cables, glands, and terminations.
E. MDB heights shall not exceed 2200mm from the finished floor. Compartment for future breakers shall
be complete with bus connections, disconnecting contacts and supporting rails, ready for the
insertion of a breaker, and with insulating covers for the disconnecting contacts.
F. All components shall be of a single manufacturer.
G. Control contacts, auxiliary contacts, relays and small or light mechanism shall be enclosed and
protected, and shall be accessible for repair or adjustment.
H. Provide a mimic bus configured to reflect the single line distribution of the system. The mimic bus
shall be black and attached on the face of each MDB by a heat process. Painted lines and "Dymo"
tape will not be accepted.
I.
2.3
Anti-condensation heaters shall be provided within the assembly and shall be controlled by a panel
mounted hygrostat (humidity detector) with a 50% to 100% relative humidity setting.
BUS BARS
A. Busbars shall be rectangular section, hard drawn high conductivity copper and should be electrotinned throughout length: Provision shall be made extending the buses to future cubicle at each end
of the MDB.
B. All busbar shall be certified for fault rating of 44kA for 3 seconds.
C. Bus-bars shall be totally enclosed within sheet steel compartment to provide optimum safety against
accidental contact.
D. The main (life) and neutral buses shall be of the same rating as depicted on the drawings, rated for
continuous duty at 50 C ambient temperature.
E. A copper ground bus not smaller than 10x50mm shall be run the full length of the panel. The metal
frames of all components shall be connected to the ground bus. Provide a lug for connecting to the
external ground conductors at each end of the bus.
F. All busbars vertical and horizontal shall be fully insulated using either high dielectric strength purpose
manufactured rigid PVC sections or coating applied by the fluidized bed principal.
G. Busbar joints shall remain accessible for routine maintenance by the removal of purpose
manufactured rigid or flexible shrouds held in position by plastic fasteners. The use of selfRev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 4 of 18

DISTRIBUTION BOARD
16425
FALCON CLINIC
amalgamating tapes or heat-shrink sleevings is not specially precluded.

2.4
AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Air circuit breakers shall be three or four pole as detailed on the drawings with microprocessor based
protection and shall respond to true RMS value of waveform including harmonic distortion within the
neutral pole. Air circuit breakers shall have a control voltage of 24V-250V ac from one unit. All air
circuit breakers shall comply with EN 60947 part 2 utilization category B and to IEC 947 part 2. The
bus coupler air circuit breakers if shown on drawings shall be four poles, electrically operated, spring
assisted withdrawable pattern. This latter shall be provided with electrical and mechanical interlocks
to prevent incorrect operation and to provide safety for personnel in 'Test', 'Service' and 'Withdrawn'
positions.
B. Interrupting capacity shall be minimum 50KA RMS symmetrical.
C. Breakers shall be drawout type, with interlocks to prevent moving a closed breaker into or out of the
connected position. Having 3-position: connected, test and withdrawn.
D. Breakers shall be equipped with earthing device to solidly earth the framework before the main
disconnecting contacts are engaged and to maintain the earth until after the contact have separated.
E. Main and tie breakers shall be electrically operated, with key switch mounted on the faceplate.
F. Breakers shall be completely self-powered with no external control power source required. If external
control power is required, 110V dc batteries and charger shall be provided. Batteries to be Ni-Cad
type.
G. Breakers shall be provided for protection against, short circuits with time delay and earth faults and
have the following functions:
-
Adjustable long current time delay trip.

Adjustable short circuit time delay trip.
Adjustable instantaneous trip.
Adjustable ground fault current time delay trip.
H. All circuit breakers shall also be provided with trip circuit supervision relays.
I.
All breakers of the same type and interruption rating shall be interchangeable.
J.
If the design drawing show interlocking or if requested by kahramaa, then provide key interlocks
between the transformers secondary and the breakers so that only two of the three breakers can be
ON any one time to avoid parallel operation.
K. Air circuit breakers shall be provided with electrical tripping and electrical closing, and shall be
capable of withdrawal to the test and disconnected position with the cubicle door closed. Motor
charged spring operated mechanism shall be provided which shall be automatically re-charged
immediately following their closing duty. Spring mechanism if fully charged. The facility to charge
circuit breakers shall also be provided with hand operated mechanical trip device to trip the circuit
breaker.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 5 of 18

DISTRIBUTION BOARD
16425
FALCON CLINIC
L. Breakers shall be complete with microprocessor based control unit.

M. Breakers shall be designed for operating in a 50oC ambient temperature and the contractor shall
provide copies of all test certificates for the engineers approval.
N. Safety shutters shall be provided to cover the main plug-in contacts on the enclosure and shall have
a padlock facility for the closed position. The shutters shall open automatically by means of a positive
drive initiated by the movement of the circuit breakers carriage. Closing shall also be automatic
initiated by the circuit breaker carriage. All shutters shall have warning notices attached, and shall be
effectively earthed.
O. The drawout mechanism shall be provided with a safety interlock to ensure that the breaker is open
and the closing spring is discharged before the breaker is either withdrawn from the cell or connected
into the cell.
P. Secondary control contacts shall be provided on drawout units to automatically connect or disconnect
control circuits, as the circuit breaker moves through its positions in the cradle.
Q. Under-voltage trip units shall be installed on all breakers to provide protection on loss of system
voltage or low system voltage. The unit shall incorporate a time delay attachment with an adjustable
delay up to 5 seconds.
R. An overload lockout device shall be installed to prevent reclosing of the breaker either manually or
electrically after the breaker has been tripped by the overload relay. This device shall be manually
reset by a spring return reset button. Alarm contacts shall be provided.
S. A draw out level shall be provided for all breakers to permit safe removal of the breaker from the
enclosure.
T. Breakers shall be complete with a digital led monitor to enable the following measurements to be
read:
-
2.5
Phase current and highest current.

Earth fault current.
Long time delay trip current / line.
Short time delay trip current / line.
Instantaneous trip current.
Voltage monitoring.
Frequency monitoring.
PF monitoring.
Power consumption active and reactive.
Maintenance due signal.
Remote data transfer.
Control supply for spring charge motor shall be taken from 415/240V control voltage
transformers, connected to each section.
Moulded Case Circuit Breakers

A. All outgoing feeder circuits shall be protected by mccb's as specified.
B. All circuit breakers shall comply with BS 4752,IEC 947 PART 2 with utilization category B and have a
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 6 of 18

DISTRIBUTION BOARD
16425
FALCON CLINIC
factory set adjustable instantaneous magnetic trip release and adjustable thermal trip.
C. All circuit breaker shall be bolted type, with rotary cover interlocked handle.
D. All breakers shall be provided with adjustable earth fault protection (10% - 40% of the rated current).
E. Interrupting capacity shall be a minimum 50 KA RMS symmetrical.
F. Circuits indicated as "space" shall include a breaker of the rating indicated.
G. All breakers shall be individually designed to 50o C ambient temperature. A formal certificate will be
required from the manufacturer confirming that the breakers have been suitably temperature
compensated.
H. To keep uniformity of components and maintain discrimination, all moulded case circuit breakers
should be of the same manufacturer complete study shall be provided as mentioned under item 1.4
C,D,E for final evaluation.
2.6
Metering
A. Provide all necessary current and potential transformers to operate metering and alarms, and other
interfere units required for full operation of building management system.
B. Provide digital totalizing total of MWHR AND kW.
C. Provide line drives for remote sensing.
D. Provide digital meters on all main incomer breakers.
E. Provide indicating lights and relays for signalling earth faults to the miscellaneous alarms
annunciator.
2.7
External Connections
A. Provide bus extensions and busbar trunking flanges as required completely coordinated with the
outgoing busbar trunking feeders. Provide bus transition section where required with bolted access
panels.
B. Provide barrier type terminal blocks for all interconnecting and outgoing small wiring. Identity terminal
and conductors ends by means of suitable approved markers, to agree with the wiring diagrams.
Terminal blocks shall be accessible for inspection and testing.
2.8
Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor (TVSS)

A. The module high-energy transient voltage surge suppressor (TVSS) shall be provided. TVSS shall
provide effective high-energy surge current diversion and be suitable as applicable in ANSI/IEEE
C62.41 Category A, B and C3 environments, as tested by ANSI/IEEE C62.11, C62.45.
B. The equipment shall be designed, manufactured, tested and installed in compliance with the following
codes and standards:
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 7 of 18

DISTRIBUTION BOARD
16425
FALCON CLINIC
1. International Electrotechnical commission (IEC 801) EMC directive 89/336/EEC-CE compliant.

2. Canadian Standard Association (CSA).
3. American National Standards Institute and Institute of Electrical and Electrical Engineer
(ANSI/IEEE C62.11, C62.41, C62.45).
4. Federal Information Processing Standards Publication 94 (FIPS PUB 94).
5. National Electrical Manufacturer Association (NEMA LS-1 1992).
6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 20, 70, 75 and 780).
7. National Electric Code (NEC).
8. Underwriters Laboratories (UL 1449 and UL 1283) (Second Edition).
C. The system shall be constructed using multiple surge current diversion modules utilizing metal oxide
varistors (MOV) computer matched to a variance of 1 volts and tested for manufacturing defects.
The modules shall be designed and constructed in a manner that ensures current sharing. Use of gas
tubes, silicon avalanche diodes or selenium cells are unacceptable.
D. 1000 kA 3 phases and earth TVSS unit shall be provided.
E. TVSS and all components in the suppression path maximum continuous operating voltage shall be
greater that 115% of the nominal system operating voltage to ensure the ability of the system to
withstand temporary RMS over-voltage.
F. TVSS system shall be duty life cycle-tested to withstand 20 kV, 10A, IEE C62.41 category C3 surge
current with less than 5% degradation of clamping voltage. The minimum numbers of surge the unit
shall be able to protect against of 12.000 life cycle surge per mode and 24,000 life cycle surge per
phase.
G. All components individually fused and rated to allow maximum specified surge current capacity.
H. TVSS system shall be completed with unit status indicators, dry contacts for remote monitoring,
under voltage detection, phase loss monitoring and power loss monitoring.
2.9
Current Transformers
A.
Main Data:
Type
Standards
Temperature Rating
Short Time
Primary Voltage
Output
:
:
:
:
:
:
Rated secondary current :

Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Epoxy resin encapsulated.

BS 3938
Class B Temperature Rise
44 kA for 3 Seconds
600 Volts
Matched with the load of protective devices, interfacing and measuring
instruments and transducers.
5A for measuring instruments.
Page 8 of 18

DISTRIBUTION BOARD
16425
FALCON CLINIC
B.
Accuracies :
a. Class 1, For protective circuits of class 5P20 Kahramaa requirements.
C.
Features :
a. Secondary circuits of each CT earthed through removable bolted copper link at one point only.
b. Routine test reports for reports for individual CTs.
c. Type test reports for magnetizing current and related accuracy factor for each type and ratio.
d. All outputs connected to test terminal blocks equipped with removable links.
e. Easy connection of testing instruments ON LOAD without OPEN circuiting the CTS.
f. Auxiliary Contacts.
g. No plastic casing.
h. No split core type CTs.
2.10
Voltage Transformers
A.
Main Data :
Type
Standards
Temperature Rating
Short Time
Primary Voltage
Output
B.
C.
:
:
:
:
:
:
Epoxy resin encapsulated.

BS 3941
Class B Temperature Rise
44 kA for 3 Seconds
600 Volts
Matched with the load of protective devices, interfacing and measuring
instruments and transducers.
Accuracies :
a. Suitable to the functions, loads and duties, with following as the minimum.
Features :
a. Protection application
Class 6P.
b. Indication and metering
Class 0.5.
c.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Primary and secondary circuits fuse protected
Page 9 of 18

DISTRIBUTION BOARD
16425
FALCON CLINIC
- Auxiliary Contacts.
2.11
2.12
LED Indicated Lamps

A.
Except where combined push button indication lamps are being offered, all indicated lamps
shall be individual flush mounted units. LED lamps shall have chromium plated and polished
solid brass body and ring, with metallic threaded section and shall be circular in shape of
approximately 20mm diameter. The LED lamps shall be with translucent cap having illuminant
of red, yellow, blue, green and white.
B.
LED indicating lamps shall rated to withstand not less than 20% continuous over-voltage.
Alternatively, lamps with series dropping resistors or capacitors shall be provided to reduce the
lamp voltage by 25%.
C.
LED lamps shall be well ventilated and the design shall permit removal of lamp glasses and
bulbs from the front of the unit without the need of any special tool. Sample of the LED
indication lamps shall be submitted for approval
Accessories
A.
Furnish the following accessories:

-
2.13
Set of extension rails, as required.

Hoisting device for removing breakers.
Set of test plugs.
Levering out device, as required.
Manual maintenance closing level, for electrically operated breakers.
Set of special tools and hardware.
MAIN CIRCUITS
A. Main circuit wiring shall be PVC insulated to IEC, DIN/VDE standards and, where appropriate, sized
for Type 2 protection coordination to IEC 947. Connections to and from functional units shall be
segregated from control and adequately supported to withstand the forces due to short-circuit faults.
The sizes of wires shall be calculated in accordance with the IEE Wiring Regulations.
B. All cable connections shall be made at fixed terminals with no intermediate joints.
C. Insulated conductors shall not rest against bare live parts or exposed sharp edges.
2.14
AUXILIARY WIRING
A. All non-screened auxiliary wiring, except that which is required to be screened, shall be carried out on
600/1000V grade insulated, multi-stranded flexible conductors complying with IEC, DIN/VDE
standards.
B. The minimum conductor size shall be 1.5mm.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 10 of 18

DISTRIBUTION BOARD
16425
FALCON CLINIC
C. All auxiliary wiring shall be identified at both ends with numbered and resistor colour coded ferrules.
These numbers shall be shown on the control schematic wiring diagram.
D. All auxiliary wiring shall be contained within cabling trunking and totally segregated from power wiring
as far as practicable. Wiring of circuits at different voltage categories shall be segregated. Joints will
not be permitted on wiring between devices.
E. Cable trunking shall be of the ventilated type with clip-on covers and purpose made junctions and
accessories. Cables shall not occupy more than 25% of the trunking cross-sectional area.
F. Wiring not contained within trunking shall be strapped in looms with removable straps and held in
place by suitable cleats. Looms shall not exceed more than 25 wires. Self-adhesive straps shall not
be acceptable.
G. All wiring connections from trunking and looms to devices shall be run in straight lines, horizontally
and vertically, and be neatly dressed.
H. Wiring to door mounted devices shall be flexible and provided with a large enough loop to clear the
edge of the opening. Protection against abrasion shall be provided by means of flexible conduit or
spiral wrapping securely fixed at each end.
2.15
I.
Where wiring passes through partitions it shall be protected against abrasion by thermoplastic
grommets and spiral wrapping.
J.
Interconnections between functional units shall be contained within a separate cabling chamber or
trunking. All cables shall terminate on the functional unit terminals within the cubicle.
LABELS
A. All enclosures containing functional units shall be clearly labelled with a circuit, unit reference and
current rating.
B. All labels shall be of the engraved type made from suitable multi-layer laminate and shall be fixed
with zinc plated cheese head instrument screws. No other type of label will be acceptable.
C. Every functional unit shall be labelled separately from all others. External labels shall have letters not
less than 5mm in height and internal labels not less than 3mm. The letters shall be black in colour on
a white background.
D. All covers/doors not fitted with interlocked switched disconnections enclosing unshrouded live
equipment shall be fitted with warning labels inscribed "DANGER 415V ISOLATE BEFORE
OPENING".
E. Warning labels shall have black letters on a bright yellow background. Wherever possible, letters
shall be not less than 30mm in height. On small covers and doors letters of 20mm or 10mm in height
shall be used.
F. Cable boxed shall be clearly labelled both externally and internally with the circuit and functional
device number.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 11 of 18

DISTRIBUTION BOARD
16425
FALCON CLINIC
G. All terminal blocks shall be labelled relative to the respective functional unit.
H. Every control and metering device, selector switch, pushbutton and indicator light shall be clearly
labelled to indicate its purpose.
I. Main identification labels shall be provided on the assembly together with a rating plate.
J.
Fixed and with drawable portions of equipment including fixed and plug-in devices shall be labelled
with drawable portions cross-referenced to their fixed part.
K. Proposed engraving details shall be submitted for comment prior to engraving.

2.16
COMPONENTS
A. All components shall be installed in accordance with the instructions of their manufacturers. This
requirement does not negate the requirement for type and routine testing as specified elsewhere in
this Specification.
B. Adjusting and resetting devices shall be easily accessible.
C. All actuators for emergency switching devices shall be mounted between 0.8m and 1.6m above the
base of the assembly.
D. All components shall be installed and wired such that their function is not impaired by interaction such
as heat, arcs, vibration, and fields of energy present in normal operation.
E. Barriers for manual switching devices shall be designed such that arcs caused by switching under
normal operation or the interruption or making of a fault current shall not present a danger to the
operator.
F. All removable and with drawable components shall be installed and designed such that they can be
safely disconnected or connected to supply circuits while the associated conductors are live.
G. All spare contacts on relays, contactors, and the like shall be wired to easily accessible terminal
blocks, suitably positioned for future external wiring.
2.17
SELECTOR SWITCHES/PUSH-BUTTONS
A.
Selector switches shall be of the rotary type, with lever or key operated actuators as specified in the
schedules or shown on the drawings.
B.
Pushbuttons shall be of the flush type. Colours shall be as specified in the schedules and to IEC,
DIN/VDE standards.
C.
Pushbuttons used for emergency stop purposes shall be of the mushroom head type, with a twist to
release action or key reset as specified in the schedule.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 12 of 18

DISTRIBUTION BOARD
16425
FALCON CLINIC
D.
2.18
Contact blocks shall have double break silver plated contacts, in 'NO' or "NC' configuration rated at
not less than 5A resistive at 240V 50HZ.
WIRING TERMINALS
A.
Cable terminations and space for terminations shall be suitable for the sizes of cable called for in the
design, refer to Cable Schedules.
B.
Terminal blocks shall be made of thermosetting melamine or polyamide material with a low tracking
index and good flame resistance, tested to withstand a temperature rise of 90 C above ambient
temperature.
C.
Provision shall be made for permanent labels to be applied to each terminal for identification
purposes.
All terminals shall be marked in accordance with DIN/VDE standards.
D.
E.
All terminals for control wiring shall have provision for plug-in test spills and in addition be fitted with
isolating links. Current carrying parts shall be made of tinned brass or copper.
F.
Completely shrouded terminals of the tunnel type shall be used for cup to 10mm. The screw clamp
connection shall be vibration proof, self-locking and suitable for clamping two condo.
G.
Stranded cables up to 10mm shall be terminated in copper or copper alloy ferrule shall retain all
strands of the cable.
H.
Terminals for cables in excess of 10mm shall be of the double connection type with bolted studs for
the connection of cable lugs. The terminal and stud size shall be adequate for the current carried
and the size of cable. Suitable insulating partitions and protective covers shall be provided.
I.
All auxiliary wiring except screened cables shall be connected to incoming/outgoing cables Via
insulated terminal blocks, screw/screw type, clipped onto DIN rails. There shall be sufficient space
on the DIN rail for future terminal blocks of not less than 10% or 5 No. whichever is the greater.
J.
Wires shall enter terminals singly.
K.
Plugs and fixed sockets for the application shall be provided for the termination of screened cables.
L.
All terminations shall be mounted at least 0.2m above the base of floor mounted assemblies .
M.
All load terminals shall be suitable for the types and sizes of cables as specified in the schedules
and drawings.
2.19
WORKS TESTS
A.
All assemblies shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of DIN/VDE standards Part 1,
plus requirements of associated standards.
B.
TYPE TESTED ASSEMBLIES
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 13 of 18

DISTRIBUTION BOARD
16425
FALCON CLINIC
C.
Where TTAs are specified, certification shall be provided for all type and routine tests to DIN/VDE
standards.
D.
PARTIALLY TYPE TESTED ASSEMBLIES

Where PTTAs are specified, compliance with the test requirements of BS 5486, shall be either by
type testing or by extrapolation from type tested assemblies or individual parts of similar,
representative construction. Verification of the Type Testing Certification or the appropriate
extrapolation calculations shall be provided. Certificates shall also be provided for routine tests in
compliance with DIN/VDE standards.
E.
Calculation from first principles for temperature rise and short-circuit strength will not be acceptable.
F.
Verification of the short-circuit withstand strength is not required for assemblies having a rated PSSC
not exceeding 10KA or those protected by current limiting devices with a cut-off current not
exceeding 15KA.
G.
Verification of the short-circuit withstand strength is not required for auxiliary circuits connected to
transformers whose:
(i)
(ii)
2.20
Rated power dose not exceed 10KVA for a rated secondary voltage of not less than 110V.
or
Rated power does not exceed 1.6KVA with a rated secondary voltage of less than 110V, and
whose relative short-circuit voltage is not less than 4%.
H.
Works tests shall include inspection of all wiring and a complete electrical functioning test.
I.
Protection relays shall be tested by primary current injection with currents equal to overload, shortcircuit and earth fault conditions.
J.
Works tests shall be done in the presence of Owner consultant.

The tests to be carried out shall include but not necessarily be limited to:A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
1.
Inspect physical, electrical, and mechanical condition including evidence of moisture or

corona.
2.
3.
4.
Clean the unit.
5.
Verify that fuse and/or circuit breaker sizes and types correspond to drawings and
coordination study as well as to the circuit breaker's address for microprocessorcommunication packages.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 14 of 18

DISTRIBUTION BOARD
16425
FALCON CLINIC
6.
Verify that current and voltage transformer ratios correspond to drawings.
7.
b.
method
c. Perform thermographic survey.
8.
Confirm correct operation and sequencing of electrical and mechanical interlock systems.
a.
Attempt closure on locked-open devices. Attempt to open locked-closed devices.
b. Make key exchange with devices operated in off-normal positions.

9.
Lubrication requirements
a. Use appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts.
b. Use appropriate lubrication on moving and sliding surfaces.
10.
Perform as-left tests.
11.
Inspect insulators for evidence of physical damage or contaminated surfaces.
12.
Verify correct barrier and shutter installation and operation.
13.
Exercise all active components.
14.
Inspect mechanical indicating devices for correct operation.
15.
Verify that filters are in place and/or vents are clear.
16.
Perform visual and mechanical inspection of instrument transformers.
17.
Inspect control power transformers.

a.
Inspect for physical damage, cracked insulation, broken leads, and tightness of
connections, defective wiring, and overall general condition.
b.
Verify that primary and secondary fuse ratings or circuit breakers match drawings.
c.
Verify correct functioning of drawout disconnecting and grounding contacts and

interlocks.
B. Electrical Tests
1.
Perform electrical tests on instrument transformers.
2.
Perform ground-resistance tests.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 15 of 18

DISTRIBUTION BOARD
16425
FALCON CLINIC
3.
Perform resistance measurements through bolted electrical connections with a low-resistance

ohmmeter.
4.
Perform insulation-resistance tests

phase-to-ground, for one minute.
5.
Perform an overpotential test on each bus section, each phase to ground with phases not
under test grounded, in accordance with manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer has
no recommendation for this test. The test voltage shall be applied for one minute.
6.
Perform insulation-resistance tests on control wiring with respect to ground. Applied potential
shall be 500 volts dc for 300 volt rated cable and 1000 volts dc for 600 volt rated cable. Test
duration shall be one minute. For units with solid-state components or control devices that can
not tolerate the applied voltage, follow manufacturers recommendation.
7.
Control Power Transformers
8.
9.
on
each
bus
section,
phase-to-phase
and
a.
Perform insulation-resistance tests. Perform measurements from winding -to-winding

and each winding-to-ground.
b.
Verify correct function of control transfer relays located in switchgear with multiple
power sources.
a-
Perform insulation-resistance tests. Perform measurements from winding -to-winding

and each winding-to-ground.
b.
Verify secondary voltages.
Verify operation of switchgear/switchboard heaters.
C. Test Values
1.
2.
Compare bus connection resistances to values of similar connections.

Bolt-torque levels should be in accordance with Table 10.12 unless otherwise specified by
manufacturer.
3.
Micro-ohm or millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the normal range as
investigate any values which deviate from similar bus by more than 50 percent of the lowest
value.
4.
Insulation-resistance values for bus and control power transformers shall be in accordance with
manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data. Values of
insulation resistance less than this table or manufacturer's minimum should be investigated.
Overpotential tests should not proceed until insulation-resistance levels are raised above
minimum values.
5.
Bus insulation shall withstand the overpotential test voltage applied.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 16 of 18

DISTRIBUTION BOARD
16425
FALCON CLINIC
6.
2.21
Control wiring minimum insulation-resistance values should be comparable to previously

obtained results but not less than two mega-ohms.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
3.2
3.3
Examine conditions under which switchgears are to be installed, and notify in writing of
conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with work until
INSTALLATION
A.
Install switchgears as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions,

requirements of kahramaa regulations and in accordance with recognized industry practices to
ensure that installation complies with requirements and serves intended function.
B.
Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of switchgears with other work.
C.
Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts and equipment grounding
connections, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values
for equipment connectors.
D.
Provide properly wired electrical connections for switchgears within enclosures.
E.
Double lugging is not permitted.
F.
Fill out switchgears circuit directory card upon completion of installation work.
G.
Provide equipment earthing connections sufficiently tight to assure a permanent and effective
ground for switchgears.

A.
Upon completion of installation of switchgear and after circuiting has been energized;
demonstrate capability and compliance of switchgear with requirements. Where possible,
correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove
and replace with new units and retest.
B.
Prior to energization of switchgears circuitry, check all accessible connections to

manufacturer's tightening torque specifications.
C.
Prior to energization of switchgears, check with earthing resistance tester phase-to-phase and
phase-to-ground insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 17 of 18

DISTRIBUTION BOARD
16425
FALCON CLINIC
3.4
D.
Prior to energization, check switchgears for electrical continuity of circuits, and for short circuits.
E.
Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.
F.
After energization, check phase balancing and adjust accordingly.
G.
Touch-up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finishes.
INTER CONNECTION WITH OTHER SYSTEMS

The system supplier is responsible to provide all required switches, auxiliary contacts, relays, wiring,
terminal blocks transducers to provide signalling and metering information for the central control system
and to accept START/STOP, open/close, set point from it.
Relevant signals are listed under controls, BMS and motor control panels drawings and data schedules.
All signals to the BMS system should be potential free to actuate devices of less than 20 VA. @ 240
volt.
In any device will need more than 20 VA. At any operating condition the supplier should add interposing
relays.
All analog measures coming or going to the BMS should be coordinated with the BMS supplier (either
4-20 MA or 1-5 volt or -10 volt).
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 18 of 18

DISTRIBUTION BOARD
16425
FALCON CLINIC
SECTION 16450
EARTHING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 16010, apply to work of this section.
C.
D.
Requirements of this section apply to electrical earthing work specified elsewhere in these
specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
complete and make ready for operation, all system earthing, equipment earthing, earthing of
outlets, special earthing for telecommunication & clean earthing, earthing of raceways and
conduits, earthing of distribution panelboards, transformers, HV switchgear ... etc., earth pits
and accessories work shall be in accordance with Drawings and Specifications and as required
for a complete system.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of earthing products,
of types, and ratings required, and ancillary materials, including stranded cable, copper braid
and bus and bonding jumpers whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service
for not less than 5 years.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, DIN/VDE, BS
7430, IEC, NEC, UL and IEEE Standards pertaining to electrical earthing circuitry and
equipment. Provide earthing products which are labelled for their intended usage.
C. Kahramaa "Regulations for the installation of electrical wiring, electrical equipment and air
conditioning equipment, sixth may 2003.
D. In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more stringent provision will
govern.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on earthing products and associated accessories.
B. Samples: Submit sample of earthing cables and earthing accessories.
C. Shop drawings: Submit dimensional layouts on architectural background drawings.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 1 of 7
EARTHING SYSTEM
16450
FALCON CLINIC
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ELECTRODES
A. Earth rods shall be of circular cross-section copper clad steel earth rod with diameter 20mm
and the length should be more than 2mt. below summer water table. Sections shall be jointed
with purpose made couplings and a suitable driving cap and tip shall be fitted to the rod
extremities. Couplings shall not exceed the diameter of the rod.
B. Rod section couplings, driving cap and tip shall be bronze or other material which exhibits
mechanical strength, electrical continuity between sections and does not give rise to electrolytic
or corrosive action. All coupling units shall be the same length of threaded length of the rod.
C. Earth rods shall be driven into the ground using a suitable mechanical hammer. The tops of the
rods shall be driven below ground level to suit the inspection pit.
D. The top of each rod electrode shall be housed in a purpose made concrete pit to facilitate
inspection. The pit shall be provided with a lid and the assembly shall be flush with ground
level.
E. Earth pits shall be provided with a waterproof seal when installed inside the building if
necessary and to be accessible.
F. All earth copper cables shall be connected to the top of the earth rod with a purpose made non
ferrous clamp or thermo weld.
G. Parallel connected earth rods shall be spaced at a horizontal distance equal to their buried
length. They shall be connected with bare 240 mm stranded copper cable unless otherwise
shown on the drawings, buried not less than 24 inches below finished grade unless otherwise
shown on the drawings.
H. Copper strip or stranded cable may be installed where necessary in the same trenches as
HV/LV cables but shall be separated from all other cables and services by a distance not less
than 300 mm.
I.
2.2
The resistance to earth of the electrode system shall not exceed two ohms. Site testes shall be
made to ascertain that the electrode system resistance meets this requirement. If the resistance
exceeds this figure the contractor shall submit his proposals to reduce the system resistance to
the specified level.
EARTHING CONDUCTORS
A. Earthing conductors connecting the main earthing terminal or bar and electrode system shall be
green/yellow PVC insulated, stranded copper cable. A minimum of two earthing conductors
shall be installed and separately connected to the distribution bus bars and test links main earth
bar with bolted test links of copper and having a cross section as indicated on the drawings.
2.3
MAIN EARTHING TERMINAL

A. The main earthing terminal shall consist of hard drawn copper to IEC, DIN/VDE Standards BS
1987 formed into a bar having minimum dimensions as detailed in the earthing schematic.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 2 of 7
EARTHING SYSTEM
16450
FALCON CLINIC
B. Each earthing bar shall be mounted not less than 450 mm above the finished floor level and
spaced by means of insulators not less than 50 mm from the fixing surface.
C. The diameter of fixing holes shall not exceed one third of earthing bar width. Where this is not
possible then the connection shall be made to a copper flag welded to the earthing bar.
D. Each connection to the main earthing terminal shall be identified with an appropriately worded
label made of durable material.
2.4
PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS
A. Protective conductors between equipment earthing terminals or bars and the main earthing
terminal or bar shall be made with stranded copper insulated cables as shown on the drawings.
Cables shall be connected to remote ends of the equipment earthing terminals or bar and
separately connected to the main earthing terminal or bar.
B. Where a number of protective conductors follow the same route these shall be green/yellow
PVC covered and installed on a galvanized cable tray and fixed with purpose made cleats.
C. Connections between main earthing terminal or bars, equipment earthing terminals, etc, and
stranded copper cables shall be made with appropriate compression type lug, bolt, and nut and
lock washers. Contact surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and tinned.
D. Sockets lugs, bolts, nuts, washers, screws, rivets, clamps, cleats or other items which come
into direct contact with copper protective conductors bars, strips, cables etc, shall be nonferrous and manufactured from brass, bronze or other suitable conducting material which will
not cause electrolytic or other corrosion. Where connections occur between copper and
galvanized structures, contact surfaces shall, additionally, be tinned and after completion
compounded to exclude moisture. Protective conductors, cables, strip, bars, lugs, etc, shall be
installed in visible and serviceable positions.
The joints shall be made using zinc free brazing material with a melting point of at least 600o C.
The amount of overlap between the two strips to be jointed shall not be less than the width of
the larger conductor.
2.5
EARTHING AND BONDING

A. A complete and effective earthing system shall be provided for the electrical equipment (high
voltage switchgear, transformers, generators, Main distribution boards, sub-main distribution
boards, power & lighting distribution boards, etc.) as indicated on the drawings. The system of
earthing shall comply with the IEE wiring regulations and the recommendations stated in IEC,
DIN/VDE Standards, BS 7430, except where detailed otherwise in this specification and the
drawings. Where the IEE wiring regulations and IEC, DIN/VDE Standards differ then the
stringent shall take precedence.
B. The connection of an earthing electrode conductor shall be made in a manner that will ensure a
permanent and effective earthing path. The effective bonding shall be provided around
insulated joints and section and around any equipment that is likely to be disconnected for
repairs or replacement. Bonding conductors shall be of sufficient length and cross section to
permit removal of such equipment while retaining the integrity of the bond.
C. The non current-carrying metal parts of equipment shall be effectively bonded together.
D. Bonding shall apply at each end and all intervening raceways, boxes and enclosures between
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 3 of 7
EARTHING SYSTEM
16450
FALCON CLINIC
the service equipment and the earthing busbar.
E. Metallic pipe services for example water mains and dry risers when applicable shall be
effectively bonded to the main earthing terminal at their point of entry. Connections shall be
made to the services with purpose-made earthing clamps to DIN/VDE Standards.
F. Where there is a lightning conductor system for the building or structure, it shall be effectively
bonded to the main earthing terminal in accordance with the requirements of IEEE ANSI 80-86
Standards. A suitable label shall be provided adjacent to this bonding connection at the main
earthing terminal indicating the purposed of connection.
G. Steel framed structures or metallic cladding shall be effectively bonded to the main earthing
terminal.
H. The cross-sectional area of all earthing, bonding and protective conductors shall comply with
the requirements of the IEE wiring regulations. Except where detailed otherwise in this
specification or on the drawings all conductors for earthing shall be copper, manufactured in
accordance with IEC, DIN/VDE Standards for strip and IEC, DIN/VDE Standards for cables.
I.
Single-core cables forming part of the earthing system shall be of stranded copper, insulated to
450/750 V standards with green/yellow PVC. These cables shall comply with IEC, DIN/VDE
Standards.
J.
Mechanical joints between aluminium and copper shall have the joint faces lightly coated with
an anti-corrosion compound before the connection is made.
K. Where conduits, or glands for mineral insulated or armoured cables, terminate on switchgear,
distribution boards, motor control center, starter panels or other apparatus, brass compression
washers shall be used to ensure an effective earth connection.
L. Where connections are made between sections of raceways then the manufacturer's earth
continuity links shall be installed across the joint. Connections made between raceways
sections crossing a building expansion joint shall be made with a flexible copper braid.
M. Sections of cable tray shall be thoroughly cleaned before overlapping and securing with a
minimum of two screwed fixings and bonding. The remote ends of the cable tray shall be
effectively bonded to the earthing system.
N. The armouring of plastic sheathed cables when applicable shall terminate in compression
glands fitted with purpose-made earth tags. A protective conductor shall connect the earth tag
with the apparatus earthing terminal. The earth tag shall be manufactured from a high
conductivity material compatible with the cable gland.
O. The armouring of metal sheathed cables when applicable shall be securely clamped to the
gland at the cable termination with a purpose-made bolted clamp.
P. A protective conductor shall be installed to connect the armour clamp or gland fixing bolts to the
apparatus earthing terminal.
Q. Metal sheaths and/or armouring of multi-core cables connected to cubicle type switchgear
when applicable shall be effectively connected to the switchgear earth bar as described in later
clauses.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 4 of 7
EARTHING SYSTEM
16450
FALCON CLINIC
R. Where any metal sheathed and/or armoured cables of rating in excess of 100A are terminated
on an "Industrial" type motor control center, a separate protective conductor shall connect the
sheath and/or armouring to the motor control center earthing terminal.
S. Where applicable metal sheathed and/or armoured multi-core cables of rating in excess of
100A are terminated on a unit motor starter panel or local isolator, a separate protective
conductor shall connect the incoming and outgoing sheaths and/or armouring to the starter
panel or isolator earthing terminal. The motor frame shall be connected directly to the supply
cable sheath and/or armouring of the starter panel or local isolator, whichever is more
convenient.
T. The earth terminal of all socket outlets shall be connected to the main protective conductor of
the final sub-circuit. Where applicable the protective conductor is formed by the metal sheath
and/or armouring of cables, the earth terminal of the socket outlet shall also be connected to an
earth terminal in the box or enclosure associated with the cable.
U. Connections between earth bars, equipment frames, etc, and stranded copper cables shall be
made by compression lug, bolt, washers, nut and lock nut. Contact surfaces shall be
thoroughly cleaned and tinned prior to connection.
V. Connections between earth bars, equipment frames, etc, and copper strip shall be made with
by bolt, washers, nut and lock nut. Contact surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and tinned
prior to connection. The washers shall be of sufficient size to prevent any distortion of the
copper strip.
W. The diameter of fixing holes shall not exceed one third the width of the earth bar or strip.
Where a larger hole is required in an earth bar then connection shall be made to a copper flag
welded to the bar. The weld shall be tested for continuity.
X. Joints in copper strip shall be made using zinc free brazing material with a melting point of at
least 600 oC or be welded using a molecular welding process such as furse "Thermoweld" or an
equal alternative.
Y. Provide separate earthing systems for (Q-Tel equipment) and for (fire alarm and light current
systems).
2.6

The test to be carried out shall include but not be necessarily limited to :1.
2.

1.
2.
Inspect anchorage.
Electrical Tests
1.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Perform fall-of-potential or alternative test in accordance with IEEE Standard 81 on the

main earthing electrode or system.
Page 5 of 7
EARTHING SYSTEM
16450
FALCON CLINIC
2.
3.
Test Values
1.
The resistance between the main grounding electrode and ground should be no greater than
two ohms for power systems and less than one ohm for light current systems including IT
systems operating and the other specified rooms on & as indicated on the drawings, BOQ shall
not be more than 0.5 ohm unless otherwise specified by the owner. (Reference ANSI/IEEE
Standard 142)
2.
2.7
Perform point-to-point tests to determine the resistance between the main earthing
system and all major electrical equipment frames, system neutral, and/or derived
neutral points.
Investigate point-to-point resistance values which exceed 0.5 ohm.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
2.8
EXAMINATION
A.
2.9
Examine conditions under which electrical earthing and bonding connections are to be made
and notify in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with
work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A. Install electrical earthing and bonding systems as indicated in accordance with instructions,
requirements of applicable standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of electrical earthing and bonding system work
with other work.
C. Earth the electrical installation including, but not limited to the following: system distribution,
conduit system for light and power, switchgear housings, cabinets, motor frames, housings of
alarm and control panels and associated devices, lighting fixtures, lightning protection system,
emergency distribution system, telephone system, fire alarm system, smoke detection system,
communications and security system, kitchens equipment, motor control centres, individual
starters and other non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment.
D. Wherever flexible metal conduit or cable are used for part of a raceway run, provide an earthing
conductor in the raceway or cable and connect to earthing bushings at each end of run.
E. Where pull boxes contain barriers, provide an earth lug in each section.
F. Install earthing conductors in all wiring where non-metallic conduit is used.
G. Terminate feeder and branch circuit insulated equipment earthing conductors with earthing lug,
bus, or bushing.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 6 of 7
EARTHING SYSTEM
16450
FALCON CLINIC
H. Tighten earthing and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in
accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values for connectors and bolts.
I.
Route earthing connections and conductors to earth and protective devices in shortest and
straightest paths as possible to minimize transient voltage rises.
J.
Make earth wires continuous without splices. Avoid soldered joints in any earth connection.
Use solderless type connectors, clamps, etc.
K. Earth interrupted metallic raceways with ground conductors connected to metallic raceway at
each end.
L. Separate earthing system for fire alarm and light current systems shall be provided and shall be
connected to the external earthing network as indicated on the drawings and the resistance
shall be less than one (1) ohm.
M. Separate earthing system for Q-Tel equipment (as per Q-Tel requirements) shall be provided
and shall be connected to the external earthing network as indicated on the drawings and the
resistance shall be less than one (1) ohm.
N. Apply corrosion-resistant finish to field-connections, buried metallic earthing and bonding
products, and places where factory applied protective coatings have been destroyed, which are
subjected to corrosive action.
O. Where expansion fittings occur, provide internal code size earth conductor terminating in
adjacent pulling points with earthing bushings.
2.10

A. Weld earthing conductors to underground earthing electrodes.
B. Earthing each separately-derived system neutral to:
1.
Effectively earthed metallic water pipe where applicable
2.
Effectively earthed structural steel member.
3.
Separate earthing electrode.

Connect together system neutral, service equipment enclosures, exposed non-current carrying
metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceway systems, earthing conductor in raceways and
cables, receptacle ground connectors, and plumbing system.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 7 of 7
EARTHING SYSTEM
16450
FALCON CLINIC
SECTION 16470
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS (POWER AND LIGHTING PANEL BOARDS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
C.
Wires and cables section 16120.
D.
Switchgear assemblies main distribution board section 16425.
E.
Contactors section 16485.
F.
G.
Specification Section 15547 Mounting and Isolation of Mechanical and Electrical Systems and
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
complete and make ready for operation, all distribution boards shall be in accordance with
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of distribution boards of the types
and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not
less than 5 years and shall be of one manufacturer, approved by kahramaa, and conform to the
requirement set forth in these specifications.
B. Distribution boards shall be manufactured in accordance with the following:
1. BS 5486 part 1, part 12 and BS EN604 39-3.
2. Kahramaa "Regulations for the installation of electrical wiring, electrical equipment and air
conditioning equipment, latest edition.
3. Qatar contraction specifications.
govern.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 1 of 11
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
16470
FALCON CLINIC
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for distribution boards including size, enclosures,
and electrical ratings and characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional layouts on architectural background drawings.
C. Relay Selectivity Coordination Submit to the Engineer a relay and C.B. coordination study. The
Current-time characteristics must be plotted on log-log papers showing that the choice of the
C.B. settings is correct for coordination. Curves plot on computer software are permitted.
D. If selectivity coordination study is failed, contractor is responsible to change any number of
breakers, relays, such that the selectivity coordination is fully achieved with no extra cost to the
owner.
E. Short circuit and voltage drop calculation
Submit a comprehensive short circuit study as well as voltage drop calculations based on the
actual impedance values of the electrical components such as supply short circuit level at the
11 KV (shall not be less than 500 MVA), transformer, bus bars, cables ... etc. Calculations may
be performed by manual method or by computer software programs.
In case of conflict among the values shown on the drawings and the calculations study, the
calculations study will govern and the minimum values indicated on the specifications will be
considered and have precedence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Sub-Main Distribution Boards (SMDBS)

A. The power panel boards shall be manufactured to BS 5486 part 1 with degree of ingress
protection IP 42 to IEC 529 and BS 5420.
B. The power panel boards shall incorporate all items detailed on drawings and specification and
shall be designed such that no operating handle exceeds a height of 2.10m from finished floor
level. Main switch shall form part of the unit.
C. The equipment shall be indoor type 415 volt, 3-phase and neutral, 4 wire 50Hz, earthed neutral
system, to withstand at least rating of 25 KA RMS symmetrical for 3 seconds (ASTA certified).
D. The sub-main distribution boards shall be wall mounted otherwise on the drawings metal
enclosed, tamperproof, dead front type and separation to IEC 439.1 Form 2b type 2.
E. All section shall be fabricated of at least 2mm thick galvanized sheet steel treated for corrosion
resistance after manufacture, i.e. after forming, welding and punching of holes have been have
been completed. The finishing coat shall be electrically deposited epoxy powder paint inside
and outside, light blue/gray colour, RAL 7032.
F. The main incoming section shall contain service circuit breaker with thermal and magnetic type
protection.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 2 of 11
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
16470
FALCON CLINIC
G. Busbars shall be electro-tinned copper with current rating as indicated on the drawings.
H. Neutral bar shall be provided of the same cross section as phase bars.
I.
Provide a copper earth bar extending the full width of the cubicle, and located at the bottom,
with lugs at each end for cable connections. This shall be adequately sized but shall not be less
than that of cable feeding power boards.
J.
The sub-main distribution boards shall be factory assembled, complete with hinged dead front
door.
K. The circuit breakers shall be by an approved manufacturer as indicated in the section

schedules of this specification.
L. The construction and fabrication shall be by an approved manufacturer as indicated in the
section schedules of this specification.
M. Ensure sufficient glanding and termination facilities for the main incoming and outgoing cables.
N. Current and voltage transformers shall be same as those in MDB section 16425. The accuracy
class of ammeter and voltmeter shall be 1.0.
2.2
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS (DBS)

A. Distribution boards shall manufactured to comply with BS EN 604 39-3 and BS 5486 part 12
with degree of ingress protection to IP42 in conditioned areas, and IP55 in unconditioned
areas.
B. Refer to drawings for interrupting short circuit capacity, current rating, type of devices, busbars,
circuit breakers, etc.
C. Distribution boards shall have dead front sheet steel enclosures, flush doors with concealed
hinges, flush lock and latch and concealed trim bolts. Locks shall be stainless satin finished and
keyed alike. Provide four sets of keys to the owner.
D. Distribution boards enclosure shall be fabricated of 1.6mm galvanized sheet steel treated for
corrosion resistance after manufacture, i.e. after forming, welding, and punching have been
completed. The finishing coast shall be electrically deposited epoxy coated powder paint both
inside and outside light blue/gray colour RAL 7032.
E. Distribution boards shall be rated for operation on a 415 volt, 3-phase and neutral and earth.
F. Where more than one section is required, section shall be bolted together to from a rigid
assembly.
G. Busbars and connections shall be of high conductivity tin-plated copper bar mounted on heavy
duty glass polyester supports. Bus joints and connections shall be bolted with high strength
bolts and washers. Neutral buses shall be double sized where indicated on schedules. Neutral
busbars shall have one terminal per outgoing way.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 3 of 11
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
16470
FALCON CLINIC
H. Distribution boards shall be for surface mounting as shown on the drawings or as required for
the areas. Panels shall have adjustable trim clamps.
I.
Distribution boards shall be complete with a directory mounted on the inside of the door in a
metal frame with a clear plastic cover, which shall hold in place a chart with the description of
each circuit and ratings.
J.
Distribution boards shall be complete with integral main switch on the incomer as detailed on
the drawings.
K. Trim and doors shall be finished epoxy coated powder painted light blue/gray colour.
L. Distribution boards shall have suitably sized copper earth bars running full height of the board
with one incoming terminal and one per outgoing way plus earth studs for additional
connections.
M. Distribution boards shall have a maximum depth of 150 mm.
N. Distribution boards shall be provided with conduit termination boxes at the lower and upper
ends, having the same width as lighting panel boards and a depth of 150mm. This shall of
same construction specification as the lighting panel boards and shall be provided with
individual screwed down lids.
2.3
OUTDOOR DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

A. This work shall consist of supplying, installing upon prepared base, testing and putting into
satisfactory operation of outdoor distribution boards which shall generally be used to feed the
approach outdoor lighting installations as required. The outdoor distribution board shall be
supplied at 415 V, 3 phases, 50 Hz. From the LV distribution board in the main building.
B. Refer to drawings for interrupting short circuit capacity, current rating, type of devices, busbars,
circuit breakers, etc.
C. The outdoor distribution boards shall be totally enclosed fully self contained dustproof,
weatherproof and suitable for mounting outdoors exposed to dust, rain and direct sunlight.
The cabinets shall be reinforced free standing structure, manufactured from 2.5 mm minimum
galvanized steel with bolted reinforcement corner construction with a bolting down root for
mounting or a pre-formed concrete base suitable for all incoming and outgoing cables from
below ground level in a duct system. Cabinets shall have two hinged lockable opening doors to
provide full front access to the cabinet which shall be sized according to the equipment being
installed. The roof of the cabinet shall be slanted and shall have water drip edges provided.
D. BMS electric control as indicated on the drawing. The circuits serving the lighting installation
shall be supplied through triple pole contactors which shall be controlled. An override facility
shall be provided for maintenance.
E. All equipment, bus bars, conductors, etc., within the distribution board shall be fully insulated
such that there are no live parts or connections exposed all to the complete satisfaction of the
engineer.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 4 of 11
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
16470
FALCON CLINIC
Finish. The outdoor distribution board shall be finished with the following process and
treatments applied:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
De-rust.
De-grease.
One coat of sprayed zinc chromate red oxide primer.
Two coats exterior paint, dark gray to BS 381 C shade 632.
Degree of protection shall not be less than IP55.
The treatments and applications apply both internally and externally.

F. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS:
The outdoor distribution board shall be fixed square and true on its prepared foundation in the
location as shown on the drawings.
The contractor shall verify with the manufacturer of the outdoor distribution board that the civil
works as detailed are fully compatible with the distribution board. All sizes and details must be
checked before concrete is purred and revised with approval of the engineer where necessary.
It is the contractors sole responsibility to ensure compatibility of the civil and electrical work.
2.4
LIGHTING CONTROL PANELS (LCP)

A. LCP contains No. of contactors for controlling all un-switched light in circuits as indicated on the
drawings (Normal and emergency) for the areas shown on the drawings or/and the following
areas:1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Public Corridors (Hallways)

Lift Lobby.
Stair Cases.
Elevator Shafts.
Parking areas.
Main Entrance.
B. All lighting circuits are controlled from B.M.S (building management system).
C. All lighting control panels are equipped with three position selector switch (Automatic-manual
and off position) for controlling all lighting circuits as indicated on the drawings.
2.5
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. All circuit breakers shall comply with BS 4752, IEC 947-part 2 and have an instantaneous
magnetic trip release and adjustable thermal.
B. All circuit breakers shall be plug-in type.
C. Circuit breakers shall have specified rating at the prevailing ambient temperature of 50oC.
D. Interrupting short circuit current shall be as follows:
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 5 of 11
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
16470
FALCON CLINIC
1.
Minimum RMS symmetrical current shall be 25KA for SMDBS circuit breakers.
2.
Minimum RMS symmetrical current for DBS shall be as shown in the drawings.
E. Branch circuits indicated as SPARE" shall include a breaker of the rating indicated.
F. All MCCBS shall be provided with earth fault protection.
G. To keep uniformity of components and maintain discrimination, all moulded case circuit
breakers shall be of the same manufacturer as that of MDB. Study shall be provided for final
evaluation.
2.6
MINIATURE AND EARTH LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Circuit breaker shall comply with EN 60898.
B. Residual current circuit breakers shall comply with EN 60898 or EN 61008 or EN 60947.
C. Circuit breakers shall be quick make quick break moulded case type, with thermal magnetic
trips. Two and three pole breaker shall have a common trip and single operating handle.
D. Breakers shall have fixed connections to the bus-bars.
E. Breakers shall be ambient temperature corrected. Details of certificates shall be handed to the
engineer for approval.
F. Main switches and contactors shall comply with the applicable section of this specification.
G. Branch circuit indicated as "Spare" shall include a breakers of the rating indicated.
H. Branch circuit indicated "Spare" shall have a cover, and shall be ready to receive a breaker of
the rating indicted.
2.7
I.
Circuit breakers shall by instantaneous trip type 'C' with a minimum short circuit rating of 10kA.
J.
Earth leakage circuit breakers shall be used as indicated on the drawings and shall be
combined MCB/RCD of 30mA tripping sensitivity with a minimum short circuit rating of 10KA.
TESTS
A. All assemblies shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of DIN/VDE standards Part
1, plus requirements of associated standards.
B. Tests shall include inspection of all wiring and a complete electrical functioning test.
C. Protection relays shall be tested by primary current injection with currents equal to overload,
short-circuit and earth fault conditions.
D. Tests shall be done in the presence of Owner consultant.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 6 of 11
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
16470
FALCON CLINIC
2.8

The tests to be carried out shall include but not necessarily be limited to:A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
1.
Inspect physical, electrical, and mechanical condition including evidence of moisture or

corona.
2.
3.
4.
Clean the unit.
5.
Verify that fuse and/or circuit breaker sizes and types correspond to drawings and
coordination study as well as to the circuit breaker's address for microprocessorcommunication packages.
7. Verify that current and voltage transformer ratios correspond to drawings.
7.
8.
9.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following
methods:
b.
Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torquewrench method in accordance with manufacturer's published data.
c.
Confirm correct operation and sequencing of electrical and mechanical interlock

systems.
a.
Attempt closure on locked-open devices. Attempt to open locked-closed devices.
b.
Make key exchange with devices operated in off-normal positions.
Lubrication requirements
a.
Use appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts.
b.
Use appropriate lubrication on moving and sliding surfaces.
10.
11.
Inspect insulators for evidence of physical damage or contaminated surfaces.
12.
Verify correct barrier and shutter installation and operation.
13.
Exercise all active components.
Page 7 of 11
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
16470
FALCON CLINIC
14.
Inspect mechanical indicating devices for correct operation.
15.
16.
Perform visual and mechanical inspection of instrument transformers.
17.
Inspect control power transformers.

a.
Inspect for physical damage, cracked insulation, broken leads, and tightness of
connections, defective wiring, and overall general condition.
b.
Verify that primary and secondary fuse ratings or circuit breakers match
drawings.
c.
Verify correct functioning of draw out disconnecting and grounding contacts and
interlocks.
B. Electrical Tests
1.
Perform electrical tests on instrument transformers.
2.
Perform ground-resistance tests.
3.
Perform resistance measurements through bolted electrical connections with a lowresistance ohmmeter, if applicable.
4.
Perform insulation-resistance tests on each bus section, phase-to-phase and

phase-to-ground, for one minute.
Perform an overpotential test on each bus section, each phase to ground with phases
not under test grounded, in accordance with manufacturer's published data. If
manufacturer has no recommendation for this test. The test voltage shall be applied for
one minute.
5.
6.
Perform insulation-resistance tests on control wiring with respect to ground. Applied

potential shall be 500 volts dc for 300 volt rated cable and 1000 volts dc for 600 volt
rated cable. Test duration shall be one minute. For units with solid-state components or
control devices that can not tolerate the applied voltage, follow manufacturers
recommendation.
7.
Perform system function tests.
8.
Control Power Transformers
9.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
a.
Perform insulation-resistance tests. Perform measurements from

winding-to-winding and each winding-to-ground.
b.
Verify correct function of control transfer relays located in switchgear with

multiple power sources.
Page 8 of 11
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
16470
FALCON CLINIC
a.
Perform insulation-resistance tests. Perform measurements from

winding-to-winding and each winding-to-ground.
b.
Verify secondary voltages.
C. Test Values
1. Compare bus connection resistances to values of similar connections.
2. Bolt-torque levels.
2.9
3.
Micro-ohm or millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the normal range
as indicated in the manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer's data is not
available, investigate any values which deviate from similar bus by more than 50
percent of the lowest value.
4.
Insulation-resistance values for bus and control power transformers shall be in

accordance with manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's
published data, use Table manufacturer's minimum should be investigated.
Overpotential tests should not proceed until insulation-resistance levels are raised
above minimum values.
5.
Bus insulation shall withstand the overpotential test voltage applied.
6.
Control wiring minimum insulation-resistance values should be comparable to

previously obtained results but not less than two mega ohms.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
3.2
Examine conditions under which distribution boards and enclosures are to be installed, and notify
Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with work
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install distribution boards as indicated, in according with manufacturer's written instructions,

requirements of applicable Standards, and in according with recognized industry practices to
B.
Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of distribution boards with other work.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 9 of 11
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
16470
FALCON CLINIC
C.
Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts and equipment earthing
connections, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values
for equipment connectors.
D.
Fasten enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are permanently
and mechanically anchored. Provide all angle units and accessories for proper mounting.
E.
Provide properly wired electrical connections for distribution boards within enclosures.
F.
Double lugging is not permitted.
G.
Fill out distribution boards circuit directory card upon completion of installation work.
H. Provide equipment earthing connections sufficiently tight to assure a permanent and effective
ground for distribution boards.
3.3

A.
Upon completion of installation of distribution boards and after circuiting has been energized,
demonstrate capability and compliance of panel-board with requirements. Where possible,
correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove
and replace with new units and retest.
Prior to energization of electrical circuitry, check all accessible connections to manufacturer's
tightening torque specifications.
B.
3.4
C.
Prior to energization of distribution boards, check with ground resistance tester phase-to-phase
and phase-to-ground insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled.
D.
Prior to energization, check distribution boards for electrical continuity of circuits, and for short
circuits.
E.
Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.
F.
After energization, check phase balancing and adjust accordingly.
G.
Touch-up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finishes.
INTER CONNECTION WITH OTHER SYSTEMS

terminal blocks transducers to provide signalling and metering information for the central control
system and to accept START/STOP, open/close, set point from it.
Relevant signals are listed under controls, BMS and motor control panels drawings and data
schedules.
All signals to the BMS system should be potential free to actuate devices of less than 20 VA. @ 240
Volt.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 10 of 11
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
16470
FALCON CLINIC
In any device will need more than 20 VA. at any operating condition the supplier should add
interposing relays.
All analog measures coming or going to the BMS should be coordinated with the BMS supplier
(either 4-20 MA or 1-5 Volt or 10 Volt).
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 11 of 11
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
16470
FALCON CLINIC
SECTION 16482
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Supplementary Conditions

(General Requirements), apply to work of this Section.
B.
Raceways, boxes, and fittings, section 16110 applies to work of this Section.
C.
Cable trays, section 16114 applies to work of this Section.
D.
Wires and cables, section 16120 applies to work of this Section.
E.
Safety and motor isolators (disconnects), section 16170 applies to work of this Section.
F.
Switchgear assemblies and main distribution board, section 16425applies to work of this
Section.
G.
Miscellaneous control equipment, section 16150 applies to work of this Section.
H.
Schedule of preferred electrical manufacturers and suppliers, section 16999 applies to work of
this Section.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services, and tests necessary to
complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all Motor Control Centers (MCCs) in
accordance with the drawings and specifications.
DEFINITIONS
Definitions pertaining to electric motors and motor controls are as follows:
1
"Motor Power Circuits"
Any circuit, which operates nominally

at 200 volts or more, and which
carries electrical input energy to a
motor.
"Motor Control Circuit" (used in

conjunction with a motor for
which a magnetic starter is
supplied.
Any circuit, (other than a motor power

circuit) which operates nominally at
200 volts or more, and which carries
current intended for directing or
indicating the performance of a motor
starter.
"Motor
Any
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Control
Circuit"
in
Page 1 of 15
circuit
containing
used

16482
FALCON CLINIC
1.4
conjunction with a motor for

which a manual starter is
supplied.
extension of power circuit wires other

than those constituting the direct
connection between sources of
supply, starter and motor.
"Motor control actuating" device.
Any device which performs a

switching function in a motor control
circuit
(Pushbuttons,
automatic
contacting devices, etc.).
"Motor control actuated" device.
Any device which functions in

response to voltage received from a
motor control circuit (pilot lights,
solenoids, etc.).
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacturing of Motor Control Centers of the
types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service
for not less than 5 years. A separate document containing a list of recommended manufacturers
shall be provided.
B.
Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, IEC 60947-2, IEC
60947-3, IEC 60947-4, IEC 60947-5.
1.5
INTERPRETATION
A.
The process and automatic control systems called for elsewhere, on plans or in these
specifications as part of the mechanical work, shall be interpreted as being totally divorced from
the motor controls here in after described. These systems, however, do include devices of the
motor control actuating, dictating and actuated types which are connected into some motor
control circuits as accounted for in the drawing schedule entitled "Motor and Motor Control
Schedule" and as specified.
B.
In case of any conflict between any parts of this specification or any other document elsewhere
the material with higher stated specifications must be used. Any conflict or technical
misunderstanding should be discussed during bidding phase. The consultant will be the only
technical reference for the intents and contents of this document and the contractors will have to
follow consultant technical interpretation in case of any conflict arising after bidding stage.
C.
Where differences occur between the Motor Control Panel Drawings and the Mechanical
Equipment Data Sheets, the Mechanical Equipment Data Sheets shall take precedence.
D.
The information detailed in the Motor Control Panel Drawings regarding motor power ratings,
etc., are to be used for Tender purposes only.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 2 of 15

16482
FALCON CLINIC
1.6
MOTORS, MOTOR STARTERS, MOTOR CONTROL ACTUATING AND ACTUATED

DEVICES FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ASSIGNMENT TO TRADES
A.
The purchase and delivery to the site of all motors required for mechanical equipment shall be
included as part of the mechanical work.
B.
The setting of all motors required for mechanical equipment shall be included as part of the
mechanical work.
C.
The purchase and delivery to the site of all motor starters required for mechanical equipment
shall be included as part of this work.
D.
The purchase and delivery to the site of all motor control actuating, dictating and actuated
devices required for mechanical equipment shall be included as part of the mechanical work,
unless otherwise noted.
E.
The mounting of all motor control actuating, dictating and actuated device required for
mechanical equipment shall be included as part of this work unless otherwise noted.
F.
The purchase and delivery of motor starters called for as part of a motor control center shall
include the purchase and delivery of the entire motor control assembly.
G.
The purchase and delivery of floor mounted motor starter equipment shall include the purchase
and delivery of channel sills for such mounting.
1.7
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings
B.
Wiring Diagrams
1.
2.
C.
The supplying of electrical wiring diagrams of manufactured equipment, including terminal

to terminal point, integrated electrical wiring diagrams, for power, operating, safety and
interlocking/interlock controls shall be included as part of the work. This requirement shall
be met regardless of any assignment between trade of the responsibility for the purchase,
delivery, setting in place, connecting up of electrical motors, starters, controls and other
electrical devices.
The drawings describing the electrical and/or the mechanical work may include
explanatory wiring diagrams indicating the function intended for the motor controls circuits
of certain specific motors.
The "field instructions" wiring diagrams required as part of the work shall conform to these
intended functions.
Dimension layout
1.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
The supplying of electrical dimension layout of manufactured equipment shall be included

as part of the mechanical work.
Page 3 of 15

16482
FALCON CLINIC
D.
PRODUCT DATA
1.
E.
SHORT CIRCUIT CALCULATIONS

1.
F.
Manufacturer's printed data, catalog cuts and illustrations.
Contractor shall submit a detailed short circuit calculations based on the final layouts,
cable sizes, motor ratings, etc. Motors contribution shall be included in the calculations.
VOLTAGE DROP CALCULATIONS

1.
Contractor shall submit a detailed voltage drop calculations based on the final layouts,
cable sizes, motor ratings.
PART 2 - MOTORS /MOTOR CONTROL PANELS

2.1
A.
2.2
MOTOR CONTROL PANEL MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION

The motor control panels shall be constructed as described here under and as shown on the
drawings & schedules.
WIRING AND TERMINATIONS
A.
All low voltage wiring shall use PVC insulated cable to, Power wiring shall be stranded with a
minimum cross sectional area of 2.5mm2 - phase colored. Control wiring (230V) shall be type
flexible with a minimum cross sectional area of 1.0mm2 - red.
B.
Emergency lock-stop button has to be installed beside each motor and connected to motor
feeder emergency-stop contact.
C.
All control circuits shall use the red phase and shall be wired in red cable.
D.
All neutral wiring shall be in black cable.
E.
All extra low voltage wiring shall use PVC insulated cable with a minimum cross sectional area
of 0.7 mm2.
F.
The color coding shall be as follows:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Phase connections - red, yellow and blue.

Neutral connections - black.
Earth connections - green/yellow.
A.C. voltages below 50V - brown; if the return connection is earthed a green ferrule shall
be fitted.
D.C. circuits - grey with red and black ferrules to denote polarity.
Page 4 of 15

16482
FALCON CLINIC
G.
Wiring shall be carried on the front surface of the mounting plate, neatly strapped in plastic
cable trunking of the ventilated type, with clip-on covers. Cable sizes shall be rated taking into
account all grouping, bunching and enclosing factors.
H.
All wiring to the switch section doors shall be wired in looms with mechanical protection. Any
one loom of control cables shall have a limit of 25 cables within the plastic trunking volume.
Wiring outside the trunking shall be neatly set for connection to terminals or equipment.
I.
All control wiring shall be identified with resistor color coded and numbered ferrules. These
numbers shall be shown on the schematic wiring diagrams. Control neutral wiring shall be of
the ring main principle with no more than 20 items on any one ring.
J.
Panel wiring for BEMS/electronic controls shall be in screened flexible cable. Extra low voltage
wiring and terminals shall be separated from wiring and terminals for higher voltages.
K.
Each screened cable shall have its screen wired to its own terminal on the outgoing terminal
strip.
L.
The screen shall be earthed at the equipment and not at the terminal strip.
M.
All control wiring shall be fitted with crimped terminal ends.
N.
All power wiring shall be fitted with crimped terminal ends where the terminal is of the 'pinch
screw' type.
O.
Terminals shall be of the, suitably rated, fully numbered and fitted so that extra units may be
added.
P.
They shall be, suitably sized to cater for long runs of externally mounted cable where voltage
drops necessitate a larger size than standard for the connected load.
Q.
20% spare terminals shall be fitted to each control panel. Each terminal rail shall have sufficient
length for 10% additional terminals.
R.
All wiring for BEMS/control devices shall be via hinged 'link' type terminals.
S.
Entry to the panel terminals shall be via detachable, undrilled gland plates. Gland plates shall
cover the length of the terminal strip.
T.
All panel mounted equipment shall be wired out to terminal strips.
U.
Equipment earthing connections shall be provided, and sized according to the anticipated short
circuit current. Earthing connections shall be sufficiently tight to assure permanent and effective
earthing for the MCC enclosure.
2.3
A.
EQUIPMENT - ISOLATORS
Main isolating switches and fuse switches where used, shall be capable of opening and closing
on-load. Isolating switches shall conform to utilization category AC-3. Isolating switches and
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 5 of 15

16482
FALCON CLINIC
fuses combination shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60947-3.

fuse switches shall be suitable for 60 Hz, 3-phase, 4 wire connections.
Isolating switches and
B.
Individual starter isolators shall conform to AC-3, utilization category.
C.
A bolted neutral link shall be provided for termination of the incoming cable.
2.4
A.
2.5
SHORT TIME RATING & FAULT LEVELS

Short time ratings and fault levels are shown on the Electrical drawings and they should be
calculated by the contractor and submitted for approval.
STARTERS
A.
Shall comply with IEC 60947-4-1 and be suitable for starting standard industrial cage or wound
rotor motors or as specified in the particular specification.
B.
Starters shall be rated for continuous duty unless otherwise specified on drawings or schedules.
C.
Utilization categories for contactors in all types of starter shall be IEC 60947 AC-3 unless
otherwise specified for particular applications.
D.
Starters less than 10 HP shall be direct on line. Starters rated 10 HP and above shall be open
transition automatic star-delta.
E.
Factors to be taken into account in selecting starting methods shall include:

1.
Starting torque requirements.
2.
Acceleration times.
F.
All starters and speed control systems shall be provided with suitable protection for phase to
phase, phase to neutral and phase to earth faults, overloads, under voltage, over voltage, phase
sequence, and phase failure.
G.
All overload devices shall be arranged for hand resetting. A reset button shall not be provided
on the starter enclosure. All overload relays shall have load contacts of the single-pole
changeover type.
H.
H. Motor starters shall be provided with bolt-free auxiliary contacts for local and remote
signaling.
2.6
A.
2.7
DIRECT ON LINE (DOL) STARTERS

Dol staters shall be rated for intermittent periodic duty or intermittent duty class 0.3 and comply
with the requirements of utilization category AC-3.
AUTOMATIC STAR-DELTA (ASD) STARTERS
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 6 of 15

16482
FALCON CLINIC
A.
In all types of star-delta starters the correct phase relationship between the star and delta
connections to minimize disturbance on changeover shall be maintained.
B.
In all star-delta starters the star and delta contactors shall be electrically and mechanically
interlocked so that they cannot close or be closed at the same time.
C.
Where overload relays are connected in the phase circuit the overload relay scales shall be
clearly marked to show whether they represent line current or whether the scale must be
multiplied by 1.7 to represent line current.
D.
Automatic changeover timers shall be adjustable from one second up to at least 20 seconds but
the transition from star to delta windings shall be achieved without any internal delay. Closed
transition timers shall have tamper-proof factory-set adjustment.
2.8
STARTERS FOR DUAL-WOUND AND POLE-CHANGE MOTORS
A.
Shall be electrically and mechanically interlocked so that it is impossible for both high and low
speed contactors to close or be closed at the same time.
B.
The parts of the composite starter shall comply with the relevant specification for individual
starters.
C.
Adjustable timers shall be fitted into the control circuit so that there is a time delay between
switching off the high speed contactor and switching on the low speed contactor.
D.
When high speed is selected the motor shall run in low speed for a preset time before changing
to high speed.
2.9
SOFT-START/STOP STARTERS
A.
Soft start/stop starters shall be supplied as a unit with an enclosure suitable for panel mounting.
B.
Starters shall be rated for 415V a.c., 60Hz supply and a temperature operating range of 0 to 50
C. Noise and impulse immunity shall be to, IEC 60947-4-2.
C.
Soft start shall be via a range of switch selectable ramp times of between 0.5 and 60 seconds
with a ramp voltage which increases linearly with time.
D.
Soft stop shall be via a range of switch selectable ramp times of between 1 to 120 seconds.
E.
The control circuit shall incorporate a remote emergency stop facility.
F.
This function shall override the normal 'soft stop' of the starter.
G.
Filters shall be provided at the inlet and outlet of such devices.
H.
The harmonic current spectrum of each soft-start/stop starter shall be provided by the
manufacturer for the calculation and provision of suitable filtration at the electrical switchboard.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 7 of 15

16482
FALCON CLINIC
I.
A contactor shall be provided which isolates the soft start/stop unit when the motor is not
required to run. The contactor shall be arranged to switch 'off-load'.
J.
The maximum starter current shall be 2.0 times full load.
K.
The control panel manufacturer shall calculate the maximum heat dissipation from all soft-start
devices and incorporate adequate ventilation methods to ensure that the internal temperature
within the control does not exceed 40C. The calculations shall be submitted for the approval of
the consultant.
2.10
FREQUENCY DRIVES (INVERTER)
A.
The frequency drive shall employ Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) using thyristor or transistor
switches.
B.
The rating of the frequency drive shall be sufficient for the continuous maximum rating of the
motor and not its running load.
C.
The frequency drive unit shall have an efficiency in excess of 90 %.
D.
Facilities shall be provided to allow the connection of an Emergency Stop Push button to ensure
effective direct stopping of the drive if dangerous situations arise. The means provided shall
include direct connection to an air-break e.g. a contactor, arranged such that its opening onload:
E.
Does not inhibit any in-built deceleration provided by the variable speed controller.
F.
Does not produce additional safety hazards.
G.
Does not cause damage to the controller.
H.
Such contactors must be IEC 60947-4-1with utilization category AC-3.
I.
The frequency drive shall be capable of switching on to a motor already rotating in either
direction.
J.
The control panel manufacturer shall calculate the maximum heat dissipation from all soft-start
devices and incorporate adequate ventilation methods to ensure that the internal temperature
within the control does not exceed 40C. The calculations shall be submitted for the approval of
the consultant.
K.
Cables used between the drive and motor must be of the shielded type.
L.
Harmonic filters must be added to each drive unit to eliminate the harmonics effect
2.11
A.
TECHNICAL FEATURES
The input to the frequency drive shall be of an uncontrolled bridge rectifier type, to limit
harmonic distortion.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 8 of 15

16482
FALCON CLINIC
B.
The speed shall be smoothly adjustable, and controlled by one of the following:
C.
Potentiometer (Manual/hand operation)
D.
And 0-10V dc signal (Auto operation)
E.
or 4-20 m A signal (Auto operation)
F.
Overcurrent, short-circuit and earth fault protection of the output shall be provided within the
control system. Reset of any fault condition shall be manual.
G.
The system shall provide protection against phase loss. If not included within the frequency
drive, then an external phase loss detection device shall be fitted.
H.
Full rated output shall be provided continuously with an ambient temperature of 50 oC and 90%
relative humidity the control panel manufacturer shall ensure that sections of the panels housing
frequency drives shall be suitably ventilated to ensure that this temperature is not exceeded.
I.
The starting arrangement shall include a ramp speed control, to achieve starting currents not
exceeding normal full load current wherever possible.
J.
The output frequency range shall nominally be 0.5 to 120 Hz.
K.
The frequency drives shall provide the following visual information :

Motor Speed, Motor Overload, Motor Short Circuit, Over voltage, Under voltage, Equipment
heating.
L.
The control circuits shall be immune to interference caused by operating on normal raw mains
supply in an industrial environment.
M.
Where frequency drive systems might be a source of Radio Frequency Interference (RFI)
sufficient to interfere with the proposed functioning of adjacent computer based equipment, RFI
suppression at source shall be applied.
N.
The manufacturer shall provide details regarding the production of mains-borne interference and
harmonic. Written guarantees shall be given by the manufacturer that these levels of
interference and harmonics shall not be exceeded over the full operating speed of the drive.
O.
Where screening of cables between the frequency drive and motor is required, the type of cable
recommended must be indicated at the tender stage. The recommended cable must ensure
that the level of any radio interference is limited to comply with BS800.
P.
The harmonic current spectrum of each frequency drive shall be provided by the manufacturer
for the calculation and provision of suitable filtration at the electrical switchboard.
2.12
A.
THYRISTOR CONTROLLERS
Thyristor controllers used for modulating the output of electric heater batteries shall be of the
type utilizing burst firing with cut-off at zero voltage employing solid state power switches
(TRIAC).
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 9 of 15

16482
FALCON CLINIC
B.
The Thyristor controllers shall accept a 0 - to 10V or 4 to 20mA input signal.
C.
The harmonic current spectrum of each thyristor controller shall be provided by the
manufacturer for the calculation and provision of suitable filtration at the electrical switchboard.
D.
A contactor shall be provided which isolates the thyristor controller when it is not required to run
or in a high temperature shut down condition.
E.
The control panel manufacturer shall provide adequate means of ventilation to ensure that the
internal temperature of sections of the panel housing thyristor controllers does not exceed 40
oC. The calculations shall be submitted for the approval of the consultant.
2.13
CONTACTORS
A.
Shall be of the same manufacture as the starters. They shall be suitable for use on 3 phase, 4wire 415/230V, 60Hz supplies and fitted with 230V 60Hz coils.
B.
Contactors shall comply with IEC 60947-4-1 and shall be rated for intermittent periodic or
intermittent duty Class 0.3.
C.
The utilization category shall generally be AC-3 but category AC-1 may be used where the load
is positively identified as being non-inductive, but excluding tungsten filament lamps.
2.14
A.
2.15
A.
2.16
A.
2.17
A.
RELAYS
Relays shall be fitted with 230V, 60Hz coils. All relays shall have a clearance of 3mm between
them.
TIMERS
Shall be electronic with adjustable ranges.
INDICATOR LAMPS
With the exception of fuse failure lamps, shall be transformer type with inbuilt test relay and
chrome bezels. Fuse failure lamps shall be of the neon type, with current limiting device, fitted in
similar bezels.
FUSES
Shall be of the HRC type complete with bridges, terminal shrouds and carriers. Power fuses
shall be provided for each starter. Control circuits for all starters shall be taken downstream of
the starter power fuse. All control circuits shall use the red phase. The control circuit shall be
sub fused at 6A.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 10 of 15

16482
FALCON CLINIC
B.
Where starters are provided for single-phase drives and are connected to the yellow or blue
phases, then the control circuits shall be separately fused from the red phase. Single-phase
drives shall be spread over the 3-phases to avoid overloading the red phase.
C.
Suitably rated control circuit fuses shall be provided for groups of interlocking relays, lamps,
timers etc, and no such fuse shall feed more than fifteen items. Each of these control circuit
fuses shall be supplied with a 'Fuse Failure' neon lamp.
D.
Fuses shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60269-1, and IEC 60269-2 .
E.
Any controllers mounted within the panel shall be fed from control circuit fuses with a maximum
of six items from any one fuse. Each such fuse shall be supplied with a 'Fuse Failure' neon
lamp.
F.
Panels shall be provided with spare 3-phase fuseways on the busbars, comprising 10% of the
total fitted, with a minimum of 2.
G.
Where Applicable panels shall be provided with a spare set of fuses. When commissioning is
complete the panel is to be handed over with this complete set of spare fuses provided as part
of the Controls Sub-contract.
H.
A fully detailed typed fuse chart shall be provided within a plastic envelope and fitted within each
panel section containing fuses.
I.
MCB's : may be offered as an alternative to HRC fuses. They shall be rated according to their
manufacturer's recommendations. Spare ways shall be provided as for fuseways but spares
clipped inside the panel are not required.
J.
Details of the MCB's must be provided with the Tender together with the characteristic curves
for Engineer Approval.
2.18
GENERAL
A.
Each starter/contactor shall be controlled from a test-off-Auto switch on the panel facade. Each
starter/Contactor shall be provided with STOP/RUN, and TRIP Indicating lamps as shown on
the drawings.
B.
The RUN position on all selector switches shall allow its associated plant to run out of normal
sequential control provided all safety interlocks are satisfied. This facility is primarily for
commissioning/maintenance purposes.
C.
Wiring arrangements shall permit all starters/contactors to be de-energized from remotely

mounted lock-off stop buttons or local isolator auxiliary contacts.
D.
Indicator lamps shall be provided for indicating the presence of each incoming phase to panels.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 11 of 15

16482
FALCON CLINIC
E.
Indictor lamps shall be provided to indicate that the 24 V control circuit is healthy. A push button
connected to all lamps will be used as a lamp test method to check the functionality of the lamp.
F.
A 13 Amp switched socket outlet shall be provided within each panel fed via an ELCB from the
live side of the main panel isolator.
G.
Each section of the control panel shall have an internal long fluorescent strip light. They shall, in
the case of multiple section panels, be controlled by a single switch with an indicator lamp on
the main isolator section.
H.
The panel shall be suitably wrapped for delivery to site with 500 grade anti-static polythene.
I.
Each panel section shall be provided with a lifting eye in each corner.
J.
Unless otherwise indicated, enclosures degree of protection will be IP 65.
2.19
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A.
The following CAD prepared drawings shall be provided for each panel:
1.
Schematic internal and external wiring diagrams.
2.
General arrangement drawings detailing internal and external equipment layouts.
3.
Detailed label engraving drawings.
B.
A drawing pocket shall be provided in each control panel.
2.20
TESTING
A.
All wiring within control panels shall be works checked, prior to dispatch, for loose connections,
correct terminations and compliance with wiring diagrams. In addition, functional checks shall
be carried out in the works to ensure that all interlocking and sequencing is in accordance with
the performance requirements of the specification. The Owners Authorized Representative
shall be given seven days written notice of such tests so that he may attend if he so desires.
B.
With all control circuits disconnected but with all isolators closed and power fuses fitted, the
panels shall be subjected to a High Voltage test of 2.5kV for one minute, across the following
points:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Phase to phase
Phase to neutral
Phase to earth
Neutral to earth
Page 12 of 15

16482
FALCON CLINIC
C.
This shall be followed by an insulation resistance test with an approved type of 500V testing
instrument.
With all electronic components removed and with all isolators closed and power fuses fitted, an
insulation resistance of not less than 20 Mega ohms shall be obtained between each of the
following points:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
2.21
A.
2.22
Phase to Phase
Phase to neutral
Phase to earth
Neutral to earth
Certified schedules detailing all tests and their results shall be submitted to the Engineer within
fourteen days of the tests.
APPROVAL OF STANDARDS
The standard of workmanship shall comply with the requirements of the Engineer who shall
carry out periodic inspections of completed work and work in progress.
SCHEDULES
A.
Details of the panels are included in the Motor Control Panel Drawings.
B.
The BEMS specialist should coordinate the motors and control equipment quantities and ratings
with the other trades and take any approved corrections at no cost to the contract.
PART 3 - SCOPE OF WORKS

A.
The Contractor shall supply all controls and controls related equipment detailed within this
specification. Any items of equipment or works not specifically mentioned in this specification
but necessary for the correct or safe operation of any item of plant shall be deemed included in
the contract scope of works.
B.
The Contractor responsibilities shall include but not be limited to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Supply of all drawings detailed in Section A of this specification, produced using AutoCAD
Version 14 or above.
Supply, manufacture and works testing of all motor control panels.
Supply and fit hardboard protection on all sections of above panels and enclosures, in
such a manner that allows free operation of doors, facade mounted switches, push
buttons etc, to protect the paint work during commissioning.
Storage as necessary, transportation and installation of all motor control panels and
enclosures.
Supply and installation of all sub-main power cabling from the motor control panels and
enclosures to each item of plant.
Page 13 of 15

16482
FALCON CLINIC
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Identification of all sub-mains power and controls cabling from the motor control panels at
both ends of each core, using the same numbering as its associated outgoing
MCP/enclosure terminal.
Ensure all control devices are positioned such that maximum stability of control for each
system can be achieved.
Supply and fit an engraved 'Formica' label for all controls items, equipment and plant
associated with the control system, incorporating the appropriate identification reference
number as detailed on the Motor Control Panel Equipment Schedules.
All labels shall be fixed with bright finish instrument head screws or plastic flat headed
push in rivets of the same color as the label.
Supply and compile documentation and training as detailed in Section A of this
specification.
Warranty of the entire system for 12 months following Practical Completion.
When submitting his, the contractor shall tender clearly describe any work necessary for
the proper completion of his package which has not been included for in his tender and
which he may require to be executed and paid for by others; any such work not
specifically stated and described shall be deemed to have been included in his tender.
PART 4 - ELECTRICAL - GENERAL

A.
The equipment supplied shall be suitable for operation on 415/230V, 60Hz supplies. Any special
tolerances, screening and earthing requirements shall be included in the contractor scope of
work.
B.
In order to avoid corruption of the BEMS equipment operation by electrical interference, all
wiring shall be installed to minimize coupling of electromagnetic and electrostatic interference to
low bulldog signal and data wiring. The preferred method of achieving this shall be by ensuring
a physical separation of greater than 50 mm between the power supply cables and the signal
and data cables.
Where mixed wiring is unavoidable braided screen mains cable, dressed close to metalwork, is preferred, but the Contractor shall clearly specify the methods by which he intends to eliminate any such
interference with his signal and data transmission.
PART 5 - ASSOCIATED WORKS
5.1
A.
5.2
A.
ELECTRICAL
The fused power feeds from distribution boards to the motor control panels, to any loose
mounted motor starter and switch equipment and control boxes, including the making off of such
feeds shall be carried out by the Electrical Specialist.
MECHANICAL
The Mechanical Specialist shall include for fitting all valve bodies, pockets, hydraulic tube
connections, duct mounting flanges, brackets, clamping bushes, couplings, lock nuts, gaskets
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 14 of 15

16482
FALCON CLINIC
and any special fittings for pipe work and metal and builders work ducts, supplied by the
BEMS/Controls Specialist.
B.
The Mechanical Specialist shall also include for supplying and fitting; pockets adjacent to all
pipe work thermostats and temperature detectors, suitable for mercury in glass thermometers;
pressure tapping complete with stop cocks across all ports of control valves and for each
hydraulic tube connection; access panels adjacent to all ductwork mounted temperature,
humidity and air flow detectors; welded bosses or screwed tees for water flow switches, with an
oversize branch connection bushed down.
C.
The Mechanical Specialist shall include for supplying and fitting all necessary clips, hangers and
supports for all averaging temperature detecting elements and for serpentining them across the
ducts. The elements shall be clipped every 200mm and the supports and hangers shall be
adequate to prevent vibration of the element.
D.
The Mechanical Specialist shall include for mounting and fitting universal joints, actuator cranks
and damper actuators, supplied by the BEMS/Controls Specialist, and the supply, fitting and
connection of linkages between actuators and dampers. The Mechanical Specialist shall also
mount and fix all dampers and their frames into ducts.
E.
The control dampers shall be supplied as part of the Mechanical Package.
F.
The Mechanical Specialist shall ensure that all control valves, pipe and ductwork fittings/pockets
installed by him or in association with others shall allow educated clearance for removal of
associated equipment and also for normal testing, maintenance and inspection.
G.
The Mechanical Specialist shall provide attendance during commissioning of the control system.
H.
The Mechanical Specialist shall give four weeks prior written notice to the controls supplier for
site attendance for commencement of the supervisory service and for testing and
commissioning.
5.3
BUILDERS WORK
A.
The Contractor shall include for all cutting away, structural holes and foundations required for
the controls system, as detailed with marked up drawings, via or by the Controls Specialist,
together with all the necessary making good after such work.
B.
The Contractor shall include for all scaffolding and working platforms required by the Controls
Specialist including the setting up and taking down of such items.
5.4
A.
INTERCONNECTION WITH OTHER SYSTEMS

The contractor is totally responsible to workshop drawings to assure provision and compatibility
with all required data points as per schedule of points and control schematics
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 15 of 15

16482
FALCON CLINIC
SECTION 16485
CONTACTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Division-1 (general requirement), apply to work of this section.
B.
C.
Distribution boards section 16470.
D.
The requirements of this section apply to contactors specified elsewhere in these specifications.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.3
1.4
complete and make ready for operation, contactors shall be in accordance with Drawings and
Specifications.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of contactors of the types and
capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less
than 5 years. and shall be of one manufacturer, approved by kahramaa, and conform to the
requirement set forth in this specification. Provide contactors produced by a manufacturer listed
as an Acceptable Manufacturer in this section.
B.
Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, kahramaa

regulations latest edition, DIN/VDE, IEC, EN, NEC, and Standards pertaining to contactors.
Provide contactors.
C.
govern.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for contactors.
Page 1 of 2
CONTACTORS
16485
FALCON CLINIC
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.2
Contactors shall be suitable for use on three-phase, four-wire, 415/240 V, 50 Hz. supplies with
number of poles as shown on drawing and fitted with 200 - 250 V a.c. coils, unless otherwise
detailed. Contactors shall comply with IEC, DIN/VDE Standards only contactors which have
been type tested to meet the requirements of the IEC, DIM/VDE Standards BS shall be used.
Contactors shall be rated for intermittent periodic or intermittent duty Class 0.3. The utilization
category shall generally be AC-3 but category AC-1 may be used where the load is positively
identified as being non-inductive, but excluding tungsten filament lamps.
Only one manufacturers interlocking relays shall be used on one project. Relay coils shall be
for 200 - 250 V, 50 Hz, unless otherwise detailed elsewhere.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
3.2
3.3
Examine conditions under which contactors are to be installed and notify in writing of conditions
detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install contactors as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions,

requirements of applicable Standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to
B.
Coordinate, as necessary to interface installation of contactors.

A.
Prior to energization of contactor devices, test devices for continuity of circuitry and for short
circuits. Replace malfunctioning units with new units, and then demonstrate compliance with
requirements.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 2 of 2
CONTACTORS
16485
FALCON CLINIC
SECTION 16490
AUTOMATIC REACTIVE POWER COMPENSATION
(POWER FACTOR CAPACITORS CORRECTION)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions, and
Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B.
The requirements specified in this section apply to all related sections in this Division. The
requirements of all related sections, elsewhere in this division also apply to this section unless
specified to the contrary.
C.
D.
Specification Section 15547: Mounting and Isolation of Mechanical and Electrical Systems and
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.3
complete, make ready and set to work for operation by the Owner, power factor capacitors correction
shall be in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Acceptable manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of switchboards of the types
and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less
than 5 years as approved by Architect and shall be of one manufacturer, approved by the kahramaa,
and conform to the requirement set forth in these specifications.
B.
Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes and kahramaa
regulations latest edition, DIN/VDE, IEC, BS, EN, NEC, UL, NEMA, ANSI, and IEEE Standards
pertaining to centralized automatic power factor capacitor assemblies. Provide centralized automatic
power factor capacitor assemblies and components conforming to one or more of the foregoing codes
and standards.
C.
govern.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 1 of 7
AUTOMATIC REACTIVE POWER

COMPENSATION
16490
FALCON CLINIC
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product data: Submit manufacturer's data for centralized automatic power factor capacitor assemblies
including sizes, enclosures, electrical ratings and characteristics and wiring diagrams.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings of centralized

automatic power factor capacitor assemblies with related low tension, single-line diagram, and outline
drawings.
1.5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
Provide fully automatic capacitor assemblies for low tension applications as indicated on the plans
and single line diagram.
B.
Assemblies shall be fabricated as extensions of the low tension centralized automatic power factor
capacitor assemblies when indicated.
C.
Each assembly (unit) shall provide 95% power factor correction with built in as feguards to prevent
over capacitance.
2.2
RATINGS
A.
The voltage rating of the power factor correction equipment shall be 415 volts between phases.
B.
The total KVAR capacity of the assembly units shall be as indicated on drawings.
C.
The total KVAR shall be automatically switched in steps of 25/50 KVAR as indicated on the drawings.
2.3
CAPACITOR CELLS - DRY TYPE
A.
Provide an automatic power factor correction system for each switchgear as shown in the drawings.
B.
The automatic power factor correction system shall be housed in a separate section of the
switchgear. The enclosure section shall be top entry access, forced cooled, ventilated and furnished
with earthing lugs. An external door operator shall be provided to de-energize the unit when the door
is open. The enclosure shall have a hinged door with key lock provisions.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 2 of 7

COMPENSATION
16490
FALCON CLINIC
C.
Individual capacitors shall be self-healing utilizing polypropylene as a dielectric with vacuum deposited
conductors on the polypropylene as electrodes.
D.
Each three phase capacitor shall be furnished with an approved pressure sensitive interrupter. The
interrupter shall disconnect all three phases at the same time to maintain a balanced circuit.
E.
Capacitors shall be contained in hermetically sealed metal cans to prevent atmospheric contaminants
from shortening the useful life.
F.
Dielectric material shall be low loss, less than 0.5 watts per KVAR.
G.
Dry cells encapsulation medium shall be a thermoplastic material which allows out gassing to engage
the pressure interrupter.
H.
Terminal bushings shall withstand 10KV AC to ground and be rated 30 KV BIl or greater.
I.
Nominal design life of individual capacitor cells shall be 20 years.
J.
Individual capacitor cells shall be covered by a five year warranty.
K.
All capacitor cells shall have threaded terminals for wire connection.
L.
To reduce line transients on system no stage shall switch more than 120 KVAR and no capacitor cell
shall exceed 25.0 KVAR.
2.4
CONTROLS
A.
All controls shall be mounted on enclosure door for easy inspection and service.
B.
A door interlock shall be provided to disconnect control power when enclosure door is opened.
C.
A personnel ground fault breaker shall be provided to disconnect control power upon accidental
contact with control power and earth (ground).
D.
Reactive Power Controller/Power Factor Meter

1.
Controller shall measure the reactive current on every passage of the voltage through zero.
2.
A LED display shall be provided to indicate the stages that are on.
3.
To prevent leading power factor the controller shall be provided with a programmable target
cosine selector.
4.
The time delay between switching of capacitors must be field programmable and have a range
of 10 seconds to 10 minutes to reduce hunting and allow voltage decay as noted in par. 2.7.
5.
All output contacts shall be disabled within 15 milliseconds of main power interruption. The
controller shall retain its programming after the restoration of supply voltage. The controller
shall bring the capacitor bank back on line in a step, phased, normal sequence.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 3 of 7

COMPENSATION
16490
FALCON CLINIC
E.
6.
Controller shall be able to select 1:1:1, 1:1:2, and 1:2:2 switching sequence of capacitor steps.
7.
Controller shall be able to display power factor with indication for an inductive or capacitive
power factor.
On-Off Switch
1. On/Off switch shall control power to all door mounted controls.
2. On/Off switch shall contain pilot light to indicate "on" mode.
F.
Blown Fuse Lights

1. Three "Push-To-Test" blown fuse pilot lights, one per phase-door mounted, to indicate a blown
fuse condition.
2. Each fused phase, of each 50 KVAR step, shall have its own blown fuse indicating light
mounted in close proximity to the fuse for easy identification.
G.
2.5
Torroidal choke coils shall be included in all three phases of each capacitor bank to minimize the
effects of voltage spikers on sensitive electronic equipment. The choke coil shall be designed to limit
the capacitor inrush current to a value equal to or less than the capacitor switching rating of the
contactor. The toraidal choke coils shall be braced to withstand a 80.000 symmetrical ampere short
circuit.
ENCLOSURE
A.
The enclosure shall be fabricated from 2.65 mm minimum thick, cold rolled steel.
B.
An internal grounding lug shall be provided.
C.
A baked enamel finish in matching switchgear grey color shall be used.
D.
Capacitor cells shall be accessible for visual inspection and replacement from the front of the cabinet.
E.
Removable lifting eyes shall be provided.
F.
The enclosure door shall have a three point latch with key locking handle.
2.6
GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
A.
All power wiring shall have a thermoplastic insulation rated for 105 degrees C at 500 volts.
B.
System wiring connections shall be made to copper bus bars braced for 65,000 amps or greater.
C.
Contactors shall be rated for switching of reactive current by the contactor manufacturer.
D.
The automatic power factor correction equipment shall be warranted by the manufacturer of the
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 4 of 7

COMPENSATION
16490
FALCON CLINIC
capacitor cells.
E.
Air core transient suppression coils shall be provided in series between the contactors and capacitor
cells.
F.
All wiring connections shall be mechanically fixed with nut or screw.
G.
The automatic power factor correction shall be an expandable modular design.
2.7
DISCHARGE RESISTORS
A.
Capacitor "cells" shall be provided with discharge resistors to reduce residual voltage to less than 50
volts within one minute of de-energization, unless local codes govern otherwise.
B.
Resistors shall be chosen to insure a 20 year minimum life.
2.8
FUSES
A.
To provide for major fault protection, line fuses shall be provided on all three phases of each switched
stage and fixed bank.
B.
Line fuses shall be current limiting, U.L., recognized Class T type. Minimum interrupting ratings shall
be 200,000 amps for fuses of 30 amps and above.
C.
Fuses shall be designed for capacitor applications and shall be rated not less than 200% capacitor
current rating.
2.9
PERFORMANCE FEATURES
A.
The capacitor shall be rated for continuous duty at 50o C ambient at 1,000 meters and below.
B.
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of 5% on either the voltage and current wave-forms shall not effect
the life of capacitors, contactors or controllers.
C.
A + 10% variation in line voltage shall not effect the life of the capacitor.
D.
All capacitors should be rated at 415 volt and can withstand 480 volt.
2.10
A.
SYSTEM COMPATIBILITY
Provide in each assembly, space and connection such that if in the future, chokes and filters will be
required, the installation can be accomplished in the field with minimum down time.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 5 of 7

COMPENSATION
16490
FALCON CLINIC
2.11
TESTING
A.
All capacitor cells shall be traceable through construction and testing.
B.
The automatic capacitor bank shall be tested for proper operation prior to leaving the factory. The
following checks, measurements, and operations must be confirmed and recorded for each stage.
C.
The certified record of these tests shall become part of the permanent documentation package that
travels with the automatic capacitor bank.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Wire connections
Torque connections
Phase to phase, resistance checks
Controller operation, manual operation
Controller operation, automatic operation
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
3.2
Examine conditions under which centralized automatic power factor capacitor assemblies are to be
installed. Notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install centralized automatic power factor capacitor assemblies as indicated in accordance with
manufacturer's written instruction, requirements of applicable standards, NECA's "Standard of
Installation," or equal and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that installation
complies with requirements and serves intended function.
B.
Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of centralized automatic power factor capacitor

assemblies with other work.
C.
Mount the centralized automatic power factor capacitor assemblies on flush steel aligning channels
elevated above floor level by a concrete pad and as noted on drawings. Provide aligning shims to
achieve level installation where channels cannot be provided.
D.
Insure that centralized automatic power factor capacitor assemblies are shipped in sections which can
be fitted through the structures and openings available.
E.
Bond together the centralized automatic power factor capacitor assemblies structure, sections and all
conduits terminating at same with a 120 mm bare copper earth (ground) cable and connect to the
switchgear earth (ground) bus and to the earthing (grounding) grid as required. Provide conduits
terminating at centralized automatic power factor capacitor assemblies with Earthing (Grounding)
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 6 of 7

COMPENSATION
16490
FALCON CLINIC
Wedges of the required size.

F.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment
G.
Provide 6.35 mm minimum thick x 60 cm wide insulation mat in front of centralized automatic power
factor capacitor assemblies and rear of free standing equipment and extend 30 cm beyond ends.
H.
Provide protective covering during construction.
I.
Touch up marred or scratched surfaces to match original finish.
J.
Provide control fuses, with five spare fuses for each rating.
K.
Adjust operating mechanism for free mechanical movement.
3.3

A.
Upon completion of installation of equipment and after circuitry has been energized, test equipment to
demonstrate compliance with requirements. When possible, field-correct malfunctioning units, then
retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise remove and replace with new equipment and retest.
B.
Prior to energization of switchgear and centralized automatic power factor capacitor assemblies:
1. Perform insulating resistance test on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth for (1)
minute. Minimum test voltage to be 1,000 volts D.C. with a minimum resistance of 100
megohms.
2. Check centralized automatic power factor capacitor assemblies for continuity and for short
circuits.
3. Notify Architect of any abnormalities.
C.
3.4
After assemblies are energized, demonstrate functioning in accordance with manufacturers

requirements.
MAINTENANCE
A.
All maintenance and inspection on the capacitor assembly shall be done with the system disconnect
device in the open position.
B.
Maintenance and inspections should be limited to 15 minutes or less so not to affect utility billing.
C.
An annual inspection of the capacitor cell shall be done to identify failing capacitor cells (a bulged
cover is the symptom to watch for).
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 7 of 7

COMPENSATION
16490
FALCON CLINIC
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 16010, applies to work of this section.
C.
Testing and commissioning section 16950.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.3
1.4
complete and make ready for operation all lighting fixtures, ballasts, and lamps in accordance with
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of lighting fixtures, ballasts, and lamps,
whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
B.
Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes and KAHRAMAA
regulations latest edition, DIN/VDE, IEC, NEC, UL, NEMA, IEEE, and ANSI Standards pertaining
to lighting fixtures, ballasts, and lamps. Provide lighting fixtures, ballasts, and lamps products and
components which have been labelled by approved authorities.
C.
govern.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for lighting fixtures, ballasts, and lamps; include the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Details of construction and finishes

Electrical ratings
Mounting
Photometric data
Submit samples as directed by the Engineer.
Drawings to scale
Lighting track
Samples : Submit sample for each type of lighting fixture specified in the lighting fixtures schedule
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 1 of 7
LIGHTING
16500
FALCON CLINIC
for review and approval.

C.
Test : Submit type test certificates for the specified lighting fixtures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
All luminaires shall be manufactured to IEC 598-1 and 598-2.
B.
All luminaires supplied by the contractor shall be photometrically tested.
C.
The contractors shall produce upon request, the photometric data for any luminaire specified or
supplied.
D.
All luminaires shall be provided with a lamp compatible with the control gear used.
E.
Luminaires shall not be suspended by their flexible cord. A separate means of suspension shall be
provided.
F.
All flexible cords shall be anchored at both ends such that the cord is free from strain.
G.
Any plastics used in the luminaries shall be light and UV stable and shall be suitable for their
application.
H.
All sheet steel components shall be suitably pre-treated and electrostatically spray-painted using
acrylic polyester or epoxy powders.
I.
Non-compatible materials shall not be used in contact with each other.
J.
Louvers shall be restrained to prevent them from failing out of the body of the luminaires under
normal conditions and when re-lamping. Metal louvers shall be earthed to the body of the
luminaries or the earth terminal.
K.
Diffusers shall be restrained to prevent them from falling out of the body of the luminaires under
normal conditions and when re-lamping.
L.
Luminaires fitted with high frequency or electronic control gear shall be disconnected before the
circuit is tested for insulation resistance.
M.
All luminaires designed for internal use shall be constructed to IP 20 and be Class 1 unless
otherwise stated.
N.
All luminaires designed for external use shall be constructed to minimum classification of IP 44 and
be class 1 unless otherwise stated.
O.
All luminaries designed for operation room, radiology room and medical spaces should be under
the recommendation of medical consultant.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 2 of 7
LIGHTING
16500
FALCON CLINIC
2.2
FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES
A.
Unless otherwise stated fluorescent tubes of the size, wattage and colour detailed in the
schedules shall be supplied with each luminary.
B.
All cables shall be secured within the luminary body to prevent loose lengths from touching hot
surfaces or becoming trapped beneath cover plates. Cable clips or cleats shall be captive and
if secured by adhesive, shall not loosen with age.
C.
All fluorescent luminaires shall be supplied with high frequency electronic ballast.
The high frequency electronic ballast shall be used for single or two lamps (Use one (1) electronic
ballast with each 36W/26W/35W lamp or two (2) 18W/13W lamps).
The high frequency electronic ballast must have the following features:
1.
Components of the ballast shall include:

-
Low pass filter to limit harmonic distortion, radio frequency interference and
protect against peaks of main voltage.
Rectifier.
Buffer capacitor.
High frequency oscillator.
Lamp stabilization.
2.
The operating high frequency should be (24-31) KHz.
3.
The high frequency electronic ballast shall be classified as EEI-A2 class.
4.
The ballast shall have its own protection system. The ballast shall be short circuit proof, so
short circuit on its output terminals shall not damage the ballast.
5.
The ballast shall be capable of operating at main voltage of: 240 V + 10 %.
6.
The ballast start should be flicker-free warm start.
7.
Maximum temperature value at test point shall not exceed 75 C.
8.
Power factor shall be 95 % or more.
9.
The ballast should be capable of high switching frequency.
10.
The harmonic distortion shall be within the acceptable limits of:

-
IEC 555-2 Specification.
"Note: Ballast will be tested and rejected if not complying with the above mentioned
specifications".
11.
Starting time shall be less or equal 1.5 seconds.
12.
Electromagnetic interference shall be within the limits of CISPR 15 regulations.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 3 of 7
LIGHTING
16500
FALCON CLINIC
Average service life shall be better than 40000 hours at test temperature of 75 C.
14.
The failure rate at 4000 hours operating hours shall not exceed 1.5% at a test
temperature of 75C.
D.
Wiring within the fixture and for connection to the branch circuit wiring shall not be less than 1.5
mm2 for 240 volts application. Insulation shall be silicone rubber for the lower temperatures
(fluorescent fixtures) and impregnated asbestos for the higher temperatures.
E.
Aluminium reflectors and louvers shall be made from high purity aluminium (99.9 % minimum)
with low or very low iron. The anodic film shall have a minimum thickness of 2.5 microns.
F.
Louvers and reflectors shall be packed separately from the luminary body and protected against
damage.
Aluminium louvers shall not be installed until after the building has been thoroughly cleaned
prior to practical completion.
G.
2.3
13.
H.
Louvers shall not be installed using bare hands. Any louvers found with finger, palm marks or
builders dirt and dust shall be removed and cleaned using a high pressure hose with kodak 600
dirt emulsifier or a similar method approved by the louvre manufacturer. Louvers shall not be
wiped clean.
I.
Diffusers shall be made from UV stabilized acrylic or light stabilized polycarbonate, injection
moulded or equal and approved.
J.
The diffusers shall not support combustion and shall be self-extinguishing.
K.
Lamps of different types or ratings shall be controlled from separate dimmers.
L.
Lamps or dimming circuits shall be of the same color temperatures and color appearance. To
maintain a constant appearance all lamps on dimming circuits shall be changed at the same
time.
LAMPS
General :
Lamps shall be of wattage and type as shown on the Drawings.
Lamps for final permanent installation shall not be placed in the fixture until so directed by the Engineer
and this shall be accomplished directly before the building areas are ready for occupancy by the
Employer.
Lamps shall be furnished and installed in all lighting fixtures supplied.
Lamps used for temporary lighting service shall not be used in the final lambing of fixture units.
Fluorescent Lamps :
Lamps shall have bi-pin bases and a minimum approximate rated life of 12,000 hours.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 4 of 7
LIGHTING
16500
FALCON CLINIC
All lamps shall be energy saving type and should be approved by the medical consultant for the special
spaces as operation room,....etc.
Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings all fluorescent lamps shall have the colour rendering index
(84) and equal to "TL" D 36 W (26 mm diameter) and "TL" D 18 W (26 mm diameter) as manufactured
by PHILIPS.
2.4
EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEM

The emergency lighting installation shall fully comply with BS 5266.
All equipment used shall be ICEL approved and certificated. When requested copies of certificates
for all or any equipment supplied shall be provided.
The emergency lighting fixture shall be provided with built-in Backup battery for parking area, stairs
and back of house.
The Built-in back up battery shall have sufficient capacity to operate one lamp for three (3) hours in
case of failure of normal power supply.
Central battery system unit for safety lighting in accordance with IEC 598-2-22 shall be provided and
assigned for interior areas.
The central battery system unit shall supply and fully automatic function, monitoring of maximum 48
safety and exit luminaries of 8 watt 240V AC, DC for three (3) hours operation. The unit shall be
capable to automatic display of faulty luminaries.
The emergency luminaries supplied by the central battery system unit shall be approved by the
interior designer.
2.5
LIGHTING FIXTURES WITH BUILT IN BACK-UP BATTERY:

A. Exit signs shall be manufactured to meet the appropriate requirements of IEC, DIN/VDE standards.
B. All "Exit" signs and fire safety signs shall be of the pictogram type utilizing the pictograms as given in
IEC, DIN/VDE standards. Where wording is incorporated on the signs it shall be in accordance to
IEC,DIN/VDE standards.
C. Sizes of lettering shall comply with IEC, DIN/VDE standards.
D. Self-energized signs (in respect of luminosity) shall comply with IEC,DIN/VDE standards.
E. Each sign shall be internally illuminated by two separate systems of lighting.
F. The housing shall be designed to maintain an internal ambient temperature below that of the lowest
temperature rating of any piece of equipment installed therein.
2.6
PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS
Other lighting fixtures different than specified in this specs shall be designed and recommended by
the interior decorator.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 5 of 7
LIGHTING
16500
FALCON CLINIC
2.7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which lighting fixtures are to be installed. Notify in writing of conditions
detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. Install lighting fixtures as indicated, in accordance with lighting fixture manufacturer's written
practices to insure that installation complies with requirements and fulfills intended function.
B. Coordinate as necessary to properly interface installation of lighting fixtures with other works.
C. Install each fixture properly and safely. Furnish and erect hangers, rods, mounting brackets,
supports, bases, cables, canopies, channels, frames, and other equipment required.
D. Furnish lighting fixtures complete with appurtenances required for the proper, safe and distortion-free
installation in the various surfaces in which they appear.
E. Obtain each lighting fixture packaged with complete instructions and illustrations showing how to
install. Install lighting fixtures in strict conformance with manufacturer's recommendations and
instructions.
F. Install lighting fixtures plumb and at a height from the floor as specified. In cases where conditions
make this impractical, refer to the consultant for a decision. Use ball aligners, hang straights and
canopies on pendant fixtures.
G. Do not install fixtures and/or parts such as finishing plates and trims for recessed fixtures until all
plastering and painting that may mark fixtures finish has been completed.
H. Lighting fixture locations in mechanical is approximate. Coordinate mounting height and location of
lighting fixtures to clear equipment and to illuminate equipment adequately.
I.
Support all lighting fixtures independently.
J.
Whenever a fixture or its hanger canopy is applied to a surface mounted outlet box, utilize a finishing
ring to conceal the outlet box.
K. Make splices in internal wiring with approved insulated "wire nut" type mechanical connectors,
suitable for the temperature and voltage conditions to which they are subjected.
L. Use wire suitable for temperature, current, and voltage conditions to which it is subjected where
utilized for connections to or between individual lamp sockets and lamp auxiliaries (i.e., wires which
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 6 of 7
LIGHTING
16500
FALCON CLINIC
do not constitute "through circuit" wiring).

M. Replace blemished, damaged or unsatisfactory fixtures as directed.
N. Install all lighting units set true and free of light leaks, warps, dents, and other irregularities.
O. Install all lighting units free of dust and dirt.
P. Do not scale electrical drawings for exact location of the lighting fixtures. In general, the approved
coordinated reflected ceiling workshop plans shall indicate the proper locations of lighting fixtures.
Q. Rigidly align continuous rows of lighting fixtures for true in-line appearance.
R. Do not install recessed fluorescent fixtures weighing more than 18 kilograms directly on a concealed
or exposed ceiling spline of a lightweight acoustical ceiling system. Support such fixtures from the
building structure.
S. Do not mount surface or pendant type fluorescent fixtures regardless of their weight directly on the
concealed or exposed ceiling spline of a lightweight, acoustical ceiling system. Support such fixtures
from the building structure.
T. Install reflector cones, baffles, aperture plates, light controlling element for air handling fixtures,
visible trim, and decorative elements after completion of ceiling tiles, painting and general cleanup.
Carefully handle to avoid scratching or fingerprinting and provide completely clean to the Owner at
the time of acceptance.
3.3

A. Upon completion of installation of lighting fixtures and after building circuitry has been energized,
apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. When possible,
correct malfunctioning units at the site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove
and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting.
B. Certify that the equipment has been properly installed, adjusted, and tested.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 7 of 7
LIGHTING
16500
FALCON CLINIC
SECTION 16620
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY ( UPS )
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B.
C.
D.
Specification Section 15547: Mounting and Isolation of Mechanical and Electrical

Systems and related contract drawings, apply to this section of the work.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.3
Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests
necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, an Uninterruptible
Power System, in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacturer of UPS

Systems, of types, ratings and capacities required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years and shall be of one
manufacturer, approved by the kahramaa, and conform to the requirements set forth
in this specification .
B.
Standard Compliance:
Comply with requirements of applicable local codes,
kahramaa regulations, latest issue, DIN/VDE, IES, BS, N.E.C. (NFPA-70),
NEMA-PE-1, UL, ANSI C-62.41-1980, ASA-C-39.1-1964, ASME, EN, OSHA and FCC
Part 15, Sub-Part J, Class A. Provide UPS System and components which are
UL-listed as a complete system in accordance with UL-1012. UL-listing on the
individual devices are not sufficient.
C.
Service: Manufacturer must have a factory warehouse at which spare parts are
stocked and where a field service engineer who is a permanent, full-time employee of
the manufacturer, factory trained and qualified individual whose primary duty is field
service resides.
D.
Factory Testing: Before shipment, manufacturer to fully and completely test the
system to assure compliance with the specification including operational discharge
and recharge tests on at least a one-minute battery plant to assure guaranteed rated
performance.
E.
In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more stringent
provision will govern.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 1 of 14

16620
FALCON CLINIC
1.4
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data and installation instructions for UPS
System.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings.
EQUIPMENT WARRANTY
A.
Guarantee equipment furnished under these specifications against defective parts and
workmanship under terms of the manufacturer's and dealer's standard warranties for
a period of not less than one year from date of initial start-up.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
UPS SYSTEM
A.
System Description
1.
Parallel redundant with bypass Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) system

shall be provided to supply clean, regulated three-phase power for designated
electrical and electrical equipment even when the incoming utility power is
interrupted. The system shall consist of a rectifier/charger, inverter, static
bypass switch plus internal by-pass switch and sealed, low maintenance
battery plant.
2.
UPS rating as indicated on the drawings.
3.
Input Voltage: 415 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire plus earth (ground).
4.
Output Voltage: 415 volts, 3-phase, 4-wire plus earth (ground).
5.
Output Load Capacity: Specified output load capacity of the UPS at 0.8
lagging power factor as indicated on the drawings.
6.
Internal Battery Plant: Battery cells type; sealed, lead-acid, maintenance-free

with reserve time of 20 minutes at full load, 0.8 power factor, with ambient
temperature 30C and recharge time of ten times discharge time to 95%
capacity.
The Batteries are installed in separate cubicles.
7.
Input isolation Transformer: Dry type AC input to the rectifier/charger &

bypass, (copper wiring exclusively); transformer's hottest spot winding
temperature not to exceed the temperature limit of the transformer insulation
class of material when operating at full load at maximum ambient temperature
to isolate input neutral.
8.
Diesel Generator Interface: The UPS should include an interface to the diesel
generator set. The Gen-set shall include a potential free contact which closes
on opertion, the UPS system should receive this signal and accomodate its
operation as follows:
a.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Rectifier reduces its output voltage in an approporiate value to

maintain inverter full load operation without battery recharge,
reducing overall input a/c power consumption from the GenPage 2 of 14

16620
FALCON CLINIC
set to the minimum.

b.
B.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Setting the inverter to free running frequency of 50 Hz

+/- 0.1%
Rectifier/Charger
1.
General: Incoming AC power converted to a regulated DC output by the

rectifier/charger for supplying DC power to the inverter and battery;
rectifier/charger, a 6 pulse phase-controlled, solid-state SCR type with
constant voltage/constant current control circuitry.
2.
Input Current Walk-in: Rectifier/charger to contain a timed walk-in circuit that

causes the unit to gradually assume the load over a 30 second time interval
after input voltage is applied.
3.
AC Input Current Limit: Rectifier/charger unit with AC input current limiting

whereby the maximum input current is limited to 125% of the full input current
rating; rectifier/charger to operate at a reduced current limit mode whenever
the critical load is powered from the UPS static bypass circuit such that the
maximum UPS input current will not exceed 125% of full load input current;
the rectifier/charger input current limit to automatically reduce 24% of full load
input current whenever the critical load is powered from the UPS internal
maintenance bypass circuit; an "on generator" current limit function provided,
which when activated by an external dry contact closure (user supplied), to
reduce the input current limit to 102%.
4.
Battery Recharge: In addition to supplying power for the inverter load, the
rectifier/charger to be capable of recharging the battery from discharge to
90% charge within ten times the discharge time of the battery.
5.
Automatic Restart: Upon restoration of utility AC power, after a utility AC

power outage and prior to a UPS automatic end-of-discharge shutdown, the
rectifier/charger to automatically restart, walk-in and gradually assume the
inverter and battery recharge loads.
6.
Fuse Failure Protection: Fuse power semi-conductors in the rectifier/charger

with fast-acting fuses, so that loss of any one power semi-conductor will not
cause cascading failures; all fuses with blown fuse indicator with alarm
indication on the control panel.
7.
Output Filter: Rectifier/charger unit with an output filter to minimize ripple

current into the battery; ripple current into the battery not to exceed 2% RMS;
filter to insure that the DC output of the rectifier/charger will meet the input
requirements of the inverter; inverter capable to operate from the
rectifier/charger with the battery disconnected.
8.
Overvoltage Protection: UPS to automatically shutdown and the load to be

transferred to the static bypass line uninterrupted if the DC voltage rises to the
pre-set limit.
9.
Line current THD not to exceed 10% to the mains.
10.
Anti-harmonic regulated
harmonic values.
filter should be added to input to reduce the
Page 3 of 14

16620
FALCON CLINIC
C.
Inverter
1.
General: Inverter to convert DC power from the rectifier/charger output or the

battery, into regulated AC power for supporting the critical AC load; inverter,
IGBT transistorized technology (Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor,
phase-controlled, pulse width modulated (PWM) design capable of providing
the specified AC output.
Inverter should compromise 3 single phase bridges without paralleling of
transistors.
2.
Output Power Transformer: Dry type power transformer for the inverter AC
output, (copper wiring exclusively) with hottest spot winding temperature not
to exceed the temperature limit of the transformer insulation class of material
when operating at full load at maximum ambient temperature.
3.
Overload: Capable of supplying current and voltage for overloads exceeding

100% and up to 150% of full load current with status indicator and audible
alarm to indicate overload operation; UPS to transfer the load to bypass when
overload capacity is exceeded.
4.
Fault Clearing and Current Limit: Capable of supplying an overload current of

150% of its full load rating for thirty seconds; for greater currents or longer
time duration, electronic current-limiting protection of the inverter to prevent
damage to components; with self-protecting against any magnitude of
connected output overload; inverter control logic to sense and disconnect the
inverter from the critical AC load without the requirement to clear protective
fuses.
5.
Inverter Shutdown: For rapid removal of the inverter from the critical load, the
inverter control electronics to instantaneously turn off the inverter transistors;
simultaneously, the static transfer switch to turn on to maintain continuous
power to the critical load.
6.
Inverter DC Protection:
Protect by the following disconnect levels,
independently adjustable for UPS application flexibil;
-
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
DC Overvoltage Disconnect
DC Undervoltage Warning (Low Battery Reserve)
DC Undervoltage Disconnect (End of Discharge)
7.
Over-discharge Protection:
To prevent battery damage from overdischarging, the UPS control logic to automatically raise the shutdown voltage
set point as discharge time increases beyond 15 minutes.
8.
Inverter Output Voltage Adjustment: A manual control to adjust the output

voltage from +5% of the nominal value.
9.
Output Frequency: Controlled by an oscillator, temperature compensated to

hold the inverter output frequency to +0.1% for steady state and transient
conditions; drift not to exceed 0.1% during a 24-hour period; total frequency
deviation, including short time fluctuations and drift, not to exceed 0.1% from
the rated frequency.
Page 4 of 14

16620
FALCON CLINIC
D.
10.
Phase Balance: Electronic controls to regulate each phase so that an

unbalance loading will not cause the output voltage to go outside the specified
voltage unbalance or phase displacement.
11.
Fuse Failure Protection: Fuse power semi-conductors in the inverter unit with
fast-acting fuses, so that loss of any one power semi-conductor will not cause
cascading failures; all fuses with a blown fuse indicator with alarm indication
on the control panel.
Static Transfer Switch

1.
General: A static transfer switch and bypass circuit furnished as an integral

part of the UPS; a naturally commutated high-speed static (SCR-type) device
rated to conduct full load current continuously; overload rating of 200% rated
load for five minutes and 1000% rated load for one cycles; static transfer
switch control logic to contain an automatic transfer control circuit that senses
the status of the inverter logic signals, and operating and alarm conditions;
control circuits to provide an uninterrupted transfer of the load to an alternate
bypass source, without exceeding the transient limits specified herein, when
an overload or malfunction occurs within the UPS, or for bypassing the UPS
for maintenance.
2.
Uninterrupted Bypass Transfers:

a.
b.
3.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Automatic Transfer: Transfer control logic to automatically turn on the

static transfer switch, transferring the critical AC load to the bypass
source, after the transfer logic senses one of the following conditions:
-
Inverter overload capacity exceeded.
Critical AC load overvoltage or undervoltage.
Battery protection period expired.
UPS fault condition.
Transfer control logic to inhibit a transfer (manual or automatic) of the

critical load to the bypass source if one of the following conditions
exists:
-
Inverter/bypass voltage difference exceeding preset limits.
Bypass frequency out of limits.
Bypass out-of-synchronization range with inverter output.
Uninterrupted Retransfer: Retransfer of the critical AC load from the bypass

source to the inverter output to be automatically initiated unless inhibited by
manual control; transfer control logic to inhibit a retransfer (manual or
automatic) of the critical load to the inverter if one of the following conditions
exists:
-
Bypass out of synchronization range with inverter output.
Inverter/bypass voltage difference exceeding preset limits.

Page 5 of 14

16620
FALCON CLINIC
E.
F.
Overload condition exists in excess of inverter full load rating.
UPS fault condition present.
Internal Maintenance Bypass Switch

1.
Description: A manually operated maintenance bypass switch, incorporated

into the UPS cabinet to directly connect the critical load to the input AC power
source, bypassing the rectifier/charger, inverter, and static transfer switch.
2.
Isolation: Shield all energized terminals to ensure that maintenance personnel

do not inadvertently come in contact with energized parts or terminals and
provide a means to de-energize the static switch when the UPS is in the
maintenance bypass mode of operation.
3.
Maintenance Capability: With the critical load powered from the maintenance
bypass circuit, the operation of the rectifier/charger, inverter, and static
transfer switch, and battery operation to be capable of maintenance and
check-up.
Monitoring and Control

1.
Provide with a microprocessor based unit status display and controls section
designed for convenient and reliable operator interfacing, system power flow
diagram as part of the monitoring and controls section which depicts a
single-line diagram of the UPS and electrically-illuminated visual indicators
(long-life light-emitting diode (LED) type); locate all of the operator controls
and monitors on the front of the Ups cabinet; display monitoring functions
such as metering, status and alarms on an alpha-numeric digital display.
a.
b.
The UPS system must be equipped with LCD display (Man

machine dialogue) to perform the following :
-
Full operation and control of the UPS system.
Full measurements of all parameters of, input supply,

output power & loads voltages, currents and
frequency as well as battery real autonomy
timcharging/discharging voltages and currents.
Full diagnostics of fault including history of last events

with date and time.
Facility of making adjustments of rectifier output

voltage and inverter output voltages as well as setting
the parameters of the UPS system.
Metering: Display the Following Parameters:

-
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Input AC voltage line-to-line and/or line-to-neutral for each

phase.
Input AC current for each phase.
Page 6 of 14

16620
FALCON CLINIC
c.
Rectifier output DC current.

Battery voltage.
Battery charge/discharge current.
Output AC voltage line-to-line and/or line-to-neutral for each
phase.
Output AC current for each phase.
Percent of rated load being supplied by the UPS.
Battery time left during battery operation.
Inverter O/P current.
Frequency of rectifier input.
Apparent power of rectifier input.
Output power factor.
Frequency of UPS output.
Alarms: Display the Following Alarms:

-
Input power failure.

Battery discharging.
Low battery.
Overload.
Overload shutdown.
Load on bypass.
Equipment over-temperature.
Over-temperature shutdown.
Fan failure.
DC overvoltage.
Control power failure.
Output overvoltage.
Output undervoltage.
Fuse cleared.
Rectifier/charger failure.
Static transfer switch failure.
Provide an audible alarm and activate by any of the above alarm

conditions.
The following additional alarms to be displayed but not to activate the
audible alarm.
-
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
On maintenance bypass.
On static bypass line.
Sync with bypass line.
Not in sync with bypass line.
Out of frequency range.
Rectifier/charger in current limit mode.
Battery circuit breaker open.
d.
Controls: UPS start-up, shutdown and maintenance bypass

operations accomplished by a single rotary control switch; provide
pushbuttons to test and reset visual and audible alarms.
e.
Mimic Panel: Provide to depict a single line diagram of the UPS;

Integrate Indicating lights, within the single line diagram to illustrate
the status of the UPS power paths; parameters to be displayed
include, but not limited to, the following:
Page 7 of 14

16620
FALCON CLINIC
Input power available.

Output power available.
Normal operation.
Bypass operation.
The mimic panels for sets shall be installed in the Main security room
as indicated on the drowings.
2.
G.
Emergency Load Off Switch to isolate the UPS immediately from the load to
be installed near the UPS.
Electrical Specifications
1.
2.
AC Input to UPS
a.
Voltage Configuration: 3 phase, 4 wire plus ground.
b.
Voltage Range: +15% of nominal.
c.
Frequency: Nominal frequency + 10%.
d.
Power Factor: 0.80 lagging minimum at nominal input voltage and full
rated UPS output load.
e.
Inrush Current: 700% of full load current maximum for transformer

magnetization surge.
f.
Current Limit: 125% of nominal AC input current maximum.
g.
Input Current Walk-in: 30 seconds to full rated input current.
h.
Surge Protection: Sustains input surges without damage per criteria

listed in ANSI C62.41-1980 at 4000 volt peak.
i.
Current Distortion: 10% THD maximum at full load.
AC Output, UPS Inverter

a.
Voltage Configuration: 3 phase, 4 wire plus ground.
b.
Voltage Regulation:
+1%, 3 phase RMS average for a balanced 3 phase load for the
combined variation effects of input voltage, connected load, battery
voltage, ambient temperature and load power factor.
+2%, 3 phase RMS average for a 50% unbalanced load for the
combined variation effects of input voltage, connected load, battery
voltage, ambient temperature and load power f.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
c.
Frequency: Nominal frequency +0.1%.
d.
Frequency Slew Rate: 1.0 hertz per second maximum.

Page 8 of 14

16620
FALCON CLINIC
e.
Phase Displacement: +1 degree for balanced load. +3 % for 50%

unbalanced load.
f.
Bypass Line Sync Range: +0.5, +1.0, +2.0 hertz. Switch selectable.
g.
Voltage Distortion: 3% total harmonic distortion (THD) for 100% Non

linear loads and 1% for linear loods.
h.
Load Power Factor Range: 0.9 leading to 0.5 lagging.
i.
Output Power Rating: Rated kVA at 0.8 lagging power factor.
j.
Overload Capability: 125% for 10 minutes (without bypass source).

150% for 30 seconds (without bypass source).
k.
Inverter Output Voltage Adjustment: +5% manual adjustment.
l.
Voltage Transient Response:

-
H.
+ 3%
0 - 100%
Load stop
m.
Transient Recovery Time: To within 2% of output voltage within 20

milliseconds.
n.
Voltage Unbalance: Balanced load +1%; 20% unbalanced load +1%;

50% unbalanced load +2%; 100% unbalanced load +5%.
o.
Fault Clearing: Sub-cycle current of at least 300%.
General Mechanical Requirements

1.
Cabinet: Comprised of rectifier/charger, inverter, static transfer switch, and

doors/covers requiring a tool for gaining access, with casters and leveling
feet.
Front access only required for expedient servicing, adjustments and
installation; UPS cabinet structurally adequate with provisions for hoisting,
jacking and forklift handling.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
2.
Material: All materials and components making up the UPS to be new, of

current manufacture, and have not been in prior service except as required
during factory test.
3.
Cooling: (Forced Air). Use redundant low velocity fans to minimize audible
noise output; fans power by the UPS output.
4.
Thermal Design: All thermal and ambient sensors, coordinated with the
protective devices for the forced-air cooled power circuit components so that
Page 9 of 14

16620
FALCON CLINIC
internal or external fault conditions will be cleared by the protective devices

before excessive component or internal cabinet temperatures are exceeded.
I.
5.
Cable Entry: Power cables to enter or leave from the top or bottom of the
UPS cabinet as required.
6.
Serviceability: UPS constructed of replaceable sub-assemblies; printed circuit

assemblies to be plug-in; like sub-assemblies and like components
interchangeable.
7.
Finish: UPS cabinet cleaned, primed and painted with the manufacturer's
standard color.
Environmental Ratings:
1.
Ambient Temperature Range:

Operating: UPS: 0C to + 50C; Battery: 30C. Storage: -20C to 70 C.
2.
Relative Humidity: 0 to 100% non-condensing.
3.
Altitude:
Operating: 0 to 2,000 meters. Derated for higher altitudes. Storage: 0 to
12,000 meters.
4.
Audible Noise: Noise generated by the UPS under any condition of normal
operation not to exceed a sound pressure level of 65 dB measured 2 meters
from the surface of the UPS.
J.
Power Warning Signal: An isolated signal, normally closed when utility power fails
and the UPS battery is discharging, provided for user connection to computer power
warning interface.
K.
Remote Contact Board: Isolated Form C contacts provided to indicate a change of

status of each of the following conditions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
L.
UPS on battery alarm.

Low battery reserve alarm.
Load on bypass alarm.
Summary alarm.
Remote Status Panel: Provide in a suitable enclosure for wall mounting and include
the following indication:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Load on UPS (LED).

Load on bypass (LED).
Utility power fuilure (LED).
Low battery reserve (LED).
UPS alarm condition (LED).
Audible alarm with reset pushbutton.
Lamp test/reset pushbutton.
The remote status panels are located in Main security office at reception desk.
M.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Batteries: Batteries to be valve regulated lead acid batteries, with cyclic

Page 10 of 14

16620
FALCON CLINIC
life time to be not less than 1200 cycle at minumum discharge cell voltage
of 1.8 volts.
The batteries to be minimum 5 years design floating life time.
Output power of the batteries to be calculated at minimum VPC of 1.8 volts
and working temperature of 30 deg C.
The UPS should include battery charging temperature compensation feature
to abapt charging characteristice with temperature.
The contractor should provide full batteries specifications, back up time
calculations tables based on discharge current and watts per cell with
respect to time.
N.

The test to be carried at shall include but necessarily be limited to :1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
a.
b.
Check for anchorage, alignment, grounding, and required clearances.
c.
Verify that fuse sizes and types correspond to drawings.
d.
e.
Clean the unit.
f.
Test all electrical and mechanical interlock systems for correct operation and
sequencing.
g.
Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following
methods:
-
Use of low-resistance ohmmeter in accordance with Section 16120.
Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated

torque-wrench method in accordance with manufacturer's published data or
Table 10.12.
Perform thermographic sarrey.
h.
i.
Check operation of forced ventilation.
j.
2. Electrical Tests
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 11 of 14

16620
FALCON CLINIC
a.
Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a lowresistance ohmmeter, if applicable.
b.
Test static transfer from inverter to bypass and back. Use normal load, if possible.
c.
Set free running frequency of oscillator.
d.
Test dc undervoltage trip level on inverter input breaker. Set according to

manufacturer's published data.
e.
Test alarm circuits.
f.
Verify sync indicators for static switch and bypass switches.
g.
Perform electrical tests for UPS system breakers.
h.
Perform electrical tests for UPS system automatic transfer switches.
i.
Perform electrical tests for UPS system batteries.
3. Test Values
a.
b.
Bolt-torque levels.
c.
Microhm or millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the normal
range as indicated in the manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer's data is
not available, investigate any values which deviate from similar connections by
more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
d.
For breaker performance.
e.
For automatic transfer switch performance.
f.
For batteries.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which UPS is to be installed and notify Architect in
writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Install complete UPS System, including associated control devices as indicated, in

accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of applicable
standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that
installation complies with requirements and serves intended function.
Coordinate with other work as necessary to interface installation of UPS System with
other work.
Page 12 of 14

16620
FALCON CLINIC
3.3
3.4
C.
Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with
equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment
connectors.
D.
Anchor mounting hardware firmly to floors. To ensure enclosures are permanently

and mechanically secured. Provide all hardware and accessories for proper
mounting.
E.
Provide equipment earthing (grounding) connections for UPS System as required.

A.
Upon completion of installation and after circuitry has been energized, demonstrate
capability and compliance of UPS System with requirements. Where possible, correct
malfunctioning units at site then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove
and replace with new units, and retest.
B.
Provide site testing by the manufacturer's field service personnel. Site testing to
consist of a complete test of the UPS System under load and the associated
accessories supplied by the manufacturer. Document the test results, sign and date
for future reference.
PERSONNEL TRAINING
A.
3.5
Building Operating Personnel Training: Train Owner's building personnel in

procedures for starting up, bypassing and operating UPS System. Furnish three
operator's manuals providing installation and operation instructions for each UPS
System.
EQUIPMENT DATA/SHOP DRAWINGS

A.
Equipment data for materials covered under this section shall include but not limited to
the following :
1. Construction and installation details for the U.P.S.
2. Floor plan and top views showing outline dimensions and arrangement of connections.
3. Details of connection of cables to U.P.S.
4. Wiring and schematic diagrams of power, control, relay, metering and similar circuits.
The separate schematic diagrams shall include complete three line diagrams of all
instruments, switches, any other devices in the U.P.S.
5. Handling, installation and assembly drawings.
B.
The equipment data to be provided prior to ordering any material covered by this
section shall include but not limited to the following:
Complete technical data on U.P.S. and other equipment including manufacturer's
catalogues, data on operating characteristics compliance with standards, dimensions
and weights, detailed description ...etc.
3.6
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 13 of 14

16620
FALCON CLINIC
The system supplier is responsible to provide all required switches, auxiliary contacts, relays,
wiring, terminal blocks transducers to provide signaling and metering information for the
central control system and to accept START/STOP, open/close, set point from it.
Relevant signals are listed under controls, BMS and motor control panels drawings and data
schedules.
All signals to the BMS system should be potential free all signals from the BMS will be
potential free to actuate devices of less than 20 VA. @ 240 volt.
In any device will need more than 20 VA. at any operating condition the supplier should add
interposing relays.
All analog measures coming or going to the BMS should be coordinated with the BMS supplier
(either 4-20 MA or 1-5 volt or 0-10 volt).
3.7
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 14 of 14

16620
FALCON CLINIC
SECTION 16625
DIESEL GENERATOR PLANT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
"General requirements", apply to work of this Section.
B.
C.
Testing and commissioning section 16950.
D.
Fuel oil storage tank section 15660.
E.
Fuel oil specification section15661.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.3
complete and make ready for operation, a diesel engine generator set complete with engine generator
batteries, charger, silencer, day tank, generator control panel and all required appurtenances and
accessories. Refer to appropriate section of Specifications and drawings for additional requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacturer of diesel engine generator sets of the
types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not
less than 10 years, and shall be of one manufacturer, approved by the kahramaa, and conform to the
requirements set forth in this specification. Provide diesel engine generator set produced by a
manufacturer listed as an Acceptable Manufacturer in this section.
B.
latest edition, ISO 8528, DIN, VDE, IES, EN, NFPA, NEC, UL, NEMA, ANSI and IEEE Standards
pertaining to diesel generator set.
C.
NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 37, "Installation and Use of
Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines;" NFPA 99, "Standard for Health Care Facilities;"
NFPA 101, "Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures;" "Life Safety Code;" "NFPA
110;" and "Emergency Standby Power Systems".
D.
govern.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 1 of 17

16625
FALCON CLINIC
E.
Service: Manufacturer must have a factory warehouse located within 100 Km of the job site, at which
spare parts are stocked and where a field service engineer who is a full-time employee of the
manufacturer permanently resides, and is a factory trained and qualified individual whose primary duty
is field service.
F.
Equipment Rating: 240/415 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50 hz, 1500 rpm, Kw rating as indicated on the
drawings. At temperature 50C and altitude 300 m and humidity 100%. at 0.8 power factor and
capable of continuous operation at rated output for the duration of any utility power failure up to 24
hours.
Ratings of diesel electric set based on operation of the set at rated generator RPM when equipped
with all necessary operating accessories, such as air cleaners, remote radiator fan, lubricating oil
pump, fuel transfer pump, fuel injection pump, jacket water pump, governor alternating current
generator and exciter. All ratings must be factory certified.
G.
1.4
The same manufacturer is to build, test, and ship the whole system (the engine, generator, and all
major items of auxiliary equipment).
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for diesel engine driven generator sets and components,
including:
1. Drawing of the diesel generator set.
2. The following data in tabulated form:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
Make of engine.
Number of cylinders.
Bore, inches (millimeters).
Stroke, inches (millimeters).
Piston displacement, cubic inches (liters).
Piston speed, feet per minute (meters/min.), at rated RPM.
BMEP at rated KW output.
Make and type of generator.
Generator electrical rating, KVA or KW at .8 power factor.
Number and type of bearings.
Exciter type.
Generator insulation class and temperature rise.
Parts and service support.
Engine manufacturer's certified engine BHP curve and certified generator set fuel
consumption curve.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Batteries and battery charger.

Silencer.
Day tank for ten (10) hours.
Fuel system complete.
Cooling system complete with all details for the remote radiator including all required pipes &
electric fans based on the manufacturer recommendations, electric driven water pumps, etc.
8. Exhaust system.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 2 of 17

16625
FALCON CLINIC
9. All auxiliaries.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings of diesel engine
generator sets.
C.
Submit a certified test report showing serial number of the engine, generator and all accessories
furnished, and actual readings taken during a factory-conducted full load test including the following:
1. Cold start acceleration to rated voltage and frequency within 8 seconds.
2. Full and partial load applications and rejections during the test (at least 2 per hour). Frequency
and voltage stability and transients not to exceed the limits specified herein.
3. 15 minutes 1/4 load, or function warm up, 1/2 hour 1/2 load, 1/2 hour 3/4 load, and 2 hours full
load; Test shall be conducted at .8 power factor.
4. Demonstrate that all applicable safety shutdowns function along with their respective audio and
visual alarms.
D.
A complete set of tools and portable instruments for the operation and equipment shall be provided,
together with suitable means of identification, storage and securing.
E.
Supply with each engine-generator set, a soldered galvanized steel drip pan to be placed
beneath the engine to catch any leakage from the set.
F.
Sound pressure levels for the engine-generator sets must be submitted to the Consultant for
review and accepted by him prior to the units being shipped to the site.
1.5
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.
Obtain all necessary permits prior to delivery.
B.
Delivery and rigging shall be fully coordinated with, and approved by the consultant.
C.
Upon delivery, inspects for physical damage and compare nameplate rating of unit with this
specification.
D.
Prior to installation, engine-generator controls and all associated electrical equipment shall be stored
indoors, fully protected from weather, dust and dirt.
E.
Extreme care shall be exercised to prevent bumping or dropping. All rigging and handling shall be in
full accordance with engine-generator manufacturers' requirements.
Avoid the use of excessive hammering and jarring which would damage the electrical equipment
contained therein.
F.
Do not install damaged equipment, remove from site and replace with new equipment.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 3 of 17

16625
FALCON CLINIC
G.
1.6
Extreme care shall be taken to assure that all equipment is properly secured and braced for any
overland and vertical travel.
EQUIPMENT WARRANTY
A.
1.7
Guarantee equipment furnished under these specifications against defective parts and workmanship
under terms of the manufacturer's and dealer's standard warranties for a period of not less than 1 year
from date of initial start-up and Owner acceptance of the system and include labor and travel time for
necessary repairs at the job site. The system warranty not to be limited by running hours.
SYSTEM SERVICE CONTRACT
A.
The supplier of the diesel engine generator set to provide a service contract for a period of five years
after guarantee period and include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Engine manufacturer's recommended procedures for weekly (biweekly) inspection and
maintenance to be done by user.
2. Quarterly inspection by the supplier personnel to review the weekly maintenance records being
kept by user and train any new Owner operating personnel. Inspection to include scheduled oil
sampling for lube oil contaminants as outlined below. Also include a 100% load test run on the
generator set.
3. Annual inspections to include all of items in above paragraph except run the diesel generator set
under system load.
B.
Scheduled Oil Sampling

1. In order to forecast and minimize engine downtime, the supplier of the equipment must provide
an oil sampling analysis kit which operating personnel can utilize for Schedule Oil Sampling.
2. Scheduled Oil Sampling of the atomic absorption spectrophotometry method and accurate to
within a fraction of one part per million for the following elements:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Iron
Chromium
Copper
Aluminum
Silicon
Lead
3. In addition, test the sample for the presence of water, fuel dilution, and antifreeze.
4. Provide all equipment needed to take oil samples in a kit at the time of acceptance and include
the following:
a. Sample extraction gun (1).
b. Bottle(10).
c. Postage-paid mailers (10).
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 4 of 17

16625
FALCON CLINIC
d. Written instructions (1).

5. Provide immediate notification to the consultant when analysis shows any critical reading. If
readings are normal, provide a report showing that the equipment is operating within established
parameters.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
The Contractor shall supply, install and commission the start of diesel generating set with all
necessary switchgear, control panel and accessories all as either herein specified or shown on the
Drawings.
B.
The size of the set shall be prime rating to the rating shown of the Drawings, when operating at the
specified frequency, voltage, altitude, maximum temperature and humidity.
C.
The Contractor shall be guided by the emergency power room layout details.
D.
The Contractor shall indicate the nearest location from which service facilities and spare parts may be
obtained.
E.
The design of the plant and its installation including all ancillary equipment, shall be such as to
minimize noise and vibration.
F.
All materials, equipment, and parts comprising the units specified herein, shall be new and unused, of
current manufacture and highest grade.
G.
The unit shall be factory assembled, and tested as complete unit by the engine manufacturer. It shall
be inspected and started at the job site by his authorized dealer having a parts and service facility in
the area.
H.
Equipment furnished under this section shall be guaranteed against defective parts or workmanship
under dealer's standard warranty. Warranty period shall in no case be less than one year of
unrestricted service commencing from date of putting the unit into service and not limited to any fours
limitation.
I.
The generator set shall receive the manufacturer's standard factory load testing. Prior to acceptance
of the installation, equipment shall be tested to show it is free of any defects and be subjected to full
load test.
J.
On completion of the installation, start-up shall be performed by a factory-trained dealer service

representative. Operating and maintenance instruction books shall be supplied upon delivery of the
unit and procedures explained to operating personnel.
K.
The bidders shall furnish specifications and Drawings information showing manufacturer's model
numbers, dimensions and weights for the generator set and major auxiliary equipment. Proposed
deviations from the specifications shall be stated in the bid. The successful bidder shall submit copies
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 5 of 17

16625
FALCON CLINIC
of pertinent drawings. and wiring diagrams for approval.

L.
2.2
The diesel generator set should have performance class G2 according to ISO 8528.
OPERATION OF THE SYSTEM
A.
The loss of normal power from the transformer shall manually cause the generating set to start.
B.
The generating set shall be designed so that it will come up to steady full speed from cold condition
within 10 seconds of the "start" impulse. It shall then be capable of accepting 100% of its power rating
load under power factor variations of 0.8 to unity lagging with maximum transient voltage over or
under 5-7 % maximum transient frequency variation of + 5% with steady frequency + 1/2% of nominal
(within 5 sec's).
Should the Diesel engine fail to start in 10 seconds following the "start" impulse, it shall come to rest
for 10 seconds. Two further attempts shall be manually performed with intermediate periods of rest.
Should the set not start after three attempts, an alarm shall sound and signal "start failure" shall
illuminate.
C.
2.3
EQUIPMENT
A.
2.4
It shall be possible to operate the set manually for testing and normal operation purposes. For this
purpose the set shall be provided with a duty selector switch arranged for OFF/TEST/MANUAL.
GENERAL
1.
The engine-generator set shall be a complete package unit mounted on rigid base suitable for
skidding.
2.
The design of the set shall allow the easy replacement of major items subject to wear.
3.
A flexible coupling shall be fitted between the engine and generator to provide the drive and
absorb the transmission of shock loads, and shall be completely shielded by a coupling ring and
adequate steel guards.
4.
Complete protection from machine vibration is required for the building and all instrumentation
and control equipment, including engine-mounted instruments. This may be achieved either by
mounting the combined engine/generator unit to a separate sub- frame resiliently mounted on
the main frame, or by mounting the entire main frame on anti-vibration mountings, and securing
the machine instrument panel by its own resilient mounting. The machine instrument panel by
its own resilient mounting. The mountings employed, method of mounting and floor structure
and thickness shall be approved by the manufacturer and the Engineer.
DIESEL ENGINE
The engine shall be of the direct injection four stroke, even number of cylinders dual turbo-charged and
after cooled and not series turbocharged. It shall operate on diesel fuel oil at 1500 R.P.M. The net
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 6 of 17

16625
FALCON CLINIC
power rating of the engine under worst site conditions shall be such as to deliver the net electric power
indicated on the generator taking into consideration generator efficiency.
The engine shall be of the water-cooled, heavy-duty remote radiator type cooled by a heavy-duty fan. A
fan coil and hand protection guard shall be fitted. Coolant temperature shall be measured and
controlled by means of one or more thermostats.
The lubricating oil system shall be of the full pressure circulating type, complete with full flow lubricating
oil filters with replaceable elements and a lubricating oil heat exchanger. Filter system shall be equipped
with a spring loaded by-pass valve as an insurance against stoppage of lubricating oil circulation in the
event the filters become clogged.
Adequate inspection openings per cylinder to provide quick access and inspection of camshafts and
connecting rod.
The fuel system shall be complete and shall be capable of supplying the engine by gravity from a day
fuel tank. It shall be equipped with easily replaceable fuel filter elements. The fuel system shall be
equipped with a built in, gear type, engine driven fuel transfer pump, capable of lifting fuel against a
head of 250 cms. for supplying fuel through the filters to the injection pump at constant pressure.
The exhaust system shall be insulated complete with dry type exhaust manifold with flanges, flexible
exhaust expansion connections, exhaust pipes and a residential exhaust silencer which shall be fitted
with a drain plug at its lower end to permit evacuation of condensed humidity. The exhaust piping shall
be insulated with calcium cilecate tape with a total thickness not below 50 mm. The size of exhaust pipe
should be calculated and determined according to the back pressure limitations as specified by the
manufacturer.
The electric starting of the engine shall be possible manually by means of push button. The starting
system shall consist of a 24 volts d.c. Starter motor, heavy duty 24 volts long life lead-acid battery and a
suitable automatic trickle battery charger.
Batteries shall be enclosed in enameled steel, corrosion resistant. ventilated, totally enclosed enclosure
complete with drip shield. Enclosure shall also be complete with hydrometer, syringe, jumper cables
and mounting bracket for accessories. Enclosure shall he free standing, floor mounted.
An isochronous electronic type engine governor with speed control and droop adjustments shall be
provided and shall be capable of providing accurate speed control within 1% of the rated speed.
An automatic shut-down protective system with signaling lights shall be provided to shut down the
engine in the event of engine overspeed, low lubricating oil pressure, and high cooling water
temperature.
Complete shut down system shall be arranged to energize an alarm system located within the engine
room and to trip the respective generator circuit-breaker.
The following engine mounted instruments shall be provided :
1. Water temperature gauge calibrated in C
2. Lubricating oil temperature gauge calibrated in C
3. Lubricating oil pressure gauge.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 7 of 17

16625
FALCON CLINIC
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.5
Tachometer.
Operating time meter.
Oil filter differential.
Jacket water temperature.
Fuel pressure.
GENERATOR
A.
The generator shall be of drip VDE 0530 proof construction, in accordance with screen protected,
revolving field, brush less type with adaptor and flexible coupling for direct connection to the engine at
the flywheel end.
Required Generator Characteristics
1.
Type
Brushless with salient pole field system incorporating rotating exciter

and three phase rectifier system.
2.
No. of phases
Three with 4 terminals
3.
Voltage
415 Y/240 Volts.
4.
Winding connection
Star with grounded neutral
5.
Net rated output
As indicated on the drawings @ 50 C ambient temperature.
6.
Power factor
0.8 lagging.
7.
Frequency
50 Hz.
8.
Insulation
Class "H" stator, class "H" rotor with temperature rise according to class
F 105 C over 40 C ambient temperature.
B.
The exciter shall be of the static type with a digital voltage regulator forming an integral part of the
alternator.
C.
Overall voltage regulation from no load to full load, including hot to cold, variations and load power
factor between 0.8 lagging and unity shall be within + 0.5% of nominal voltage.
Voltage buildup shall be in a positive and rapid manner even when the machine is connected to its
load circuit.
The line to line voltage wave form shall be at least to the requirements of VDE 0530 (less than 5%
deviation. The total harmonics content shall not exceed 3%.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 8 of 17

16625
FALCON CLINIC
D.
Radio interference suppression shall be at least according to degree "N" of VDE 0875 or equivalent.
E.
A panel mounted switch shall stop the engine in the STOP position, start and run the engine in the
RUN position.
1. The control shall include a cycle cranking function. The cranking cycle, nonadjustable, shall
consist of an automatic crank period of approximately 10 seconds duration followed by a rest
period of approximately 10 seconds duration. Cranking shall cease upon engine starting and
running. Two means of cranking termination shall be provided, one as backup to the other.
Failure to start after three cranking cycles shall shut down and lockout the engine, and visually
indicate an over crank shutdown on the panel.
2. The control shall shut down and lock out the engine upon; failing to start after the specified time
(over crank), overspeed, low, lubricating oil pressure, high engine temperature, or operation of
a remote manual stop station.
3. The generator control panel shall have degree of protection IP 44.
4. The control shall provide a twelve light engine monitor on the control panel; one red light for
each of the four shut downs and one yellow light each for the high engine temperature and low
engine oil pressure pre-alarms, and one green run light. The control panel monitor shall
include; a flashing red light to indicate the generator set is not in automatic start mode, a yellow
light to indicate low coolant temperature, a yellow light to indicate low fuel, and two red lights for
auxiliary use (for a total of twelve).
A panel mounted switch shall reset the engine monitor and test all the lamps. The enginegenerator set starting battery(ies) shall power the monitor. Operation of shut down circuits shall
be independent of indication and pre-alarm circuits. A common alarm contact for external
connection to an audible alarm shall be provided.
5. Provide a low coolant level shutdown, which shall be indicated as a high engine temperature
fault.
6. Control panel shall be mounted on the generator set with vibration isolators or wall mounted
type. The control shall include surge suppression for protection of solid state components. A
front control panel illumination lamp with On/Off switch shall be provided. Control panel
mounted indicating meters and devices shall include: Engine Oil Pressure Gauge, Coolant
Temperature Gauge, DC Voltmeter, and Running Time Meter (hours); Voltage adjusting
rheostat, locking screwdriver type, to adjust voltage +/- 5% from rated value; Analog AC
Voltmeter scale 0-500 V dual range, 90 degree scale, 2% accuracy; Analog AC Ammeter, dual
range, 90 degree scale, 2% accuracy; Analog Frequency meter, 45-65 Hz, 90 degree scale, +/0.6 Hz accuracy; Seven position phase selector switch with OFF position to allow meter display
of current and voltage in each generator phase.
7. Provide exerciser clock (2-week type) to automatically start the generator for 30 minutes.
2.6
FUEL SYSTEM
The generator shall be provided with a fuel system as indicated in mechanical specification.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 9 of 17

16625
FALCON CLINIC
2.7
BATTERY TRICKLE CHARGER

A.
2.8
A battery trickle charger mounted on the wall and shall be supplied with the generator in order to
maintain the two battery sets in good condition. It shall be fitted with on-off switch indicator light,
input and output fuses and reverse current protection. Upon operation of the standby plant the charger
shall be disconnected from the battery and from the mains. An ammeter to indicate rate of charger
and battery voltmeter shall be fitted for each set of batteries.
ENGINE GENERATOR SUPPORT AND ISOLATION SYSTEM
A.
Equip the engine and generator set with a suitable common steel base for mounting the
engine-generator unit on a concrete foundation.
B.
Spring Isolators: Freestanding and laterally stable rated for seismic areas with housings that include
vertical resilient limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is removed; the isolators complete
with neoprene acoustical friction pads between the baseplate and supports.
C.
All mounting leveling bolts rigidly bolted to the equipment; spring diameters no less than 0.8 of the
compressed height of the spring at rated load; springs to have a minimum additional travel to solid
equal to 50% of the rated deflection.
D.
Provide a minimum of six Mason type 'SLR' rated deflection 5 cm, 2431 kg load spring mount and six
No. Z1225, 2268 kg "all-directional seismic snubber." Prior to installation, approved manufacturer
shall submit installation drawing for approval.
2.9
MISCELLANEOUS
A.
The Contractor shall calculate the reinforced concrete foundation block to support the generating set.
Calculation and detailed drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
B.
The Contractor shall supply and install all piping cabling and other required accessories and items for
a complete generating set.
C.
The Contractor shall supply all the required standard and special tools for routine maintenance and
normal over hauls, in suitable cupboard.
D.
The spare parts required for normal operation during 1500 operation shall be supplied with the set,
and placed in a suitable cupboard. Priced spare part list shall be supplied with the Tender.
Manuals and Technical literature required for operation maintenance and overhaul shall be supplied in
English in 3 copies.
2.10
A.
EQUIPMENT DATA/SHOP DRAWINGS

The equipment data to be provided by the Contractor prior to ordering any material covered by this
sub-division shall include but not be limited to :
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 10 of 17

16625
FALCON CLINIC
Complete technical data on diesel engine, includes operating characteristics, site rating, fuel and
lubricating consumption, manufacturer's catalogue cuts, dimensions and weights, etc.
B.
Detailed description of all components of the engine: starting system, super charge, governor,
injector, air, fuel and lubricating filters etc.. with manufacturers catalogue cuts and operating
characteristics.
Detailed description of all auxiliaries : batteries and charger, fuel day tank, exhaust pipe and
silencer.
Detailed description of engine control, instruments protection, alarms and cut offs, etc.
Complete technical data on generator and excitation: standards to which it complies, type of
insulation, system of cooling system of excitation voltage regulation, etc.. with manufacturer's
catalogue cuts.
List of standard and special tools supplied for routine and major overhauls.
List of spare parts for 1500 hours operation.
Operator's manuals, maintenance book and drawings.
The Contractor's shop/construction drawings for installation covered by this sub-division shall include
but not be limited to:
Complete drawings of the generating plant in the particular location of the project, with indication of
all components, piping exhaust pipes, power and control cabling, etc.
2.11
Construction drawings of the foundation block with indication of holes for anchoring bolts.
Schematic diagram for power and control wiring.
Complete lay-out drawings of piping.
Shop drawings for all supports, frames, louvers plates.
Plans and elevations of control panels.

The tests to be carried out shall include but not necessarily be limited to:-
A.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010

Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.
Prior to cleaning the unit, perform as-found tests.
Clean the unit.
Page 11 of 17

16625
FALCON CLINIC
6.
7.
B.
Sets shall be available for visual inspection at works by the consultant before loading
for despatch to site.
Sets shall be available at works for noise level tests to be made by the consultant
before loading for despatch to site.
Electrical and Mechanical Tests

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Perform an insulation-resistance test on generator winding with respect to ground in

accordance with ANSI/IEEE Standard 43.
Calculate polarization index.
Test protective relay devices.
Functionally test engine shutdown for low oil pressure, overtemperature, overspeed,
and other protection features as applicable.
Perform vibration test for each main bearing cap.
Conduct performance test in accordance with ANSI/NFPA Standard 110.
Verify correct functioning of governor and regulator.
C. Test Values
1.
2.
3.
2.12
Polarization index values shall be in accordance with ANSI/IEEE Standard 43.

Vibration levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published data and
compared to baseline data.
Performance tests shall conform to manufacturer's published data and ANSI/NFPA
Standard 110.
GENERATOR PROTECTION
A.
The generator shall be protected against all types of excess current that will damage the generator
electrical system.
B.
Earth leakage protection shall be provided where required by means of a 'core balance' residual
current device. The restricted earth fault protection level shall be capable of being varied over the
range 0.3 amps to 10 amps. This protection shall be capable to be activated or not to be activated
when required.
C.
The Contractor shall provide all auxiliary equipment necessary for monitoring the electrical parameters
utilized in the protection systems.
2.13
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 12 of 17

16625
FALCON CLINIC
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
3.2
Examine conditions under which diesel engine-driven generator sets are to be installed and notify
Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the
INSTALLATION
A.
Install diesel engine-driven generator set as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written
B.
Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of engine-generator equipment work with other work.
C.
Lift generator using eyes and other devices provided by the manufacturer.
D.
E.
Align shafts of engine and generator within tolerances recommended by engine-generator unit
manufacturer.
F.
Provide break glass station to shut down engine generator set.
G.
Provide equipment grounding connections for diesel engine-driven generator units as required.
H.
Install diesel fuel piping from diesel engine to day tank.
3.3

A.
Upon completion of installation of diesel engine generator set, test and inspect system to ensure
compliance with requirements. When possible, field correct malfunctioning equipment, then retest to
demonstrate compliance. Replace equipment which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.
B.
At the construction site, provide the services of a competent, factory trained engineer or technician
employed by the manufacturer of the diesel engine generator set to technically supervise and
participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the set and major auxiliaries.
Make adjustments and test in the presence of the Owner.
C.
Provide start-up and load test in accordance with NFPA 110 and include the following:
1.
A minimum of 3800 liters of fuel oil for testing.
2.
Record room temperature and time of beginning of test.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 13 of 17

16625
FALCON CLINIC
D.
3.
Start the unit and record the number of seconds it takes the unit to get it started.
4.
Record voltage readings on all phases and also running hour meter reading RPM and frequency
meter reading. Use a hand tachometer to check RPM against frequency meter reading.
5.
Provide load banks for full load rating of generator to test all systems on generator for minimum of
4 hours.
Mechanical Examination
1.
Check engine fuel system and water cooling system for possible leaks during the load test. If any
fuel or water leaks are observed, stop the unit and tighten or replace the leaking item as required,
and restart the load test. It is necessary that the unit run for 2 hours at full load without any leaks
or excessive water temperature, low oil pressure, etc., before acceptance.
2.
Deliberately speed up the engine by misadjusting the governor and record the speed at which the
engine automatically shuts down.
3.
Simulate low oil pressure by shorting the contacts of the oil pressure relay, to test for automatic
engine shutdown on low oil pressure.
4.
Simulate high water temperature by shorting the contacts of the water temperature relay to test for
automatic engine shutdown on high water temperature.
5.
With engine running under load, during the last half hour of the 2-hour test, measure room and
outdoor ambient temperatures. Room temperature not to exceed the motor-generator
manufacturer's limit for room temperature with outdoor air temperatures at 45 oC design day.
The Contractor to submit this data to the motor-generator manufacturer for computation of
equivalent room temperature based upon 45oC day operation. Manufacturer to certify that room
temperature data is consistent with manufacturer's recommended operating limits for a 35oC
design day.
3.4
3.5
INSTRUCTION AND FINAL INSPECTIONS

A.
Laminate or mount under Plexiglas a set of operating instructions for the system and install
instructions within a frame mounted on the wall near the diesel engine-generator set.
B.
Furnish the services of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician for five 5-hours periods for
instructing personnel in operation and maintenance of the equipment, on the dates requested by the
Owner.
C.
Contractor to furnish 5 copies of operating, maintenance and diagnostic instructions and parts list, and
illustrated parts books covering the engine-generator and auxiliary equipment which will require
operating instructions and periodic maintenance.
D.
Supply one complete set of spare oil, fuel and air filters plus one set of lamps and fuses.
PERSONNEL TRAINING
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 14 of 17

16625
FALCON CLINIC
A.
3.6
Building Operating Personnel Training: Train Owner's building personnel in procedures for starting up,
testing and operating stand-by generators and auxiliary equipment. Furnish three operator's manual
providing installation and operating instructions for each generator.
DIESEL GENERATOR: SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL TESTING/COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
In addition to the acceptance and type of tests carried out at the manufacturer's works, the following
testing/commissioning procedures shall be carried out:
B.
At the manufacturers works
All testing to the satisfaction of the Owner's consultant shall be carried out as follows:
Heat Run
50% for hour + 75% for hour..
2 hours full load.
1.
Recorded hourly readings of speed, oil pressure, oil temperature, water temperature, fuel
consumption, battery charge rate and voltage, generator voltage, load current, kilowatt output,
frequency and power factor, generator temperature rise when connected to a resistive/reactive
load to produce 0.8 power factor.
2.
Demonstration of voltage regulations at set point of 415V from full load to no load to full load,
including transient variation and response time.
3.
Demonstration of speed/frequency regulation under conditions of 2 above.
4.
Cold start, 3 attempts and lockout on set fail.
5.
Cold start, run up and on full load time.
6.
Demonstration of accuracy of all metering using standard test meters.
7.
Demonstration of operation and setting of all protective relays and timing devices.
8.
Demonstration of full sequential operation.
9.
Demonstration of all alarm and indication.
10. Temperature rises on generator starter/rotor.

11. Installation resistance of generator bed plate wiring and controls.
Records of all tests shall be made in appropriate test folders and initialled by the Contractor and
Owner's Consultant. These shall be photocopied and 3 No sets provided under the contract.
The Contractor shall provide 14 days notice of tests to the Owner's consultant and shall allow
witnessing of tests by the Owner's consultant.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 15 of 17

16625
FALCON CLINIC
C.
On Site After Installation

The Contractor shall provide all necessary labor, instruments, tools, fuel, lubricating oil and test loads
for commissioning tests.
The tests specified below shall be carried out by Contractor in the present of the Owner's consultant.
The Contractor shall carry out the following:
1.
Check that the base is levelled in all directions, that engine and generator shafts are in proper
alignment and that the vibration absorbing devices are properly installed and located.
2.
Check water and sum oil levels.
3.
Check the battery and terminal connections.
4.
Check that the types and grades of fuel and oil are as recommended for the unit.
5.
Fill the main and daily service tank with the correct amount and grade of diesel fuel oil.
6.
Check that engine block water drain points are free from sludge and other blockages.
7.
Check engine bolts, main drive couplings, valve clearances, fuel pump settings, governor settings,
pipeline connections, water hose, exhaust coupling, flexible pipe work, etc.
8.
Check all connections on the alternator and at the control panel. All lugs for principal connections
shall have clean and bright contact surfaces. A suitable abrasive material shall be used where
necessary.
9.
Check access panels and doors for proper opening and closing and for the functioning of any
interlocks fitted.
10. Check all signal and control circuits for correct operation.
11. Measure the resistance of stator, rotor, and exciter windings and ensure that this is not less than
the Specialist Supplier's figures.
12. Start the engine by means of the 'start' push button and allow it to run up to normal speed. Check
that during the time the engine starter motor is in operation, the mains battery charger is
automatically switched off
13. Check instruments and gauges for normal operation and response and check that the generator
voltage is being maintained within the prescribed limits, making due allowance for no-load
conditions. Compare the reading of the frequency meter with that of the engine tachometer.
14. Stop engine after 30 minutes. Check water and oil levels.
15. Restart set and run at various loads for periods as mentioned below. Check the voltage and
current in each phase in turn and that the voltage and frequency are being maintained with the
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 16 of 17

16625
FALCON CLINIC
required limits with large alterations of load. Note the rate of charge on the alternator ammeter with
the engine stopped. Check against specialist rates in necessary.
16. Check the operation of the turbo-charger unit and the colour of the exhaust gas at various loads.
17. Check that all the engine safeguards operate satisfactorily.
18. Check the vibration absorbing devices for proper operation and that the performance of all flexible
connections, both mechanical and electrical are satisfactory.
19. Check the effectiveness of the radio suppression.
20. Check the temperature rise in the alternator.
21. Check the operation of all auxiliary fans, motors, pumps, float switches etc, and their associated
switching control gear.
When all tests are satisfactory and agreed with the Owner's consultant, the lubricating oil be finally
checked, the fuel oil tank replenished and the set left in normal operating order.
When installation of the set and control panel is complete and the installation has been
commissioned, they shall be subjected to load tests as follows:
i) 50% load for hour.
ii) 75% load for hour.
iii) 100% load for 2 hours.
Sound level readings in the following areas to establish compliance with 70 dB at :
i)
ii)
1m from generator set room.

1m from exhaust outlet pipe.
The contractor is responsible to determine exactly what type of silencers, air - inlet louvers and air outlet louvers will be used to reach the above mentioned sound level readings.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 17 of 17

16625
FALCON CLINIC
SECTION 16722
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division-1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section.
B. General Provisions for electrical work, section 16010, applies to work of this section.
C. The requirements of this section apply to Life Safety Systems specified elsewhere in the
specification; coordinate with Division 15 for interface with mechanical systems.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work includes a complete fire alarm system in the building and providing all materials, equipment,
accessories, services and tests necessary to furnish and install intelligent, Addressable Fire Alarm
& Voice Evacuation System of the zoned, non-coded, fully integrated and field programmable
system, Signaling (loudspeakers and strobe light), electrically supervised type. Provide supervised
wiring, all operations and hardware shall be as described herein, shown on plans and riser
diagrams.
B. The system shall consist of but not limited to the following :
1. Main Fire Alarm Control Panel (MFACP).
2. System printer at the MFACP
3. Telephone line modem.
4. Fire brigade interconnection (Emergency voice dialer).
5. Color Graphic Display and keyboard at the fire command center at the Ground floor Level.
6. Power Supplies.
7. Addressable intelligent fire alarm manual stations.
8. Addressable intelligent area multi-sensor detectors.
9. Addressable intelligent duct smoke detectors.
10. Addressable intelligent rate of raise / fixed temperature heat detectors.
11. Addressable intelligent heat detectors fixed temperature at (900C).
12. Addressable intelligent Flame detector.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 1 of 25

16722
FALCON CLINIC
13. Addressable intelligent carbon monoxide detectors.

14. Fault isolator modules (one module shall be added in the fire alarm loop, each 20 devices).
15. Voice control panel.
16. Preamplifiers, line amplifiers and power amplifiers
17. Tone generators.
18. Pre-recorded messages units.
19. Master paging microphone.
20. Voice / alarm tone evacuation loudspeakers.
21. Voice / alarm tone evacuation loudspeakers with strobe light.
22. Voice / alarm tone evacuation horn speakers with strobe light, weather proof type.
23. Master telephone handset with telephone selectors and indicators.
24. Fireman's telephone stations with break glass.
25. Sprinkler water flow switch alarm (Switches wired by this Contractor).
26. Sprinkler valve tamper switch monitoring (Switches wired by this Contractor).
27. Fire pumps monitoring and alarm (Power failure, phase reversal, pump running).
28. Interface with low water level inside fire water tanks.
29. Emergency Diesel Generators monitoring (Diesel generator running and generator failure to
start)
30. Addressable intelligent monitor modules (for water flow and tamper switches and other
non-addressable initiating devices).
31. Addressable intelligent Control modules.
32. Elevator recall and alternate recall control and relays.
33. Central station operation.
34. Interface with HVAC system (Supply fans, Exhaust fans, pressurization fans, smoke fans, Air
Handling Units and smoke dampers).
35. Software interface with Building Management System.
36. Interface with all fire fighting control panels (Alarm & Fault).
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 2 of 25

16722
FALCON CLINIC
37. Interface with the Public Address System to mute the Sound in the alarmed zones in case of
fire.
38. Visual monitoring / status of all controlled items at the MFACP.
39. Complete Network (Conduits and Cables).
40. Approved fused cut-out panels.
41. Battery and battery / inverter (UPS) back-up operation to maintain the operation of all fire
alarm and voice evacuation system components (All fire alarm control panels and their
components, voice evacuation panels and their power amplifiers, master telephone station &
controls, color graphic station, printer, satellite and repeater panels, remote power
supplies,etc.) in case of power outage.
C. The Contractor shall be fully responsible to provide all needed approvals from the Civil Defence
Authority.
D. The fire alarm system is to be installed for addressable initiating and control circuits with hard-wired
signaling (loudspeakers / strobe light) circuits utilizing conduit, tubing and wire serving all peripheral
devices such as manual stations, smoke detectors, heat detectors and water flow switches, etc.
E. Obtain and deliver a final certificate of approval to the Owner from the Fire Department for all fire
alarm and voice evacuation works under this contract.
F. It is the responsibility of this Contractor to produce all written requests to the Fire Department for
inspections of the fire alarm system and associated equipment.
G. Written requests to be produced in a fashion to ensure inspection when equipment is fully
operational in accordance with this specification, codes & regulations. Contractor to gain final
approval in an expedient manner and not to delay the obtainment of a Certificate of Occupancy for
this location.
H. Contractor to be responsible for testing all the fire alarm & voice evacuation equipment as per the
system manufacturer's recommendations after completion of work and prior to any inspection with
written report given as proof of condition of the system. All system devices and their circuits to be in
first class operating condition after completion of work.
I.
Acoustic Simulation shall be provided for the performance of the voice evacuation ensuring
excellent Sound Pressure Level & Intelligibility, Contractor shall be fully responsible to provide all
needed materials & treatments to meet the specified performance.
J.
Wiring
1. All fire alarm system equipment and wiring must be installed in conformance with the Local Civil
Defence Regulation and as per NFPA 70 recommendations.
2. All low voltage wiring for the fire alarm & voice evacuation system shall be installed in true
Class 'A' form with the 'return' portion of the circuit home run in separate piping. Class 'A'
return for more than one circuit may be contained in a common pipe. Class 'A' return pipe(s)
must be labeled as such with lettering, directional arrows or other method to differentiate it from
the other circuit pipes.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 3 of 25

16722
FALCON CLINIC
3. Loudspeakers to be connected in a Class 'B' format. Each signaling circuit to be provided with
individual over current protection so that a short on one signaling device will not affect any
other signaling circuit. At least two circuit to be provided per floor per building.
4. At least two supervised Class 'B' evacuation speaker / strobe circuit to be provided for each
floor per building.
5. All of the fire alarm & voice evacuation system cables and all related interfaces shall be MICC
Cables for exposed installations and Fire Resistant Cables according to BS: 6387 Categories
C, W & Z run in conduits for embedded installations.
K. All of the fire alarm & voice evacuation system components shall be U.L. listed by one manufacturer
and to be approved by the local civil defence authority.
L. After the completion of the installation of the Fire Alarm & Voice Evacuation System, this Contractor
shall perform a complete demonstration test of all systems and devices to the satisfaction of the
Owner and their consulting engineer and as requested by the civil defence authority.
M. Complete Test shall be provided for the performance of the voice evacuation system specially at
the Mall floor, complete acoustic measurements shall be performed by the contractor.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fire alarm and voice evacuation
equipment of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
services for not less than 10 years. Provide fire alarm and voice evacuation system equipment
produced by a manufacturer listed as an Acceptable Manufacturer. Unless submitted components
are U.L. listed in the name of the organization a "manufacturer" will not be considered.
B. Standards Compliance: comply with requirements of all applicable local codes, NEC, U.L., NFPA,
and NEMA Standards pertaining to Fire Alarm & Voice Evacuation Systems.
C. The following standards are to be included and recognized as a part of the specification for
performance and quality of installation and equipment:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Qatar Local Codes & Regulations.

NFPA 70 : National Electrical Code.
NFPA 72 : National Fire Alarm Code.
NFPA 92A : Recommended Practice for smoke control Systems.
NFPA 101 : Life Safety Code.
govern.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
List of all types of equipment and components provided including model numbers, mounting
accessories and quantities.
B.
Complete Data Sheets & original Catalogues for all of the proposed equipment & Cables.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 4 of 25

16722
FALCON CLINIC
C.
Description of operation of the system as described herein, to include all exceptions, variances or
substitutions listed at the time of bid.
D.
Calculations to support size of standby batteries, manufacturer's printed product data, catalog cuts
and description of any special installation procedures.
E.
Proposed zone list with description of zones (alarm, monitor) as they would appear on the FACP.
F.
Provide shop drawings as follows:
1.
1:25 scale drawing of Fire Alarm Control Panels and fire command station.
2.
1:50 scale floor plan showing equipment locations, drawings and raceway runs.
3. Fan start / shut-down, automatic and manual control wiring details. Coordinate with Mechanical
Specifications.
4. Complete riser diagrams showing all equipment and size, type and number of all conductors
and conduits and this interface with all other systems..
5.
1.5
Peripheral device connection details showing all modules and devices wiring details.
G.
Provide a fan schedule indicating all fans & Air Handling Units that will be start up / shut down
under automatic smoke control operations and fans that will have manual override from MFACP
including any purge fans, schedule to indicate all of the the related control and monitor modules.
H.
Provide samples of various items, when requested.
I.
Compliance list: submit a detailed point by point compliance statement with this specification.
Where the proposed system does not comply or accomplish the stated function or specification in a
manner different from that described and specified, a full description of the deviation shall be
provided.
J.
Acoustic Simulation Study: Contractor to submit detailed acoustic simulation study for the sound
performance inside the mall areas, simulation to be by one of the latest advanced acoustic
simulation programs (EASE or CATT ACOUSTIC).
K.
Amplifier sizes and point capacity Calculations.
L.
Voltage Drop Calculation for all of the DC Lines.
OPERATION
A. Activation of any manual pull station, heat detector, return duct smoke detector, area multi-sensor
detector, flame detector, or sprinkler water flow switch, to provide the following automatic operations:
1. Sound a pulsing audible signal at the Fire Alarm Control Panels. Pressing the alarm
acknowledge key on the Fire Alarm Control Panel shall silence the audible signal during the
alarm condition. Subsequent alarm conditions shall again sound the audible signal.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 5 of 25

16722
FALCON CLINIC
2. Flash the general alarm LED indicator on the Fire Alarm Control Panels. Pressing the alarm
acknowledge key on the fire alarm control panel shall continuously light the general alarm LED
indicator during the alarm condition. Subsequent alarm conditions shall again flash the general
alarm LED indicator.
3. Display a general alarm indication and system status summary (numbers of alarm, supervisory
and/or trouble conditions) on the Fire Alarm Control Panel Liquid Crystal Display (LCD).
Pressing the alarm acknowledge key shall display, for 30 seconds, the individual device
display, to include the "alarm" status and custom label (up to 40 characters and spaces) for the
addressable device reporting the alarm condition. At the end of the 30 second period, the
general alarm indication and system status summary shall again be displayed.
The individual device display may be recalled at any time by repressing the alarm acknowledge
key or until the alarm condition is reset to normal.
4. Enter the custom label for the device reporting the alarm condition with time and date of
occurrence into the fire alarm control panels historical alarm log for future recall.
5. Sound the slow whoop alarm signal throughout the Alarmed Zone. The alarm signals may be
silenced during the alarm condition by operation of the Fire Alarm Control Panel alarm silence
switch. Subsequent alarm conditions shall initiate the strobe light.
6. Automatically initiate a pre-recorded message of the voice control panel to the alarmed zones.
7. Flash all alarm strobe lights throughout the Alarmed Zone. The alarm strobe lights may be
turned off during the alarm condition by operation of the Fire Alarm Control Panel alarm silence
switch. Subsequent alarm conditions shall again turn on the alarm strobe lights.
8. Automatically shut down all supply and return / exhaust fans of air recirculation system serving
the aera in alarm, Activate the Stair Pressurization fans and Smoke Fans. Give visual status of
fan(s) at the Main Fire Alarm Control Panel.
Automatically give control signal (via control modules) to all Related HVAC fire smoke dampers.
Exact sequence of operation for all of the HHVAC Equipment shall be as per mechanical
specification and as per the Cause & Effect Matrix which shall be prepared by the contractor at
the construction phase.
9. Recall all automatic elevators to the ground/entry level or alternate level if designated by the
local authorities.
10. Automatically Give Control Signal (Via Control Modules) to mute the Public Address System in
the Alarmed Zones.
11. Send an alarm signal to a Central Station monitoring facility to dispatch the Fire Department.
12. Activate the Color Graphic Station to automatically show in graphics the alarm activation and to
include the time and date and custom label for the device reporting the alarm condition.
13. Activate the remote printer to printout a hard copy record of the alarm activation to include the
time and date and custom label for the device reporting the alarm condition.
B. System Supervisory Operation for Off/Normal Conditions
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 6 of 25

16722
FALCON CLINIC
1. The following equipment or devices associated with the fire alarm & voice evacuation system
shall be supervised for normal and off / normal conditions :
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Sprinkler valve tamper switches.

Fire pump power failure and phase reversal.
Emergency generator running and failure to start.
Level inside Fire Water Tank is less than the threshold.
Level inside Fuel Tank is less than the threshold.
2. Activation of any items in B.1 above to automatically:

a.
Sound an audible signal at the Fire Alarm Control Panels. Pressing the supervisory
acknowledge key on the Fire Alarm Control Panel shall silence the audible signal during
the off/normal condition. Subsequent off/normal conditions shall resound the audible
signal.
b.
Flash the general supervisory service LED indicator on the Fire Alarm Control Panels.
Pressing the supervisory acknowledge key on the Fire Alarm Control Panel shall
continuously light the general supervisory service LED indicator during the off/normal
condition. Subsequent off/normal conditions shall again flash the general supervisory LED
indicator.
Display a general supervisory indication and system status summary (numbers of alarm,
supervisory and/or trouble conditions) on the Fire Alarm Control Panels Liquid Crystal
Display (LCD). Pressing the supervisory acknowledge key shall display, for 30 seconds,
the individual device display, to include the "off/normal" status and custom label (up to 40
characters and spaces) for the supervisory device reporting the off/normal condition.
c.
At the end of the 30 second period, the general supervisory indication and system status
summary shall again be displayed. The individual device display may be recalled at any
time by repressing the supervisory acknowledge key or until the off/normal condition is
restored to normal.
d.
Enter the custom label for the device reporting the off/normal condition with time and date
of occurrence into the Fire Alarm Control Panel historical trouble log for future recall.
e.
Activate the Color Graphic Display to automatically show the off/normal activation to
include the time and date and custom label for the device reporting the off/normal
condition.
f.
Activate the printer to printout a hard copy record of the off/normal activation to include
the time and date and custom label for the device reporting the off/normal condition.
C. Warden telephone communication (two-way) from the fire command center

1. Lifting a telephone handset from its cradle to automatically :
a.
b.
Sound an audible signal at the Fire Command Station.

Flash the individual telephone "call/select" LED indicator for the calling- in circuit at the
Fire Command Center.
2. Connecting the call, by operating the appropriate telephone line "call- connect" switch, at the
Fire Command Center shall automatically :
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 7 of 25

16722
FALCON CLINIC
a.
b.
c.
Light the "call-connect" switch's built-in "operated" indicator lamp.

Silence the audible call-in signal.
Connect the appropriate Fire-fighter telephone circuit to the Fire Command Center master
telephone for talking.
3. Operating additional Fire-fighter telephone line select switches, at the Fire Command Center
shall automatically :
a.
Permit Fire-fighter telephone to talk to other Fire-fighter telephone locations via a patch in
the telephone network, controlled at Fire Command Center. Up to five Fire-fighter
telephone may be operated simultaneously.
4. Fire-fighter telephone stations to be capable of making announcements over alarm speaker

circuits via a "patch" circuit and speaker circuit control switches, controlled at the Fire
Command Center.
D. Trouble Conditions
1. Fire Alarm & Voice Evacuation System to be electrically supervised to automatically detect and
report any trouble condition as follows:
a.
b.
The fire alarm system wiring (except control wiring between fans and their addressable
control modules) shall be electrically supervised to automatically detect and report trouble
conditions to the Main Fire Alarm Control Panel.
Any opens or grounds on Monitor Addressable Module alarm initiating, supervisory or
status monitoring circuit wiring and any opens, grounds or shorts across addressable data
communications, alarm signal or alarm light wiring shall initiate a system trouble condition.
c.
System addressable devices shall be supervised for placement and normal operation.
Removal of an addressable device or the failure of its internal electronic circuitry shall
initiate a system trouble condition.
d.
Operation of the central station agency alarm disconnect switch or any manual control
commands that alter the system from its normal programmed standby configuration shall
initiate a trouble condition.
2. Trouble conditions shall automatically:

a.
Sound an audible signal at the Fire Alarm Control Panels. Pressing the trouble
acknowledge key on the Fire Alarm Control Panel shall silence the audible signal during
the trouble condition. Subsequent trouble conditions shall resound the audible signal. The
audible trouble signal shall also resound at programmable time intervals to remind the
system operator that the trouble condition(s) still exists.
b.
Flash the general system trouble LED indicator on the Fire Alarm Control Panels.
Pressing the trouble acknowledge key on the Fire Alarm Control Panel shall continuously
light the general trouble LED indicator during the trouble condition.
The visual indication shall remain on until the trouble condition is restored to normal.
Subsequent trouble conditions shall again flash the general trouble LED indicator.
c.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Display a general trouble indication and system status summary (numbers of alarm,
supervisory and/or trouble conditions) on the Fire Alarm Control Panel Liquid Crystal
Display (LCD). Pressing the trouble acknowledge key shall display, for 30 seconds, the
Page 8 of 25

16722
FALCON CLINIC
d.
1.6
individual device or circuit display, to include the "trouble" status and custom label (up to
40 characters and spaces) for the addressable device or circuit reporting the trouble
condition. At the end of the 30 second period, the general trouble indication and system
status summary shall again be displayed. The individual device/circuit display may be
recalled at any time by repressing the trouble acknowledge key or until the trouble
condition is restored to normal.
Enter the custom label for the device or circuit reporting the trouble condition with time
and date of occurrence into the fire alarm control panel historical trouble log for future
recall.
e.
Pre-amplifiers and tone generators to be arranged so that a trouble condition transfers the
operation to an identical and equally sized standby unit immediately. Pre-amplifier units to
be supervised at all times.
f.
Power amplifiers to be arranged so that a trouble condition automatically transfers the

operation to an equally sized or Greater standby amplifier. Primary and standby amplifiers
to be supervised at all times even while the amplifier has been selected and is in
operation.
g.
Activate the remote Color Graphic display to show the trouble condition activation to
include the time and date and custom label for the device or circuit reporting the trouble
condition.
h.
Activate the remote printer to printout a hard copy record of the trouble condition
activation to include the time and date and custom label for the device or circuit reporting
the trouble condition.
CAUSE AND EFFECT MATRIX

The contractor shall provide a detailed Cause and Effect matrix as a shop drawing which shall reflect all
details about the alarm conditions, supervision conditions and trouble conditions for all of the fire alarm and
voice evacuation system components and all related system interfaces (HVAC, Elevators, Public
Address,etc).
Cause and effect matrix shall be subject to the operator and consultant review / approval at the
construction phase.
1.7
SYSTEM WALK TEST

A.
The Main Fire Alarm Control Panel shall permit one person system walk test. The walk test mode
shall be pass code protected, requiring the entry of a minimum five digit pass code before the walk
test mode is enabled.
B.
Fire alarm system addressable devices may be divided into as many as eight groups for testing
purposes. Putting one group into the walk test mode shall not impair the normal operation of the
remaining seven groups.
C.
When a group of addressable devices is put into walk test mode, the alarm verification function, if
provided, shall be disabled in order to expedite testing.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 9 of 25

16722
FALCON CLINIC
D.
The walk test mode may be enabled for a programmable amount of time up to 8 hours. If no
devices in the system or enabled group have been activated during the programmed time, the Fire
Alarm Control Panel shall automatically revert to normal system operation.
E.
When placed in the walk test mode by authorized personnel, activation of any alarm initiating
device shall:
F.
1.8
1.
Sound a pulsing two second signal on all audible alarm signaling devices.
2.
Log the alarm condition in the Fire Alarm Control Panel historical trouble log for future
review/recall.
3.
The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall automatically reset itself after each alarm test.
When placed in the walk test mode by authorized personnel, momentary disconnection of
addressable data communication, alarm initiating, supervisory or alarm signaling circuit wiring
shall:
1.
Sound a continuous four second signal on all audible alarm signaling devices.
2.
Log the trouble condition in the Fire Alarm Control Panel historical trouble log for future
review/recall.
3.
The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall automatically reset itself after each circuit's wiring is
reconnected.
QUALIFICATIONS OF MANUFACTURER
A.
1.9
Manufacturer and supplier of the system specified shall have the following qualifications and submit
documentary evidence of same:
1.
Existence at time of bidding of local factory authorized office near project site, with staff of
factory trained engineers and technicians who are qualified to provide instruction, routine
and emergency maintenance and repairs on portions of systems. Proof to include evidence
of at least three similar installations currently in satisfactory service. Installations by another
distributor of proposed manufacturer will not be accepted as proof.
2.
Having 10 years or more of experience in successful application, installation and operation of

computerized systems, and sub-systems, as herein specified and noted.
TRAINING OF SYSTEM OPERATORS

A.
Manufacturer to train not less than 5 operators of console, with personnel on job instruction
provided by competent engineer representing Manufacturer.
B.
Manufacturer to provide each operator with complete, printed operating instructions and brief
sub-system description in manual or handbook form.
C.
Manufacturer to provide two distinct training sessions, with minimum training time of one day each.
Sessions scheduled to suit requirements, may be scheduled at any time from award of contract to
end of guarantee period at owner's request.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 10 of 25

16722
FALCON CLINIC
D.
1.10
Manufacturer to furnish letter stating that operators have completed training operation of system.
COORDINATION
A.
Contractor to coordinate with Mechanical Contractor and Mechanical Specifications for installation
of duct mounted smoke detectors and motor controls.
B.
Contractor to coordinate with Sprinkler Contractor and Mechanical Specifications for interface with
sprinkler devices.
C.
Contractor to coordinate with Elevator Contractor for interface with terminal recall relay.
D.
Contractor to coordinator with public address system supplier for interface with public address
system.
E.
Contractor to coordinate with Architectural for final locations of devices and appearance.
1.11
ZONING OF DEVICES (FOR LED ANNUNCIATION AT (MFACP)

A.
Manual Alarm Stations: Provide one alarm zone per floor.
B.
Area multi-sensor Detectors: One detector zone per floor plus individual zone for all electric
rooms/closets per floor and mechanical rooms per floor.
C.
Sprinkler Water Flow Switches: Individually zoned per switch for alarm.
D.
Sprinkler Valve Tamper Switches: Provide one monitor zone for each switch or a maximum of two
switches per zone if serving the same sprinkler branch line.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Refer To The "Schedule Of Preferred Electrical manufacturers & Suppliers".
2.2
SYSTEM CABLES
A.
All cables shall have color code conductors, conductor size to be as per manufacturer
recommendation.
B.
All of the fire alarm system cables including all related interfaces with all other trades - to be
MICC Cables for exposed installations and Fire Resistant Cables according to BS: 6387 Categories
C, W & Z run inside conduits for embedded installations.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 11 of 25

16722
FALCON CLINIC
2.3
EQUIPMENT
A.
Basic System Equipment, Addressing and Operating Capabilities

1.
The addressable intelligent fire alarm system shall provide an individual multiplex data
address for each addressable manual fire alarm station, addressable heat detector, Monitor
Zone Addressable Module and Control Zone Addressable Module.
2.
The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall provide Standard 72, addressable intelligent data
communications circuits to provide connection of and communication with the addressable
devices, as required by these specifications and/or as shown on the drawings. In order to
permit future additions, no more than 80% of the addresses available on any single
addressable data communications circuit shall be utilized.
3.
Addressable, intelligent data communications between the Fire Alarm Control Panel
Addressable Interface Circuit Modules and addressable intelligent devices shall be digital
transmissions which shall consist of multiple 11 bit messages with start, data, parity and
stop bits.
Address, parity, overrun, framing and check sum tests must be passed for any message to
be considered valid. Addressable data communications circuits between the Fire Alarm
Control Panel and addressable devices shall operate at 4800 baud. Each NFPA 72, Style 6
(Class A, four-wire) addressable data communications circuit shall be capable of
communicating with an addressable device up to 375 wiring meters distant and with a total
up to 1,500 meters of wiring in all branches.
4.
Monitor Zone Addressable Modules (intelligent type) shall be provided to connect and
provide individually addressed alarm initiating, supervisory or status monitoring circuits for
non-addressable devices such as sprinkler water flow alarm switches, remote building(s)
alarm and trouble, sprinkler valve tamper switches, fire fighting control panels, fans and/or
dampers. Each Monitor Zone Addressable Module shall provide one NFPA 72, Style D
(Class A, four wires) supervised circuit. Assignment of individual MZAM circuits for alarm,
supervisory or status monitor operation shall be accomplished during the programming of
the Master Controller Module Central Processing Unit (CPU) software.
5.
Control Addressable Modules (intelligent type) shall be provided to connect and provide Fire
Alarm System Control of remote equipment such as air handling systems, fans,
elevators,etc.
Each Control Addressable Module shall provide one individually addressable control relay
with Double-Pole, Double-Throw (DPDT) contacts fused. Assignment of individual CAM
relays for control operation shall be accomplished during the programming of the Master
Controller Module Central Processing Unit (CPU) software.
Each of the following types of equipment shall be provided with a Addressable Control
Module typically as follows:
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
a.
Fans: Provide two control modules for each fan as required by the Mechanical
Specifications and Local Codes and authorities.
b.
Smoke dampers: provide one control module for each HVAC fire smoke damper. The
quantities of these control modules shall be taken from the HVAC design documents.
Page 12 of 25

16722
FALCON CLINIC
6.
B.
c.
Elevators provide all needed control modules for recall/ automatic recall and shut
down for each elevator.
d.
Public Address System: Provide one control for each public address zone for muting
the sound in the alarmed zone.
Each of the following types of remote equipment associated with the fire alarm system shall
be furnished with a manual control switch at the Main Fire Alarm Control Panel, as required
by the functional requirements of these specifications, but shall be typically as follows:
a.
Provide a switch with LED status for lock-out of elevator recall operations for use
during testing of system.
b.
Provide a switch with LED status for disconnection of Central Station signaling.
c.
Provide a switch (On / Off / Auto) with LED status for each fan (supply fans, return /
exhaust fans, pressurization fans, smoke fans & air handing units).
Fire Alarm Control Panel(s): The Fire Alarm System Control Panel(s) shall incorporate all control,
alarm, relay and necessary modules and components in surface mounted cabinets. The operating
controls and zone/supervisory indicators shall be located behind locked, steel door/Plexiglas
window assemblies, with keys made available only to Fire Department and other authorized
operating personnel. All control modules shall be labeled, all zone locations shall be identified,
and the panel shall be provided with a set of permanently mounted operating instructions.
The panel, door and frame assembly shall be steel, with red finish. The panel shall contain
system power supplies, data bus conductors, battery charger and all necessary function modules
and components, including but not necessarily limited to the following:
1.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Master Controller Module: A panel shall be provided to act as a central processing,

indicating and control location for the fire alarm system and shall include:
a.
Solid state, microprocessor based, Central Processing Unit (CPU) to process all
system data and generate all system automatic alarm functions. Any addressable
device or conventional hard-wired alarm initiating, supervisory or status monitoring
circuit may be software programmed to activate any system control relay or signaling
circuit. All control-by-event programming, custom LCD display labels and alarm codes
shall be stored in non-volatile solid state memory, which shall be on-site
programmable.
b.
Four levels of access to system control and software functions. Level 1 shall be the
lowest level of access and shall not require a pass code. Levels 2, 3 and 4 shall
require a pass code of up to ten digits, with Level 4 being the highest (most restricted)
level of access. System software shall permit up to 20 individual pass codes to be
programmed into the system.
c.
Solid state memory for alarm and trouble historical logs. Each log, alarm or trouble,
shall be capable of storing up to 300 events with the time and date of occurrence.
d.
A module placement supervisory circuit through the module data conductors.
e.
80 character, alphanumeric, backlit, Liquid Crystal Display (LCD).

Page 13 of 25

16722
FALCON CLINIC
f.
System alarm LED indicator with alarm condition acknowledge button.
g.
System supervisory condition LED indicator with supervisory condition acknowledge

button.
h.
System trouble condition LED indicator with trouble condition acknowledge button.
i.
System power on LED indicator.
j.
System alarm silence button.
k.
System reset button.
l.
Central station alarm disconnect switch with "activated" LED indicator.
m.
Four programmable control switches with "activated" LED indicators.
n.
An alarm/trouble audible signal.
o.
Display action and data entry/control keypads.
2.
System Meter Module: The system meter module shall provide visual indication of system
voltage and supervisory current. The meter module shall contain a voltmeter with a range
of from 0 to 50 VDC for indicating system voltage. The module shall be readily
disconnected for ease of servicing and placement supervised via its connection to the
Master Controller Module.
3.
Addressable Interface Module: The addressable intelligent interface module(s) shall

provide one addressable data communications circuit to enable the Fire Alarm Control
Panel to communicate with the addressable devices. Each addressable data
communications circuit shall provide NFPA Standard 72, Style 6 (Class A, four-wire)
supervised operation. When wired for NFPA Standard 72, Style 6 (Class A, four-wire)
operation, a single open or ground fault shall not impair a circuit's operation. Addressable
data communications circuit wiring shall be supervised for opens in the circuit, shorts
across the pair and ground faults. An addressable data communications circuit fault shall
initiate a system trouble display and audible trouble signal at the Fire Alarm Control Panel.
In order to permit future addition of new detectors if needed each addressable interface
module shall have at least 20% spare capacity, no more than 80% of the available
addresses on each addressable interface module shall be permitted to be used.
Faults on one addressable data communication circuit shall not impede operation of other
circuits. The module shall be readily disconnected for ease of servicing and shall be
placement supervised by the Master Controller Module.
Provide available spare addressable interface module in each fire alarm control panel
including the main fire alarm control panel in addition to free space for future installation
of two addressable interface modules.
4.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Indicating Appliance Signal Circuit Modules: The indicating appliance signal circuit
module(s) shall provide six independently controllable alarm signal circuits. Each alarm
signal/speaker circuit shall be configured for NFPA 72, Style Z (Class A, four-wire)
Page 14 of 25

16722
FALCON CLINIC
supervised operation monitoring for opens, shorts or ground faults. When wired in the
Class A, four-wire configuration, a single open or ground fault shall not prevent the
activation of the alarm signal devices.
When a circuit fault is detected, the module shall light the general trouble LED on the
Master Controller Module and initiate a system general trouble condition.
Each signal circuit shall be protected by an individual fuse on the module. The module
shall be readily disconnected for ease of servicing and placement supervised by the Master
Controller Module.
5.
Auxiliary Control Relay Modules: The auxiliary control relay module(s) shall provide relays
and their bases, complete with terminals for Contractor wiring, for control of external
equipment functions. Each module shall provide eight independently, controllable,
Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT) relays. Each relay shall also be provided with a
supervised, status monitoring circuit to monitor the status of the controlled device (status
contacts provided by others).
The module shall be readily disconnected for ease of servicing and shall be placement
supervised by the Master Controller Module.
6.
Communication Module: The module shall provide two communications ports with ASCII
output (adjustable baud rate) for operation of system printers and/or color graphic station.
7.
Emergency Voice Dialer : shall be provided with following facilities:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
8.
channels input
Total recording time is 60 sec., splitted between No. 6 messages.
8 telephone numbers
Dialing mode ( DTMF/ PULSE )
Call list, priority order, communication delay, call progress function & message report
facilities should be included.
Telephone Line modem: It converts data in the RS232C format to or from FSK modulation
to permit data communications over leased/dedicated telephone lines to remote system
devices such as CRT displays and printers. It shall be capable of providing either
half-duplex (two-wire) or full duplex (four-wire) operation.
The modem shall provide a power-on LED indicator and six diagnostic LED indicators for:
receive data, transmit data, carrier on, clear to send, request to send, and data set ready.
9.
Battery Pack: The fire alarm system shall be provided with battery backup capability. The
batteries shall provide 24-hours of normal standby operation and 30 minutes of all zones
normal alarm operation at the end of the 24-hour standby period. The batteries shall be
placement and high/low voltage supervised by the Master Controller Module.
All battery charging and recharging operations shall be automatic.
Standby power for the system shall be produced by maintenance free, sealed, lead acid or
nickel cadmium batteries. The system batteries shall be supervised so that a low battery
condition or disconnection of the batteries shall be audibly and visually annunciated at the
control panel. Battery chargers shall have the following operating characteristics :
a.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Ability to charge batteries to 90% of their capacity within twelve (12) hours.
Page 15 of 25

16722
FALCON CLINIC
b.
c.
10.
C.
Each fire alarm control panel shall be provided complete with spare power supply, spare
power amplifier, spare addressable loop card and free space for two loop cards for future
extension.
Voice Communication System

1.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Compatible with either lead acid or Ni-cad batteries.

All circuits requiring system operating power shall be individually fused.
The voice communication system shall be an integrated modified triple channel system with
the capability of transmitting eight (8) digitized and multiplexed audio signals
simultaneously to different areas of the building. The system shall include custom preprogrammed digitized voice messages, words, and alarm tones that can be transmitted to
all or specific areas of the building. The exact sequence of operations must be confirmed
with the consultant / and the building operator.
The voice communication system shall provide prioritized paging announcements to all
zones and selected zones of the building.
2.
The system shall provide a local temporal back up tone at each amplifier to allow
evacuation signals to be broadcast in the protected premises in the event of a loss of data
communication from the multiplexed audio riser.
3.
A digital message unit shall be provided with 8 messages and 32 minutes of pre-recorded
emergency massaging. The message contained in the fully digital message unit shall be
recordable in the field on a computer.
4.
One (1) channel shall be used for general paging from a remote microphone. During a fire
alarm condition, general paging shall be automatically overridden by emergency alarm
tones and emergency paging from the EVAC center.
General paging shall include ability to page specific zones only and all call. Confirm zone
arrangement, with consultant prior to programming.
5.
The voice messages shall include an EVAC message, Drill Message and an All Clear
Message. The text of all the messages will be custom made to the approval of the owner
and the local fire department and must form part of the fire safety plan for the building. The
EVAC message will be configured such that the floor of alarm can be incorporated into the
message. Voice splicing will allow the EVAC voice message to indicate what floor or area is
actually in alarm in the building. All messages will be professionally recorded in a sound
studio before being digitized.
6.
The approved digitized EVAC message may be automatically broadcast after one (1)
minute to the alarmed zone in the evacuation alarm mode. The message may only be
manually activated, at the central alarm and control facility after one (1) minute to all zones
in the alert mode, if supervisory staff is present and have acknowledged the alarm. This is
to prevent the building occupants receiving a false sense of security that someone has
responded to the fire alarm condition.
7.
The system shall permit the positive alarm sequence as described in NFPA 72 " National
Fire Alarm Code".
8.
All messages may be repeated three (3) times before being terminated. Once the message
has been completed the speakers will automatically resume sounding the same alarm tone
they were sounding prior to the announcement.
Page 16 of 25

16722
FALCON CLINIC
9.
All messages, words, and alarm tones will be digitized and stored on a pluggable integrated
circuit chip located on the audio controller board. All equipment must be approved for use
with the specific voice communication system by the voice communication system
manufacturer.
10.
1-way voice communication shall provide intelligible low level reproduce tones and/or voice
instructions to all areas of the building. The system shall have the ability to automatically
or/and manually sound the second stage evacuation tone (120 pulses per minute) in the
zone and/or on the floor of alarm, while at the same time being able to sound the first stage
alert (20 pulses per minute tone or voice instructions to other areas of the building.
11.
The system shall be capable of selecting the proper tones and phrases based upon specific
conditions and location, sort and transmit the audible information and repeat the
transmission as many times as required. (Phrases, words, and alarm tones) shall be stored
on non- volatile solid state integrated circuits and shall be completely field programmable
on the site.
12.
The handset microphones shall be a dynamic noise canceling type with a frequency
response from 80 to 10,000 Hz. Any automatic alarm which may be sounding may be
overridden by the use of the microphone.
When the manual voice announcements are completed the system shall revert back to the
previous alarm unless reset or restored to normal by authorities in charge. The main fire
alarm control panel shall have a master microphone to control the speaker circuits in all
areas.
13.
D.
Manual control of the building speaker circuits shall be accomplished via dedicated speaker
circuit toggle switches at the MFACP. These switches give the operator the ability to select
the areas of the building to be activated during an alarm condition.
SOUND PERFORMANCE
1.
The Contractor shall provide detailed Acoustic Study specially for the Mall floors (Ground,
first, second & third floors) incorporating all of the ceiling, walls & floor finishes as per the
architectural drawings & specifications.
2.
Contractor to ensure the following minimum sound performance shall be achieved:

a.
b.
3.
E.
Contractor shall be fully responsible to obtain the sound performance mentioned above,
any needed modifications, equipment or acoustic treatment, etc shall be provided by
the contractor under his responsibility.
Power Amplifiers
1.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
The Sound Pressure Level shall be 6 10 dB higher than the background noise level
in each area, however the minimum acceptable Sound Pressure level shall be 85 dB.
Sound Transmission index (STI) shall be > 0.65.
Primary amplifiers are to be sized to accommodate all the speakers shown on the
drawings, tapped at two watts with 20% spare capacity included. Back-up amplifiers to be
provided in each fire alarm control panel.
Page 17 of 25

16722
FALCON CLINIC
F.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
2.
Each audio power amplifier shall have integral audio signal de-multiplexers, allowing the
amplifier to select any one of eight digitized audio channels. The channel selection shall be
directed by the system software. Up to 8 multiple and different audio signals must be able
to be broadcast simultaneously from the same system network node.
3.
Each amplifier output shall include a dedicated, supervised 70/100 Vrms speaker circuit
which is suitable for connection of emergency speaker appliances. Each amplifier shall be
also include a notification appliance circuit rated at 24 Vdc @ 3.5A for connection of visible
(strobe) appliances. This circuit shall be fully programmable and it shall be possible to
define the circuit for the support of audible, visible, or ancillary devices.
4.
Standby Audio amplifier shall be provided in each fire alarm control panel that automatically
sense the failure of a primary amplifier and automatically program them to select and demultiplex the same audio information channel of the failed primary amplifier and fully
replace the function of the failed amplifier.
5.
In the event of a total loss of audio data communications, all amplifiers will default to the
local EVAC tone generator channel. If the local panel has an alarm condition, then all
amplifiers will sound the EVAC signal on their connected speaker circuits.
6.
Audio amplifiers shall automatically detect a short circuit condition on the connected
speaker circuit wiring and shall inhibit it from driving into that short circuit condition.
7.
Technical performance
c.
Power rating: sufficient to feed all evacuation loudspeakers ( 1W / loudspeaker & 2W /

Horn) connected to the power amplifier in addition to 25% spare.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Frequency response : 60 Hz to 13 kHz fully loaded.

No load to full load differentiation less than 3 db.
Noise 75 dB below rated output.
Distortion less then 0.5%
Output voltage to be 70/100 volt constant voltage distribution configuration.
Speaker Control Circuits

1.
Each speaker zone must be divided into two speaker circuits. (Circuit A and Circuit B).
Speakers must be connected in an alternate format, so that upon a circuit failure 50% of
the speakers are audible and no two adjacent speakers are on the same circuit
2.
Each speaker zone (with dual circuits) must be connected to its own amplifier. It is,
therefore, possible to have as many channels as there are speaker zones. If high power
amplifiers and speaker splitter zones are used a minimum of three channels must be
supplied. An ALERT channel, an ALARM channel and a PAGE channel.
3.
Loudspeaker serving certain Stair shall be considered as a separate evacuation zone with
two circuits, one for the odd floors and the other for the even floors as indicated on the
drawings.
4.
Supervision of speaker circuit wiring must be continued, while quiescent, or selected to

alarm mode.
5.
Speaker zones to have a maximum initial loading of 80% capacity.

Page 18 of 25

16722
FALCON CLINIC
G.
Peripheral Devices: The following material to be supplied and installed as indicated on the
drawings:
1.
System Color Graphic Station with touch screen Display and Keyboard :
The display shall have colored, non-glare, 20 inch diagonally measured touch screen.
The detachable keyboard shall be of the enhanced, 101 key type and shall permit data
communication with the system Central Processing Unit (CPU) to permit the operator to
acknowledge system alarms and request status reports. The following feature shall be
available:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
2.
Graphical Annunciation and Control.

Up to 25,800 Custom Graphic Screens, Field Generated/Edited Via Auto CAD DXF
File Format Drawing Tools.
Custom Alarm and Trouble Messages Guide Operator dispatch response
Seven Access Levels for 256 Users.
Includes Network Interface for Wired or Fiber Optic Communications.
20" High Resolution Monitor.
Desk Top Enclosures.
Touch-screen and Mouse Operation.
Extensive Historical Logging:
Up to 500,000 Events.
Compatible with Spread Sheet and Data Base Programs for Report Customization.
Operator Notations can be Added.
Graphical Diagnostics Tools Identify Exact Status of Network Nodes and Wiring.
Dial-Up Service Modem for Remote Access.
RS232 Ports for Connection to Printers, Paging Systems, or Third Party Systems.
System Printer: The printer shall be provided with the following operational capabilities:
a.
A permanent hard-copy record of all pertinent details of system activity. Included on

this record shall be all unscheduled status change events, all operator
acknowledgments of these events and all operator control commands into the
system and the time and date of all occurrences.
b.
The system printer shall record all alarm, supervisory and trouble conditions by
address number and custom label.
The custom label, of up to 40 characters and spaces, and time and date of alarm,
supervisory or trouble condition
activation shall be printed out in a language text so that the source of the condition is
clearly understood without referring to a code directory. Printout by address or code
number only shall not be as considered functionally equivalent.
c.
3.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
The custom label (location message), of up to 40 characters and spaces, for a

specific device or circuit shall correspond to that displayed on the Fire Alarm Control
Panel Liquid Crystal Display.
Addressable Manual Fire Alarm Stations: Double Action (lift cover and pull alarm lever),
non-coded type manual station, of cast metal construction, with normally open, Single-Pole,
Single-Throw general alarm contacts. The manual station shall include an addressable
Page 19 of 25

16722
FALCON CLINIC
module which shall consist of printed circuit board with discrete circuitry for monitoring the
station alarm contacts. When operated, the alarm lever shall remain in its "down" position
to indicate its operation, with alarm contacts closed until the station is reset. The station
shall be reset by opening the front, resetting the lever and closing the station front.
The station shall be tested by opening the station front and then returning same to normal.
It shall be necessary to open the station to replace the break rod. A spare break rod shall
be furnished with each station.
4.
Addressable intelligent multi-sensor detector

The multi-sensor detector shall integrate three sensing technologies (ionization smoke,
photoelectric smoke and heat detection). The detector shall gather analog information from
each of its three fire sensing elements and converts it into digital signals which shall be
measured and analyzed separately by the detectors microprocessor with respect to a fourth
element (time). The detector should be UL listed and provided with surface mount,
addressable base assembly with an alarm LED indicator and screw terminals for all
connections. The addressable base shall respond to polling signals from the fire alarm
control panel and shall report alarm or trouble status changes. Base assemblies shall
provide detector twist / lock capability.
5.
Addressable intelligent Heat Detectors: Shall be two-wire, combination rate-of-rise alarm

function and fixed temperature element heat detector. Activation of the rate-of-rise or fixed
temperature alarm functions shall be self-restorable when the ambient temperature
stabilizes. Each detector shall utilize solid state components and shall be listed for U.L.
Standard 521. Detectors shall be provided with surface mount, addressable base assembly
with an alarm LED indicator and screw terminals for all connections. The addressable base
shall respond to polling signals from the Fire Alarm Control Panel and shall report alarm or
trouble status changes. Base assemblies shall provide detector twist/lock capability.
6.
Addressable intelligent area heat detector (90 c): in generator rooms, a fixed temperature
(90 c) heat detector shall be used. The detector shall be self restorable type and complete
with surface-mount addressable base assembly.
7.
Monitor Addressable Modules: Shall be individually addressable alarm initiating/supervisory

circuit board(s) and shall consist of printed circuit board with discrete circuitry for monitoring
normally open, dry contacts using NFPA 72, Style D (Class A, four-wire) circuit supervision.
The monitor shall respond to polling signals from the Fire Alarm Control Panel and shall
report alarm initiating/supervisory circuit status changes to it. The monitor shall include a
field programming capability for the assignment of its individual address number and
clamp-type terminals for making wiring connections.
The monitor module shall draw its power from the Fire Alarm Control Panel via a separate
power circuit. The monitor shall be furnished for flush mounting or surface mounting, where
shown on the drawings.
8.
Control Addressable Modules: Shall be individually addressable control relay and shall
consist of printed circuit board with discrete circuitry for controlling one individually
addressable control relay with Double-Pole, Double-Throw contacts. The control shall
respond to control signals from the Fire Alarm Control Panel.
The control shall include a field programming capability for the assignment of its individual
address number and clamp-type terminals for making wiring connections. The control shall
draw its power from the Fire Alarm Control Panel via a separate power circuit.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 20 of 25

16722
FALCON CLINIC
9.
Duct Smoke Detectors: UL 268A listed, addressable, intelligent photoelectric type,

incorporating sampling tubes and housing designed for this application. Duct mounted
smoke detectors hidden from view to be supplied with remote indicating pilot lights for
wall/ceiling mounting near the location of the hidden detector. The detector to be of the
same manufacturer as the control equipment and incorporate a built-in test station.
10.
Fire-fighter's Telephone Stations: Provide a semi-flush, mounted enclosure, painted red,

with telephone handset permanently mounted in a break glass type enclosure.
11.
Evacuation Loud Speakers with Strobe Light

a.
b.
12.
In all finished areas provide a combination of cone-type speaker and strobe light with
a round enamel painted steel baffle suitable for ceiling or wall mount applications.
Speaker assembly shall consist of the following:
1.
Fire retardant and moisture proof cone rated 4 watts.
2.
70 volt matching transformer complete with 1/4, 1/2, 1, 2 and 4 watt taps.
3.
220 gram magnet.
4.
Frequency response 60 Hz to 15,000 Hz 1dB.
5.
94 dB at 1.2 m, with a 1 watt input.
6.
The loudspeaker shall be provided complete with metal grille and fire dome
(back box).
7.
Moisture repellant treated steel enclosure.
8.
Pre-tap speakers at 1 watt tap.
9.
Specially designed for fire alarm system and it must be listed by for this
purpose.
10.
Built in strobe light with flash output 75 cd according to UL 1971
11.
Built in current limiting electronics.
The above mentioned specification is the minimum acceptable for the evacuation
loudspeakers, however, the contractor shall be fully responsible to meet the sound
performance mentioned else where in the drawings & specifications.
Evacuation Horn Speakers

a. In all parking areas, unfinished areas or mechanical rooms provide 114 mm red, horn
speakers as indicated on drawings. Speaker assembly shall consist of the following:
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
1.
Rugged die-cast metal, weather-proof housing.
2.
Vandal resistant grille.
Page 21 of 25

16722
FALCON CLINIC
3.
High efficiency driver.
4.
70 volt matching transformer complete with 1/2, 1, 2 and 4 watt taps.
5.
200 Hz to 4,000 Hz frequency range.
6.
90 dB at 3 m, with 1 watt input.
7.
Pre-tap horn speakers at 2 watts.
8.
Specially designed for fire alarm system and it shall be listed by for
purpose.
9.
Built in strobe light with flash output 75 cd according to UL 1971.
10.
this
Built in current limiting electronics.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
3.2
Examine areas and conditions under which fire alarm and voice evacuation system is to be
installed. Notify Owner in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do
not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install fire alarm devices, wiring and main equipment as indicated, in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of applicable Standards, and in accordance
with recognized industry practices to ensure that installation complies with requirements and
serves intended function.
B.
Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of fire alarm system with other work.
C.
Protect all equipment from dirt, moisture and construction debris, subsequent and during
installation until project is accepted by Owner.
D.
Fire stop penetrations of floor slabs or fire walls in accordance with all local codes.
E.
Contractor to furnish all conduit, wiring, outlet boxes, junction boxes, cabinets and similar
devices necessary for a complete installation. All wiring types as recommended by the
manufacturer installed in conduit throughout or as approved by the local Fire Department.
Junction boxes to be painted fire department red for identification.
F.
End of Line Devices (Resistors/Diodes/Capacitors): Shall be furnished as required for mounting

as directed by the manufacturer to electrically supervise all wiring.
G.
All wiring shall be color coded throughout, to local or National Electrical Code Standards. All
wiring shall be of the size recommended by the manufacturer.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 22 of 25

16722
FALCON CLINIC
H.
All wires shall test free from earth (grounds) or crosses between conductors.
I.
Circuit wiring from the Fire Alarm Control Panel to the system peripheral equipment shall be as
per the system manufacturer recommendations.
J.
Fire alarm system terminal and junction locations shall be identified in accordance with NFPA
Standard 70, Section 760-3. Terminal and junction boxes shall be painted red and identified in
white letters "FIRE ALARM," preventing unintentional interference with the fire alarm system
wiring during testing, servicing and additional modifications to the system.
K.
The system shall be arranged to receive power from three-wire, 240/415 volt, 50 Hertz
alternating current supply through fused cut-out, as shown on drawings. All low voltage
operation shall be provided from the Fire Alarm Control Panel(s).
L.
All final connections between system equipment and the wiring shall be made under the
supervision of a trained manufacturer's technical representative.
M.
Wiring within component enclosures and terminal cabinets: All wiring shall be installed in a neat
and workmanlike manner and shall be trained parallel with or at right angles to the sides and
back if any enclosure or cabinet.
All circuit conductors broken, spliced, or connected in any enclosure, cabinet, mounting or
junction box shall be connected to terminal blocks with each terminal spade lugs or with
approved pressure type terminal blocks. A terminal cabinet shall be installed where any circuit
tap is made and must be painted fire department red. All wiring within the enclosure shall be
readily accessible without removing any component parts.
3.3
N.
All conductors shall be installed in rigid heavy metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing run
surface or concealed and as required by applicable codes. Each conductor used for the same
specific function shall be distinctively color coded and must be clearly identified at both terminal
points. Wiring for the fire systems shall be installed as herein described and separate from any
other wiring systems.
O.
Evacuation loudspeakers shall be flush ceiling mounted cone type and surface mounted horn
type as indicated, each complete with a proper back box. Ensure that exterior speakers are
weatherproof and mounted with a weather sealed gland nut connection at the proper dispersion
angle. Speaker grille finishes to be confirmed with Project Manager.
CLEAN UP
A.
3.4
Upon completion of the installation, all debris created by the installation shall be removed from
the premises or disposed of as directed by the Owner.

A.
Upon completion of installation of Fire alarm & voice evacuation System and after system has
been energized, test equipment to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Field correct or
replace defective equipment, and retest.
B.
Factory trained technician to supervise the final connections, tests and adjustments of all
equipment upon completion. Each device be tested by the manufacturer's representative, in the
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 23 of 25

16722
FALCON CLINIC
presence of the owner's representative; a test report completed in triplicate, and signed by the
owner's representative to indicate that he witnessed the testing of the system.
A copy of the test report shall be posted adjacent to the Fire Alarm Control equipment and
enclosed in a glass directory stainless steel frame.
C.
Upon completion and prior to all acceptance, perform complete system tests as follows:
1.
Actuate all manual and automatic alarm and monitor initiating devices one at a time and
verify proper operation.
2.
Verify:
3.
a.
Operation of all signaling and indication systems as specified including proper

zone identification and labeling at the Fire Alarm Control Panel.
b.
Fan start up / shut-down.
c.
Transmission of alarm to security office.
d.
Manual control of items as specified.
e.
Class and type of wiring.
f.
Automatic operations of specified items.
Power:
a.
Verify operation of standby power sources as follows:

1)
2)
3)
4.
Acoustic Testing
a.
3.5
Remove primary power and check for battery operation as specified.

Remove primary power and check for automatic switch-over to
secondary source.
Check for proper sequence and priorities.
Verify the voice evacuation system acoustic performance as follows:

1)
Measure the Sound Pressure Level, ensure SPL shall be higher than
+85 dB as specified.
2)
Measure the Sound Transmission Index, ensure that STI > 0.65 as
specified.
3)
Measure the Percentage Articulation Loss of Consonants, ensure that
%Alcons < 5%
D.
Submit 5 copies of test data and results, signed by test personnel.
E.
Correct or adjust items not found acceptable by authorized representative.
F.
Repeat tests to indicate corrected items.
GUARANTEE
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 24 of 25

16722
FALCON CLINIC
3.6
A.
All components, parts and assemblies supplied by the manufacturer to be guaranteed against
defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 12 months from Owner and fire department
acceptance.
B.
Equipment manufacturer to have a local branch office staffed with trained, full-time employees
who are capable of performing testing, inspection, repair and maintenance services for the life of
the System.
C.
Contractor to guarantee all wiring to be free from inherent mechanical and electrical defects for
one year.
D.
The manufacturer to furnish a one-year maintenance contract, free of charge to the owner,
effective from the date of installation for maintenance and inspections of the manufacturer's
equipment, with a minimum of two inspections during the contract year. A local manufacturer
service department which stocks standard parts to be available to the owner. If required,
maintenance is to be performed during normal working hours, at no cost to the owner, for a
period of twelve months from the completion date of the installation, unless damage is caused by
misuse, abuse or accident.
SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE

A.
The equipment manufacturer shall make available a fully equipped service organization, capable
of guaranteeing an on-site service response time within 8 hours to a service request call. Site
service shall be available 24 hours per day and seven days per week.
B.
As part of this Contract, the Contractor shall receive from the equipment manufacturer and turn
over to the Owner the following system spare parts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
3.7
50% spare of each type of fuse.

30% spare of each type of lamp (excluding LED type).
10% spare of each type of alarm initiating device.
Other devices as described herein.
The equipment manufacturer shall make available, to the Owner, a price quotation for a one year
maintenance and testing agreement, to take effect on the date of final acceptance.

terminal blocks transducers and software interface to provide signaling and metering information for the
central control system and to accept START/STOP, open/close, set point from it.
Relevant signals are listed under controls, BMS and motor control panels drawings and data schedules.
The interface between the fire alarm and voice evacuation system and the BMS system shall be via
software interface. The system supplier is responsible to provide all software / hardware required to
achieve the interface and operation as indicated in this chapter and as indicated on drawings.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 25 of 25

16722
FALCON CLINIC
SECTION 16723
IP CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Division-1 (General requirements) will apply to the work of this section.
B. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 16010, apply to work of this section.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services, hardware, software,
tests and operation and maintenance documentation necessary to complete and make ready
for operation, a complete IP based Closed Circuit Television (IP-CCTV) system for the building
in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
B. The CCTV System shall be an IP based system utilizing Network cameras directly connected to
Local Area Network (LAN). The CCTV System shall be capable of monitoring, controlling and
storing cameras located at different areas of the building. Each installation shall comply with
local code requirements as applicable.
C. Contractor shall provide all of the Active Equipment (Ethernet Edge Switches, Core Switches...
etc) required for proper installation & operation of the IP-CCTV System as a part of the IPCCTV System.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacturer of IP-CCTV
Systems of types, data required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than five years.
B. Standard Compliance: provide IP CCTV system and components which Comply with
requirements of applicable local codes, DIN/VDE, IES, N.E.C. (NFPA-70) and UL-listed.
UL-listing on the individual devices are not sufficient.
C. Service: Manufacturer / Supplier must have a warehouse at which spare parts are stocked and
where a field service engineer who is a permanent, full-time employee of the
contractor/supplier, factory trained and qualified individual whose primary duty is field service
resides.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit Complete, Detailed and Original Catalogue for the manufacturer and
marked up for all of the proposed equipment.
B. Detailed Bill of material indicating the model number and quantity for all of the proposed
equipment.
C. Riser Diagram: Submit detailed riser diagram to indicate the connection between all of the
system components and the interface with all other system.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 1 of 6

16723
FALCON CLINIC
D. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings indicating all
of the proposed equipment, part numbers, cables, raceways, etc.
E. Compliance list: submit a detailed point by point compliance statement with this specification.
Where the proposed system does not comply or accomplish the stated function or specification
in a manner different from that described and specified a full description of the deviation shall
be provided.
1.5
EQUIPMENT WARRANTY
A. Guarantee equipment furnished under these specifications against defective parts and
workmanship under terms of the manufacturer's and dealers standard warranties for a period of
not less than one year from date of initial start-up and Owner acceptance of the system and
include labor and travel time for necessary repairs at the job site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Refer To The "List of Recommended Manufacturers".
2.2
GENERAL
A.
System administration shall be available from any workstation in the system. The system
specifically must have the capability to support not less than 6 workstations connected on
the network at the same time. The CCTV System shall allow all connected workstations
to function in a true multi-user, multi-tasking environment.
B.
The Operating System shall be based on a Microsoft operating system and / or UNIX.
C.
The system shall be capable of modular expansion without software upgrades or wiring
revisions. Final location and fixing methods of all the cameras giving optimum coverage of
the areas to be surveyed will be agreed with the Owner's Authorized Representative. The
Contractor will be responsible for suitable bracket to fix cameras in their final locations. The
Contractor will paint all camera housings and bracket to a color finish subject to approval by
the Owner's Authorized Representative.
D.
The system will provide maximum operational simplicity to enable quick and effective use in
an emergency. Selected live camera images will appear on the screen in no less than 1
second from key press. There will be no discernable latency between operation of the
control joystick and the response of the camera function.
E.
The contractor will provide and install all power supplies necessary for correct operation of
the CCTV system. The Contractor will liaise with the Clients M&E team to ensure that the
power source provided for the entire CCTV system is the same, single phase at
220V/50Hz.
F.
The control and monitoring components for the system will be installed inside the security
console/ security workstations, located in the Security Room. All control and monitoring
components will be designed for mounting into a 19 inch standard rack and will consist of
modular, unit type assemblies to facilitate removal, maintenance and system expansion.
G.
All equipment and materials used will be standard components, regularly manufactured and
regularly utilized in the manufacturers system. All systems and components will have been
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 2 of 6

16723
FALCON CLINIC
thoroughly tested and proven in actual use.

H.
2.3
The IP CCTV System shall be complete with IP Alarm Input Panels for monitoring the
status of the Stair Doors as indicated on the drawings and automatically recall the camera
and preset position associated with each accessed door. The Contractor will provide a
table for each access monitored door with the associated CCTV camera, for the Owner's
Authorized Representative to review and approve, prior to programming the interfaces.
SOFTWARE
A.
GENERAL:
1. The Contractor shall provide all software required for efficient operation of all the
automatic system functions required by this specification. Software shall be modular
in design for flexibility in expansion or revision of the system. It is the intent of this
specification to require provisions of a system that can be fully utilized by individuals
with no, or limited, previous exposure to PC's and programming techniques and
languages. Manufacturer is to guarantee providing new free of charge system
software release up to 5 years after the completion of the project in addition to the
warranty period specified elsewhere. Systems that are factory programmed are
unacceptable.
2. The software shall include a general purpose operating system, as well as CCTV
application software. All available vendor workstation application software shall be
provided with the system, and shall reside in each and every PC. Unbundled
software packages where the vendor can charge the user extra fees, or require
dedicated workstations, or require system rebooting for access are unacceptable.
3. All PC workstations shall be removable from the system without loss of control.
4. The software should interface with network Images and Video Servers, delivering full
color still and motion images to any standard windows or Unix based PC. The
Servers can be hosted on an Intranet and Internet. The software is compatible with
Pan / Tilt / Zoom cameras and can record images from any camera at any interval,
including advanced video motion detection, Region of Interest, and triggered events
from sensors connected to Access Control System via system interface. All recorded
images are stored in a tree structure based on Server name, Camera name, and
Date / Time stamp. Extremely low network utilization enables a complete system to
operate on a common network carrying normal business traffic.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
The application is client based; enabling multiple sites to poll common Servers
with minimal Server load.
Image / Video servers require no maintenance and are fully enabled upon power
up.
Servers can be configured via any current Web browser.
Servers can be password protected to allow restricted viewing to authorized
users only.
All Workstations can access the same network at the same time.
All Workstations can access and/or control the same camera or storage device.
All Workstations can access and/or modify the same camera or storage device
based on password level.
Latest revisions of all programs at time of practical completion.
Licensing of software at time of practical completion.
Page 3 of 6

16723
FALCON CLINIC
5. CCTV application software should run via a standard web browser.
B.
FEATURES
2.4
Display 1 to 256 camera views per software instance. Multiple copies can be run
concurrently, scaling to any quantity.
Record Images based on a given time interval, at a user defined resolution and
compression level.
Pan / Tilt / Zoom supported cameras, with configurable Touring and Preset
options.
Record images when a triggered event or video motion detection has occurred.
Audiovisual alert settings.
Email notification with attached image upon video motion detection.
View a single camera at a higher frame rate, with site-specific information and
statistics.
View multiple cameras via an included streamer interface allowing additional
viewing/recording to 30FPS per camera.
View / record image sizes are user selectable.
Compatible with MS Windows XP and UNIX.
No special hardware, capture cards or dongles installed in any workstations.
Integrates into existing TCP/IP network.
SYSTEM PASSWORDS
A.
To limit control by the system operators, the CCTV System shall support system passwords at
the workstation level.
B.
The user passwords shall limit user access and privileges to provide system level security. A
password shall be required to log on to the system. The CCTV System workstation shall
support up to 32 passwords. It shall be possible to enable or disable each and every individual
function of the CCTV System on a password by password basis using a simple point and click
operation. Each password shall allow a 30-character operator name, a 10-character alpha
numeric password.
2.5
HELP SCREENS
A.
2.6
Context Sensitive Help Screens: Provide context sensitive help screen associated with the
current keyboard/mouse input.
CAMERA SERVER
A.
2.7
Hardware specifications: Provide server equipment, conforming to the specified requirements.

Latest configuration as per the manufacturers recommendation.
OPERATOR WORKSTATIONS
A.
2.8
Hardware specifications: Provide workstation equipment, conforming to the specified

requirements. Latest configuration as per the manufacturers recommendation.
IMAGE STORAGE
A.
Contractor shall size the image storage device(s) based on storage of all cameras at 100%
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 4 of 6

16723
FALCON CLINIC
motion, 10 fps and 2 CIF resolutions and archiving of 2 weeks.

2.9
IP COLOUR CAMERAS
A. GENERAL
Built in motion detection

Up to 25 frames per second
Built-in Web Server and network connection
View live images from any network-connected PC
B. The IP Camera shall have the following minimum specifications:
2.10
2.11
Digital, 24-bit color

Image sensor : 1/3 inch interlaced CCD
Resolution (pixels): 380,000 Effective Pixels
Horizontal resolution: 480 TV lines
Exposure Backlight Compensation
Automatic Gain Control (AGC)
Automatic and fixed White Balance
Sensitivity: Min. Illumination range < 0.5 Lux at f1.4 (IRE:50)
Image: Motion JPEG, MPEG4
Image frame rate: Up to 25 frames/sec
Operating Environment:
Temp: 0-45C
Humidity: 20-80% RH non-condensing
Interface: 10Base-T/100Base-T, RJ45 connector
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 50dB (AGC off)
Supported Protocols: TCP/IP, HTTP, FTP, SMTP, DHCP,ARP, IGMP
LENSES
A.
Lenses shall have a vari-focal length selected by the contractor to give optimum coverage
of the areas to be surveyed. Lenses shall be adjusted during testing and commissioning as
required by the Owner's Authorized Representative / Operator.
B.
Zoom lenses shall be motorized iris focus and zoom compatible with 1/3" CS Cameras and
shall have at least 18x Optical Zoom in addition to 12x Digital Zoom, total zoom of 216x.
C.
Zoom Lenses for Outdoor Cameras shall be fitted with a neutral density spot filter.
D.
Cameras lenses for semi covered & outdoor areas shall be Auto iris type.
INDOOR HOUSING
E.
All cameras located in public areas shall be equipped with decorative smoked type minidome housing (diameter shall be 4" or less) camera housing shall be complete with all
needed back boxes & accessories suitable for proper mounting.
F.
Wall Mounted Cameras shall be Pendant Dome type and shall be supplied complete with
suitable mounting bracket.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 5 of 6

16723
FALCON CLINIC
G.
2.12
All of the Housing and all related accessories shall be subject to the Architectural
Consultant Review / Approval.
OUTDOOR HOUSING
A.
The housing will be a vandal resistant and environmental camera enclosure offering
weather protection to CCTV camera/lens/receiver combinations.
B.
The unit will have a sunshield that will provide protection against UV radiation and
corrosion and a latch with a loop for a padlock as standard.
C.
The housing will include a camera power supply; a thermostatically controlled heater and
blower to prevent condensation forming in the enclosure.
D.
The housing will have an IP 66 rating.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
3.2
3.3
3.4
The Contractor will provide timely written requirements for the areas and conditions under
which the CCTV is to be installed. The Contractor will notify in writing if the conditions are
found to be detrimental to proper completion of the work, prior to installation.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install complete CCTV System, including associated control devices as indicated, in

accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of applicable standards,
and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that installation complies
with requirements and serves intended function.
B.
Coordinate with other work as necessary to interface installation of CCTV System with
other work.

A.
Upon completion of installation and after System has been energized; demonstrate
capability and compliance of CCTV System with requirements.
B.
Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site then retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and retest.
PERSONNEL TRAINING
A.
Building Operating Personnel Training: Train Owner's building personnel in procedures for
starting up, bypassing and operating CCTV System. Furnish three paper operator's
manuals and one digital copy, providing installation and operation instructions for the CCTV
System.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 6 of 6

16723
FALCON CLINIC
SECTION 16725
ACCESS CONTROL & ALARM MONITORING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special Conditions
B.
Basic electrical materials and methods, section 16050 applies to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.3
1.4
Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services, tests and operation
and maintenance documentation necessary to complete and make ready for operation, a
complete Access Control and Alarm Monitoring System in accordance with Drawings and
Specifications.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of Access control

& alarm monitoring System of types, ratings, and capacities required, whose products have
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.
B.
Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, DIN/VDE, IEC,
BS, NEC, UL, NEMA, and NFPA Standards pertaining to the access control system.
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data sheets for all of the equipment and cables.
B. Riser Diagram: Submit detailed riser diagram to indicate the connection between all of the
system components and the interface with all other systems.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings.
D. Technical Submission:
functionality.
1.5
detailed design information for all equipment, integration and
EQUIPMENT WARRANTY
A. Guarantee equipment furnished under these specifications against defective parts and
workmanship under terms of the manufacturer's and dealer's standard warranties for a period
of not less than one year from date of initial start up and consultant acceptance of the system
and include labor and travel time for necessary repairs at the job site.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 1 of 5
ACCESS CONTROL & ALARM MONITORING

SYSTEM
19725
FALCON CLINIC
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
All equipment and materials used will be standard components, regularly manufactured and
regularly utilized in the manufacturers system.
B.
All systems and components will have been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use.
C.
All systems and components will be provided with an explicit manufacturer warranty.
D.
The System shall have a Software Interface with the Closed Circuit Television System
2.2 ACCESS CONTROLLER UNITS

A. GENERAL
Doors shall be monitored through "intelligent" Access Controller Units. Each unit shall
contain its own microprocessor and memory with a minimum 48 hours battery backup
and shall be completely independent stand-alone with its own hardware clock calendar
and all firmware and software to maintain complete control on an independent basis.
B. HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS
2.3
Final quantities of the alarm input units shall be determined by the contractor based upon
the requirement to provide a fully operational system, as per the intent of the
specification, as shown on the drawings and recommended by the manufacturer. As a
minimum, the following features shall be supported:
i.
Support for 8 doors per Controller
ii.
Support for 16 Supervised inputs
iii.
Real Time Clock/Calendar
iv.
Central Control and Monitoring
v.
TCP/IP Communications
vi.
On-Board battery charger
vii.
One dedicated tamper input
PROXIMITY CARD READERS

A.
Reader shall be sealed in a ragged, weatherproof poly-carbonated enclosure providing

reliable performance and a high degree of vandal resistance.
B.
Interface with all Wigand protocol access control systems.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 2 of 5

SYSTEM
19725
FALCON CLINIC
2.4
2.5
C.
Output data in Wigand or Clock and Data format, includes a tamper switch to provide
notification of reader tampering.
C.
Recognize card formats up to 137 billion unique codes.
D.
Optional integrated weatherproof keypad, which provides an additional level of security by

allowing the use of a personal identification number (PIN).
PROXIMITY CARDS
A.
The proximity cards will be a PVC credit card size, with a punched slot for a strap, clip, or
for attachment to a key ring.
B.
The presence of small metal objects such as keys or coins near the card will not alter the
code read by the reader or prevent the code form being read by the reader.
C.
The individual card will be coded from a population of at least 134 million unique codes.
Cards will be sequentially numbered. The user may specify codes or numbers. Exact
replacements for cards which may be lost, damaged or stolen will be available upon
request. Cards having the same number will also be available upon request.
D.
Cards may be used interchangeably and will be compatible with all readers in the system,
regardless of the readers physical size or style, and without any code matching or
memory devices in the reader.
E.
The card manufacturer will guarantee the availability of additional quantities of cards
having the same facility code, for a period of at least five years.
MAGNETIC DOOR LOCKS

A.
All locking devices are to be of the electromagnetic type, to meet the following
requirements as outlined below:
1. Approved by the authority having jurisdiction, including local fire authorities.
2. Magnetic locks shall meet the Special Locking Arrangements for Delayed Egress
under NFPA-101 Life Safety Code.
3. UL listed.
4. Provide a minimum holding force of 1600 pounds per door.
5. Be supplied with an integral door status switch and magnetic bond sensor.
2.6
MAGNETIC DOOR CONTACTS

A.
The Magnetic Door Contacts shall meet the following:

1. UL Listed.
2. diameter recessed magnetic contacts with factory installed wire leads, minimum 1
foot long, 22 AWG.
3. Self-lock mounting
4. Where field conditions prohibit the use of a recessed magnetic contact, surface
mounted contacts will be used with suitable mounting accessed subject to the
engineers approved.
5. Operation: normally open/normally closed (NO/NC) volt free magnetic contacts.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 3 of 5

SYSTEM
19725
FALCON CLINIC
2.7
EMERGENCY BREAK TO EXIT UNIT

A.
The Break to Exit Unit shall meet the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
2.8
UL Listed.
1 No. spare glass.
Dual pole, NO/NC volt free contacts.
Both positive and negative lock feeds to be broken when operated.
SOFTWARE
A.
The system software will be compiled for faster execution speeds and will offer all of the
following features and capabilities:
1. Input/output Capabilities: From any local PC workstation or any remotely connected
PC workstation, the system operator will have the capabilities through the keyboard /
mouse to request dynamic displays of current values or status using a tabular or
graphic format. A global database sort utility will allow an expanded tabular display of
only the points on the current graphic display. This expanded tabular display will list
point name, hardware address, dynamic state or value, alarm status, override status,
and test mode status.
2. Obtain a summary of all access control doors with status (under access control,
access control disabled, or access control ignored) and allow issuing commands to
the access control doors to manually force the door to one of the above states, or
provide a momentary release (act as a valid key/card access), or return to automatic
control (remove manual state).
3. Add, delete, or change points within each panel/module or application routine while
on-line.
4. Change point I/O descriptors, status, and alarm descriptors and engineering unit
descriptors while the system is on-line.
5. Add new panel/module to the system while the system is on-line.
6. Develop, modify, delete or display full range of color graphic displays providing
dynamic, animated displays. All development, editing and display work will be
capable of being performed with the system fully on-line and in full communications
with the panels/modules.
2.9
ID BADGING SYSTEM
A.
ID Badging Station complete with all needed Software and Printer shall be provided, the
Badging system shall meet the following:
1. High speed printing at 144 cards per hour, edge to edge in full color (YMCKO) image
printing throughput.
2. 300 dpi (11.8 dots per mm.) print resolution.
3. 2 MB image memory standard.
4. Compatible with Windows 2000, XP and NT 4.0
5. Compatible with parallel and serial ports.
6. Color dye sublimation or thermal transfer printing.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 4 of 5

SYSTEM
19725
FALCON CLINIC
2.10
CABLES
A.
All of the Access Control and Alarm Monitoring system's cables shall be as recommended
by the system manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
3.2
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
The contractor will install the access control system, including associated control devices
as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of
applicable standards and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that
installation complies with requirements and serves the intended function.
B.
The contractor will coordinate with other works as necessary, to interface the installation
of the access control system work with other disciplines.
C.
Anchor mounting hardware firmly to walls, floors, or ceilings, to ensure enclosures are
permanently and mechanically secured. Provide all hardware and accessories for proper
mounting.
D.
Provide equipment earthing connections for the access control system as required.

A.
3.4
The Contractor will provide timely written requirements for the areas and conditions under
which the access control system is to be installed. The Contractor will notify in writing if
the conditions are found to be detrimental to proper completion of the work, prior to
installation.
Upon completion of installation and after circuitry and equipments have been energized,
the contractor will demonstrate capability and compliance of the access control system
with all specified requirements. Where required, the contractor will correct malfunctioning
units at site, and then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace
with new units, and retest.
PERSONAL TRAINING
A.
Train Owner's building personnel in procedures for starting up, testing and operating the
access control and alarm monitoring system, and auxiliary equipment. Furnish three
paper operator's manuals and one digital copy, providing installation and operating
instructions for the access control and intruder detection system.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 5 of 5

SYSTEM
19725
FALCON CLINIC
SECTION 16750
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special

Conditions and Division-1 (General requirements), apply to work of this section.
B.
General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 16010, applies to work of this
Section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.3
necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner structured cabling
system in accordance with Drawings Specifications and Qtel regulations.
B.
The contractor shall be responsible for the supply, installation, and terminations of a complete
structured cabling system including trunking, conduits, cabling, Main Distribution Frame,
Intermediate Distribution Frames or Patching Racks, Patch Cords, external under ground
cables, manholes, handholes, telephone / data sockets and all of the provision needed for the
entry of Qtel external cables into the buildings and such other additional similar works as may
be stipulated on the drawings or as detailed in the specification and as per Qtel Requirements.
C.
All Cabling and Components shall be from the same approved manufacturer.
D.
System Tests shall be End to End including the patch cords.
E.
The contractor has to obtain Qtel approval before starting commencing work at site.
EQUIPMENT CRITERIA
A.
Structured Cabling System shall be provided for Telephone & Data Connectivity all over the
Buildings.
B.
All of the Horizontal Cables, Outlets, UTP Patch Panels and Patch Cords shall meet or exceed
the latest requirements on EIA/TIA, for category 6 transmissions at 300MHz.
C.
Data Backbone Cables which shall be run from the Main Data Rack at QTEL room up to each
IT Room shall be Fiber Optic Cables as indicated on the drawings.
D.
Telephone Riser Cables which shall be run from the main distribution frame located in QTEL
Room and each IT Room shall be multiple of 25 Pairs Cat. 5.
E.
All cabling between the IDF's and each Data or Telephone outlet points shall be 4 pair UTP
category 6 cables at 300 MHz enclosed in galvanized steel conduit / trunking.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 1 of 11

16750
FALCON CLINIC
1.4
F.
Generally telephone / computer sockets shall be RJ45 type suitable for category 6 equipment
and mounted within a suitable face plate to match the power accessories. Each outlet shall be
c/w labelling facility for identification of each socket.
G.
Contractor shall be fully responsiable to provide all needed containment system needed for the
system installation (Conduits, Pull Boxes, Back Boxes, Cable Trunking, etc), sizing for
conduits & trunks shall be based on maximum filling ratio of 40%
H.
Contractor shall be responsible for keeping the distance between the Structured Cabling
System Cables & Power Cables as per EIA/TIA-569 Commercial Building Standard for
Telecommunications Pathways Recommendations.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of structured cabling

system of types, and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 5 years.
B.
Standards Compliance: Comply with the latest editions of the requirements of applicable local
codes, and the following standards: 1. QTel Requirements & Regulations.
2. Electronic Industries Association / Telecommunications Industry Association
(EIA/TIA) 568B-Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standards and
subsequent addendums and revisions.
3. EIA/TIA-569-Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and
Spaces.
4. International Standards Organisation/International Electrotechnical Commission
(ISO/IEC) IS 11801:2002 and subsequent revisions.
5. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Cable Certification and Follow Up Program.
6. CENELEC EN50173:2002 and subsequent revisions.
7. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM).
8. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).
1.5
C.
Service Manufacturer must have a factory warehouse at which spare parts are stocked where a
filed service engineer who is a permanent, full time employee of the manufacture, factory
trained and qualified individual whose primary duty is field service resides.
D.
All work must be installed by system manufacturers certified system installers/vendors who are
certified and experienced in implementing the selected structure cabling system and to perform
all related testing programs, Systems Manufacturers & Suppliers should be approved from
QTEL.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data sheets & Original Catalogues for all of the proposed
Cables & Equipment.
B.
Installation instruction details for the structured cabling system.
C.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 2 of 11

16750
FALCON CLINIC
1.6
D.
Riser Diagram: Submit Detailed Riser Diagram showing all of the system components &
Capacities.
E.
Samples: Submit samples from all sockets, accessories, fittings and cabling.
EQUIPMENT WARRANTY
A.
The system manufacturers shall provide a minimum twenty (20) year warranty on the entire
structured cabling system. These warranties shall be provided in written certificate form. The
system manufacturers shall provide in writing to the Owner that in event of the demise or failure
of the installing certified system installer/vendor, the manufacturer shall be responsible for
providing another certified system installer/vendor to fulfil the remainder of the warranty
conditions.
B.
The Contractor shall provide a guaranteed twenty-four (24) hour response time to any warranty
claims.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Refer To The "Schedule of Preferred Electrical Manufacturers & Suppliers ".
2.2
CATEGORY 6 CABLES
A.
All horizontal cat 6 cabling shall be EIA/TIA standards compliant throughout, terminated to
1000BaseT specifications.
B.
All cables shall be high performance 4 pair category 6, UTP UL listed consisting of 23 AWG,
100 ohm characteristic impedance, solid conductors formed into four individually twisted pairs
and enclosed by PVC jacket.
C.
Cables shall be run from the user outlet to the cabling rack (as indicated on drawings) without
any transition points.
D.
All UTP cabling must be tested using a level III field tester by the supplier and full
documentation must be provided to demonstrate that the cabling meet the industry standards
(i-e IEEE 802.3, EIA / TIA 568 B.2-1).
E.
Category 6 defines four-wire twisted pair UTP copper cable that can transmit data and proven
support for 100 Mbps fast Ethernet, 300 MHz Broadband Video, Gigabit Ethernet 1000BASE-T
and155 Mbps ATM.
F.
The Cat 6 cable shall be of lowcapacitance and exhibits low crosstalk. However, all figures of
the cable must be Category 6 compliant.
G.
The cables short term bending radius is 6 times the cable diameter in operation and 10 times
the cable diameter in installation.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 3 of 11

16750
FALCON CLINIC
2.3
2.4
MULTI-MODE FIBER OPTIC CABLES

A.
Multi-mode indoor / outdoor fiber optic cables shall be installed from each Patching rack (IDF) to
the main data rack at QTEL room, number of cores shall be as indicated on the drawings.
B.
Fiber optic cables shall be installed in Cable Trunking (not indicated on the drawings), contractor
to provide the proper size cable trunking system ensuring filling ratio < 40%.
C.
The cable shall be suitable for indoor and outdoor use in ducts and risers, rodent resistance type
with LSZH flame retardant outer sheath.
D.
Fiber Optic Cables shall be suitable for 10/100/1000 BaseF and to be tested @ 1350 and 1500
nm, Full OTDR tested shall be performed before and after installation.
E.
The cable shall be with tight buffer structure, glass yarn reinforcement and water- blocking
elements and to be recommended by the manufacturer for riser installation.
F.
Low friction jacket for ease of pulling through ducts.
G.
The cable must be designed and tested according with EIA / TIA-568A, Bellcore GR-20 core and
ISO 11801:2002.
H.
The cables short term bending radius is 10 times the cable diameter in the no load condition and
20 times the cable diameter when under load.
25 Pairs Cat. 5 Cables.

A.
B.
C.
2.5
Telephone Services shall be provided at each patching Rack via multiple of 25 Pairs, Cat. 5, 24
AWG, UTP Cables.
Number of Cables to each Patching Rack shall be as indicated on the drawings.
Cat. 5 Cables shall be run in Cable Trunking (not indicated on the drawings) other than the fiber
optic cable trunks, contractor to provide the proper size cable trunking system ensuring filling
ratio < 40%.
RJ-45, CAT 6 OUTLET

A.
The outlet shall be category 6, eight-position angled RJ-45, T568B pinned and modules mounted
within the service floor outlet box or on wall flush mounting. The contractor to ensure compliance
and matching between the RJ-45 connectors with the faceplates.
B.
The presentation of the outlets shall be provided for labelling and identification. The outlet shall be
complete with a transparent window to protect the labelling tag.
C.
All conductors of the 4-pair cat 6 horizontal cable shall be terminated on the respective contacts.
To avoid installation errors, the wire organizer of the snap-in connector should be identified by
the same standard color coding as the cat 6 cable wires.
D.
Each connector shall provide both T-568A and T-568B color code identification for the pins at the
rear of the connector. The punched down should be in accordance with the T-568B color code.
E.
Each outlet to receive one 4 pair cable. Submit sample of the socket for review and approval.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 4 of 11

16750
FALCON CLINIC
F.
2.6
2.7
2.8
Outlets shall be supplied Complete with Faceplate from the same Wiring Devices Manufacturer.
CAT 6 COPPER PATCH PANEL

A.
B.
All cat 6 cables shall be terminated on Cat 6 patch panels which shall be 19" rack mounted type.
The presentation of the patch panel shall be provided for labelling using printed numbering
system.
C.
The cat 6 patch panel shall provide both T-568A and T-568B color code identification for the pins
at the rear of the panel. The punch down is to be in accordance with the T-568B color code.
D.
All conductors from the 4 pair cable shall be terminated on the respective contacts. To avoid
installation errors, the wire organizer of the snap-in connector must be identified by the same
standard color coding as the wires of cat 6 cables.
E.
Each patch panel shall be provided complete with a holder to locate and clamp the incoming
cables without causing damage to the cable or affecting the performance of the link.
F.
In the rack cabinet, the patch panels shall be separated by metallic patch-guides to protect the
patch cords. The height of these guides shall be 1HU or 2HU depending on the rack space.
CAT 6 PATCH CORDS

A.
Category 6 copper patch cords shall be provided to connect between the patch panels and
switches. The number of the Cat 6 copper patch cords shall be equal to the number of outlets.
B.
The length of the patch cord to be determined by the contractor based on the arrangement of the
equipment inside the cabinet rack, but in any case it shall not be less than 1.2m.
C.
The characteristic impedance of the pairs must be identical to that of the horizontal cat 6 cables.
D.
The patch cords shall have a guaranteed performance level of greater than 750 insertions without
degradation to the performance level of the solution.
FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANELS

A.
Fiber optic patch panels shall be rack mounted with 12 duplex LC ports and shall take no more
than one unit of vertical space on the rack cabinet, the patch panel shall be complete with splicing
tray.
B.
The patch panel shall be equipped with a mechanism that ensures the retention and support of
the incoming fiber optic cables.
C.
The patch panel shall be designed with a sliding mechanism enabling front installation and
maintenance work to be carried out without having to remove the entire panel. The patch panel
shall be delivered complete with top cover.
D.
The patch panel shall provide facilities to recess the front connector plate deeper than the front of
the 19 rails of the cabinet. This will provide sufficient bend radius for the patch cords once
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 5 of 11

16750
FALCON CLINIC
connected to the panel. This shall also prevent damage to the patch cords when the cabinet door
is closed.
2.9
2.10
E.
Cable management unit shall be provided with the fiber optic patch panel.
F.
Fiber Optic Patch Panels Shall be supplied complete with all LC connectors needed for
terminating the Multi Mode Fiber Cables.
G.
One, 12 Duplex LC, Fiber Optic Patch Panel Shall be provided in each Distribution Rack at each
IT Room, in addition, Main Data Rack shall have multiple of 12 Duplex LC Fiber Optic Patch
Panels Which shall be sufficient to connect all of the Backbone Fiber Optic Cables to all of the IT
Rooms in addition to 20% Spare Capacity.
FIBER OPTIC PATCH CORDS

A.
All needed fiber optic patch cords shall be provided to connect between the fiber optic patch
panels and the active equipment.
B.
The length of the patch cord to be determined by the contractor based on the arrangement of the
equipment inside the cabinet rack(s).
C.
Type of Fiber Optic Patch Panel shall be coordinated with the active equipment supplier.
D.
The fiber optic patch cord shall be manufacture from LSZHflame retardant jacket. The fiber optic
connectors shall comply with IEC 74-13.
RACK CABINETS
A.
Structured Cabling System Racks shall be complete with front plexiglass door and rear metal
door and to be suitable for LAN services requirement.
B.
Patching Racks for the offices & General outlets shall be 42U, 80x80 cm, while the Patching
Racks for the Shops & offices shall be Wall mounted type 15U, Double Section Cabinets.
C.
Rack Cabinet shall be provided complete with all needed accessories Silent type Fan Trays,
Earthing Kit, Plinth Kit, Ladling Kit & Vertical Management Organizers.
D.
Rack Cabinet shall support cable entrance from both top and base.
E.
Each rack shall have one power distribution strip unit mounted at each side for full height of rack
complete with a minimum of ten outlets.
F.
Adequate air flow within rack is required to maintain the expected levels of equipment to be
located within each rack; therefore fan assemblies are to be supplied.
G.
The rack shall be equipped for electrical grounding to meet EIA/TIA 606 stables.
H.
Each Rack Shall have at least 50% free Space for installing of Active Equipments.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 6 of 11

16750
FALCON CLINIC
2.11
2.12
TELEPHONE 110 TERMINATION BLOCKS -APPROVED BY QTELA.
110 Blocks, 19" rack mounted type (Cat. 5) shall be provided in each IT Room with capacity
sufficient to connect all of the Telephone Riser Multi-pair Cables.
B.
The wiring block shall be able to accommodate 22-26 AWG cable conductors.
C.
The Blocks shall be supplied with all needed brackets for the installation inside 19 inch Rack
Cabinets.
D.
Contractor to provide all needed 110/RJ45 Patch Cords for patching between Telephone Riser
terminated on 110 Blocks and the Horizontal Telephone Cables Terminated at RJ45 Cat. 6 Patch
Panels.
MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME

A.
The main distribution frame (MDF) shall be as approved by QTEL and shall connect all incoming
trunk lines of the Building plus 20% spare. (All circuits of this part shall be protected against over
voltage and over current) and all of the Riser Multi Pair Cables to all IDF's with at least 20%
Spare Capacity.
B.
Terminals shall be identified by numbered tags corresponding to the respective lines or

extensions. The contractor shall submit the proposed numbering scheme for prior approval by the
Engineer.
C.
Two sets of the special tools required for MDF wiring (e.g. IDC insertion tool) as well as test
cords shall be provided with the main distribution frame.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
On-going inspections shall be performed during construction by the Client Authorized Representative /
Consultant Engineers. All work shall be performed in a high quality manner and the overall appearance
shall be clean, neat and orderly. The following points will be examined and must be satisfactorily
complied with:
A.
Is the design documentation complete? Are all cables properly labelled, from end-to-end?
B.
Have all terminated cables been properly tested in accordance with the specifications for the
specific category as well as tested for opens, shorts, polarity reversals, transposition and
presence of AC and/or DC voltage?
C.
Is the cable type suitable for its pathway? Are the cables bundled in parallel?
D.
Have the pathway manufacturer's guidelines been followed? Are all cable penetrations
installed properly and fire stopped according to code?
E.
Have the Contractors avoided excessive cable bending?
F.
Have potential EMI and RFI sources been considered?
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 7 of 11

16750
FALCON CLINIC
G.
Is Cable Filling Correct?
H.
Are telecommunications closet terminations compatible with applications equipment?
I.
Have Patch Panel instructions been followed?

1.
2.
3.
4.
3.2
J.
Have Modular Panel instructions been followed?

1. cable dressing first
2. jackets remain up to the Connecting Block
3. all pair terminations tight and undistorted
4. twists maintained up to the Connecting Block
K.
Are connectors properly turned right side up in the Jack Panels without cables wrapped or
twisted around the Mounting Collars?
L.
Are the correct outlet connectors used (T568B)?
M.
Is the jacket maintained right up to the connector?
N.
Are identification markings uniform, permanent and readable?
WORKMANSHIP
A.
3.3
jacket removal point

termination positions
all pair terminations tight with minimal pair distortions
twists maintained up to Index Strip
Components of the Structured Cabling System shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike manner.
Wiring colour codes shall be strictly observed and terminations shall be uniform throughout the
system. Identification markings and systems shall be uniform. TIA/EIA 606 administration
guidelines shall be used as standard for all Structured Cabling System wiring.
INSTALLATION
A. General
All installation shall be done in conformance with EIA/TIA 568B, IS11801 and EN 50173
standards and meet requirements of EIA/TIA 569, EN50174 and IS 14763 installation
guidelines. Special attention must be made to ensuring that the twists of the cable pairs are
maintained tight up to the connection point. The Contractor shall ensure that the maximum
pulling tensions of the specified distribution cables are not exceeded and cable bends maintain
the proper radius during the placement of the facilities. Failure to follow the appropriate
guidelines will require the Contractor to provide in a timely fashion the additional material and
labour necessary to properly rectify the situation. This shall also apply to any and all damages
sustained to the cables by the Contractor during the implementation.
B. Bonding and Grounding
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring an approved ground at all Rack Cabinets &
distribution frames, and / or insuring proper bonding to any existing facilities. The Contractor
shall also be responsible for ensuring ground continuity by properly bonding all appropriate
cabling, closures, cabinets, service boxes, and framework. All grounds shall consist of
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 8 of 11

16750
FALCON CLINIC
appropriately sized copper wire and shall be supplied from an approved building ground and
bonded to the main electrical ground. Grounding must be in accordance with all local codes
and practices.
C. Power Separation
The Contractor shall not place any distribution cabling alongside power lines, or share the same
conduit, channel or sleeve with electrical apparatus. Power separation guidelines already stated
must be adhered to. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to highlight areas where these
guidelines cannot be met, prior to installation.
D. Miscellaneous Equipment
The Contractor shall provide any necessary screws, anchors, clamps, tie wraps, distribution
rings, wire moulding, miscellaneous grounding and support hardware, etc., necessary to
facilitate the installation of the System.
E. Special Equipment and Tools
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish any special installation equipment or
tools necessary to properly complete the System. This may include, but is not limited to, tools
for terminating cables, testing and splicing equipment for copper/fibre cables, communication
devices, jack stands for cable reels, or cable wenches.
F. Labelling
The Contractor shall be responsible for printed labels for all cables and cords, distribution
frames, and outlet locations, according to Owner / Operator specifications i.e., 2N-001-V, 2N001-D1, 2N-001-D2 at the time of delivery. No labels are to be written by hand.
G. Cable Storage
The Contractor shall not roll or store cable reels without an appropriate underlay and the prior
approval of owner's engineers.
3.4
3.5
PENETRATIONS OF WALLS, FLOORS AND CEILINGS

A.
The Contractor shall make no penetration of floors, walls or ceiling without the prior consent of the
Architect and General Contractor.
B.
Where penetrations through acoustical walls or other walls for cableways have been provided,
such penetrations shall be sealed by the Contractor in compliance with applicable code
requirements and as directed by the owner's Architect and Civil Consultants.
C.
Where penetrations through fire-rated walls for cableways have been provided, such penetrations
shall be sealed by the Contractor as required by code and as directed by the Owner's Architect or
General Contractor. Contractor shall, prior to the commencement of on-site activities, submit to
owner for review by its Architect, details of any special systems to be used.
CONTAINMENT INSTALLATION
A.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
The cabling containment shall be installed such that the following cabling handling requirements
are met:
Page 9 of 11

16750
FALCON CLINIC
CABLE HANDLING
>90
Bend Radius
4 Times the
Cable Diameter.
Avoid
>90 Folds
Avoid
Scoring
Copper
Avoid
Torn
Jacket
EIA TSB 40A Requirement

in Termination Space
Acceptable
Practices (Limited)
Avoid Tight
Twisting
22 mm (0.87 Inch)
Bend Radius
(Cable May Kink)
B.
3.6
The Contractor must confirm that the supplied containment meets the requirements of the above,
and does not infringe on the certification of the site.
CO-ORDINATION WITH NETWORK INTEGRATOR

Co-ordinate work with the work of the Owners Network Integrator.
The Network Integrator must be present on site to witness and co-ordinate the required system
testing. The cabling Contractor and the Network Integrator must together perform a job walk
through upon completion of testing, together sign the cabling test reports to verify that network
cabling is properly installed and performs to acceptable standards.
3.7
TESTING
A.
Copper Cable testing

Testing of all copper wiring shall be performed prior to system cutover. 100 percent of the
horizontal and riser wiring pairs shall be tested for opens, shorts, polarity reversals,
transposition and presence of AC voltage. Voice and data horizontal wiring pairs shall be
tested from the telecommunications outlet to the TC. At least 10% of the cable runs shall be
tested for conformance to the channel specifications of Category 6. Testing shall be done with
a TIA/EIA Level III test set using the approved testing adaptor and settings of the test set
manufacturer. Test shall include length, mutual capacitance, characteristic impedance,
attenuation, and near-end crosstalk. Near end crosstalk measurements shall be done at both
the information outlet and the cross connects. Any pairs not meeting the requirements of the
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 10 of 11

16750
FALCON CLINIC
standard shall be brought into compliance by the contractor, at no charge to the owner side.
Complete, end to end test results must be submitted to Owner Authorized repetitive.
B.
Optical Fibre Cable Testing

All fibre testing shall be performed on all fibres in the completed end to end system. There
shall be no splices unless clearly defined in Section 3 of this RFP. Testing shall consist of a bidirectional end to end. The system loss measurements shall be provided at 850 and 1310
nanometres for multimode fibres and 1310 and 1550 for single mode fibres.
Any link not meeting the requirements of the standard shall be brought into compliance by the
contractor, at no charge to the owner side.
Documentation shall be provided in both hard copy and compact disk soft copy to the point of
contact.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 11 of 11

16750
FALCON CLINIC
SECTION 16780
TV AND SATELLITE RECEPTION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special Conditions (General
requirements), apply to work of this section.
B.
General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 16010 apply to work of this section.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
complete and make ready for operation TV & Satellite Reception System in the building in accordance
with Drawings and specifications.
B.
The system shall consist of a complete installation including VHF/UHF Antennas, Satellite Dishes,
mounting, IF Amplifiers, RF Amplifier, multi switches, Riser coaxial Cables, Distribution Coaxial Cables,
Splitters, tap offs, outlets, and all necessary accessories required for complete installation and
operation as per the system manufacturer's recommendations.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of TV and Satellite

Reception System of types, and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar services for not less than 5 years.
B.
The Contractor shall show evidence of having successfully completed at least three similar projects of
a comparable quality and magnitude.
C.
The contractor shall show evidence that he maintains a fully equipped service organization capable of
furnishing adequate maintenance of the installed system.
D.
Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes and the following
International Codes:
E.
International Electrotechnical Commission

IEC 60169
IEC 60169-2:65(82)
IEC 60574
IEC 60574-1: 77
IEC 60597
IEC 60597-4 : 83
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Radio Frequency Connectors.

Part 2: Coaxial Unmatched Connectors.
Audiovisual, Video and Television Equipment and Systems.
Part 1: General
Aerials for the Reception of Sound and Television Broadcasting in the
Frequency Range 30 MHz to 1 GHz.
Part 4 Guide for the Preparation of Aerial Performance
Specifications. Detailed Specification Sheet Format.
Page 1 of 8

16780
FALCON CLINIC
IEC 60728
IEC 60728-1: 86
1.4
Cabled distribution systems for television and sound signals.

Part 1: Systems primarily intended for sound and television
signals operating between 30 MHz and 1 GHz..
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturers data sheet and original catalogues for all of the proposed
equipment and cables.
B.
Provide the manufacturer's installation instructions for the TV & Satellite Reception System
C.
D.
Riser diagram: Submit Detailed System's Riser Diagram indicating type of different components in the
system and also the calculations of the RF & IF signal level at each outlet.
E.
Compliance list: submit a detailed point by point compliance statement with this specification. Where
the proposed system does not comply or accomplish the stated function or specification in a manner
different from that described and specified; a full description of the deviation shall be provided.
1.5
A.
EQUIPMENT WARRANTY
under terms of the manufacturers and dealers standard warranties for a period of not less than one
year from date of initial start-up and Engineer acceptance of the system and include labor and travel
time for necessary repairs at the job site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Refer To The "Schedule of Preferred Electrical Manufacturers & Suppliers".
2.2
INTRODUCTION
A.
The contractors shall provide, install, test and commission TV & Satellite Reception System utilizing
the multi-switch technology to distribute the IF Signals from Satellites in addition to the RF Signal from
the VHF/UHF Antenna to each multiswitch.
B.
After the system is installed the contractor shall furnish a complete set of operating instructions,
technical information and system drawings necessary for the proper operation and maintenance of the
system. The drawings shall include IF & RF signal levels throughout the system as they were on the
acceptance date of the system.
C.
All radio-frequency levels in this section are to be construed as referred to one microvolt across 75
ohms.
D.
One standard radio-frequency distribution impedance shall be used in the system. This shall be 75
ohms and no other impedance shall be used without the express permission of the Engineer.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 2 of 8

16780
FALCON CLINIC
E.
The contractor shall provide and install, all the required cable and wiring for the systems specified. He
shall pull cable into conduit and boxes, install all system equipment and make all necessary
connections. He shall also make necessary tests and adjustments and put the entire systems in
satisfactory operation.
F.
The contractor shall investigate the electrical power standards of the local area and the specific
premises in which the equipment is to be installed. All equipment shall be compatible with the local
power supply, voltage and frequency.
G.
All major items of equipment shall be the product of one manufacturer, where practicable, to ensure a
uniform quality and compatible styling and appearance.
H.
Wiring shall be carried out using the appropriate size of super low loss coaxial cables. Coaxial cables
shall be installed strictly in accordance with the cable manufacturer's recommendations.
I.
The Signal Strength at each outlet shall be as follows

IF Signal
RF Signal
CNR
:
:
:
+54 : +60 dB
+68 : +85 dB
> 48 dB
Contractor shall be fully responsible for submitting complete Signal Strength Calculation based on
the selected manufacture's data sheets and to provide all needed RF & IF Amplifiers and Equalizers
to comply with the required signal strength and Carrier to Noise Ratio (CNR).
J.
The Maximum Amplitude Variation between any channels at any terminated outlets shall not exceeds
2 dB, Contractor to provide all needed equalizers to fulfill the requirements.
K.
Color performance on 625 line PAL system shall be at least to normal commercial standards, in
particular the following shall be observed.
Chrominance signal phase
Dependent level phase
Luminance/chrominance ratio
: IQ cross view less than 10%.

: 3 degrees.
: 2 dB.
L.
The entire installation shall be designed for minimum voltage standing wave ratio and the return loss
shall be not less than 20 dB at any point of the system.
M.
The system shall be such that the short circuiting or open circuiting of any outlet socket shall not
significantly affect signals at other outlets.
N.
Spurious radiation shall be within the limits laid down by international regulations.
O.
Subjective evaluation of the picture quality on a standard television receiver / satellite receiver
connected to any outlet in the system shall be utilized. No visible components of cross channels intermodulation, ghosting, or beat interference shall appear when the receiver is tuned to each and every
distribution signal.
P.
Objective proof of the capability of the system to meet the performance specifications in this section
will be required of the contractor during the acceptance tests. The contractor shall furnish all test
equipment for these tests.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 3 of 8

16780
FALCON CLINIC
Q.
TV sockets shall be provided from the same manufacturer of lighting switches and sockets, TV socket
shall have IF & RF Outlets.
R.
The system shall be capable of continuous operation in an ambient temperature of 45 degrees Celsius
and with voltage variations of 10% from the nominal 240 V, 50 Hz. LV supply.
2.3
STANDARDS, REGULATIONS AND WORKMANSHIP
A.
The TV & Satellite Reception system shall comply with all applicable, International standards and code
of practice and Qatar Local Standards.
B.
It is the contractors responsibility to ensure compatibility of systems with domestic television and radio
equipment available in Qatar.
C.
The TV & Satellite Reception System shall be designed and installed by competent personnel
specializing in this type of work. Installation shall be carried out to the highest standards of
workmanship.
2.4
MASTER AERIAL T.V
A.
Aerials suitable for receiving terrestrial broadcast shall be installed on the roof of the building, with
special amplifiers and/or filters. The aerial array shall be of the best quality and optimum type for the
highest possible standard of reception.
B.
The aerial shall be fitted to a mast mounted on the roof of the building.
C.
All materials used in the fabrication of the aerials and their mountings shall be protected against
corrosion by heavy anodic coating, hot galvanizing or corrosion resistant compound.
D.
Aerials shall be constructed of light aluminum alloy with positive locking of all elements in position.
Square boom constructed is preferred.
E.
Nuts, bolts, locking washers etc. shall be of such material or so treated that no galvanic action can take
place.
F.
All aerials shall be supplied with a completely weather proof cased transformer to provide the standard
impedance of the system (75 ohm) and weather proof glands with strain relieving properties shall be
provided for the coaxial outlet cable.
G.
The feeders connecting the aerials to the multi-switch shall be of the highest quality, the optimum type
for the particular installation, and must be installed in accordance with the current issue of international
standard code of practice. Feeders shall be of the super low loss 75 ohms, cu-core coaxial type
(attenuation at 862 MHz not exceed 8 dB/100 Mt.), run inside the mast and securely clamped against
vibration and whipping. Where run through roof or side walls the appropriate tubing with U-shapedending shall be used to prevent ingress of moisture and sealing shall be ensured at the outer extremity
only by use of appropriate sealing compound.
H.
VHF Antenna shall have the following

1.
2.
3.
Withstand wind speeds of up to 130 km/h

Channels 5 to 13.
Gain better than 9dB.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 4 of 8

16780
FALCON CLINIC
4.
5.
6.
I.
UHF Antenna shall have the following

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.5
Front to back ratio 18 dB.

Return loss 17.6 dB
Impedance 75 Ohm.
Withstand wind speeds of up to 130 km/h

Channels 21 to 69.
Gain better than 17dB.
Front to back ratio 25 dB.
Return loss 17.6 dB
Impedance 75 Ohm.
LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION

Each aerial shall have its own integral spark gap and together with its co-axial down-lead and the
mast be bonded to a down-lead of at least 95 sq. mm cross section, terminating in a main
earth.Earthing of the antennas system shall be according to IEC 60597-4.
2.6
MAST OF SATELLITE DISH

The mast constructed of galvanized steel with a minimum diameter of 4 inches (10 cm).
The satellite dishes mast shall be protected against lightning damage by grounding to the nearest
approved system.
The satellite dish shall be grounded a common grounding points. The mast shall be adequately
supported on the reinforced concrete pad to withstand wind and other environmental conditions,
prevalent at this location.
All satellite dishes down-lead cables shall be fully shielded 75 Ohm cu-core coaxial type (attenuation at
2200 MHz not exceed 16 dB/100 Mt.). All cable fittings to the dish shall be covered with weather
sealing devices and sealed with silicone compound.
2.7
SATELLITE DISHES AND EQUIPMENT

Three fixed parabolic dishes. The dishes shall be of the symmetrical parabolic type and 1.8 m diameter.
The components specification shall be as follow:
Frequency range
Gain
Half power beam width
Material
2.8
: 10.7 - 12.75 GHz.

: not less than 44 dB
: not greater than 1
: Aluminum.
FEED SYSTEM
To fulfill the requirements of DIN/VDE 0855 part 12.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 5 of 8

16780
FALCON CLINIC
Completely mounted on the reflector.

Power supply through down lead.
Frequency range
: 10.7-12.75 GHz.
Gain
: not less than 47 dB.
Output impedance
: 75 ohm.
Polarization decoupling
: 40 dB (min.)
The feed system shall comprise a band pass filter for suppression of out band distributing signals
according to DIN/VDE 0855, part 12.
2.9
A.
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
Multiswitch Unit
1.
The building TV & satellite reception system shall utilize Cascadable multi-switches (Active /
Passive) with 8 SAT. Inputs, one RF Input and 16 subscriber Outputs, at the end of each riser
section, Standalone Multi-switch shall be used as indicated on the drawings.
Multiswitch shall have the following minimum specifications:
Trerr. Input Frequency Range :
Sat. Input Frequency Range :
Through Loss
:
Tress. Tap Loss
:
Sat. Tap Loss
:
2.
B.
C.
47 862 MHz.
950 2200 MHz.
< 3 dB
< 14 dB
< 5 dB
The contractor to include in his offer all needed IF & RF amplifiers to obtain the signal strength
required in clause 2.2.I above.
Tap off units

1.
Tap-off units shall have 75 Ohm back matched units. Isolation and insertion loss shall be chosen
for each location to enable the total system performance specification to be met.
2.
Tap-off isolation network shall be directional coupler hybrid design. The contractor shall adjust
the head end to provide frequency tilt to compensate for the frequency discriminative
characteristics of the system cable.
Riser and Horizontal coaxial cables

1.
2.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
The system riser coaxial cable shall be 75 Ohm impedance with an attenuation of less than 6
dB/100 meters (at 862 MHz). It shall be sweep tested by the manufacturer and certification shall
be available on request.
Acceptable Cable constructions are as follows :
- Center conductor
Solid copper or copper clad.
- Dielectric insulation
Solid of foam polyethylene.
Page 6 of 8

16780
FALCON CLINIC
- Shield
- Jacket
3.
2.10
100% coverage with aluminized mylar or polyester foil

plus copper or aluminum wire braid. (wire braid only
shield will not be acceptable).
Polyvinyl chloride.
For horizontal coaxial cables, the attenuation shall be less than 12db/100m (at 862 MHz). These
cables shall be used to connect between the TV outlets and nearest multi switch unit.
TESTS ON SITE
A.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all needed testing equipment so that tests can
be carried on site and in the presence of the consultant in order to ascertain that the installation meets
all the specified performance criteria.
B.
The following tests shall be carried out using a pattern generator with facilities for all aspects of video
and audio performance including :
1.
Color Performance.
2.
Ghosting.
3.
Resolution.
4.
Synchronization performance, and any other measurements that Engineer may which to perform.
5.
System Performance.
6.
System Recording.
The generator shall provide crystal controlled carries at all channel frequencies in bands I and III
modulated with 1000 Hz. audio and appropriate video signal. Output shall be variable between at least
+ 20 dB and +100 dB. The raw video and audio signals shall also be available.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
INSPECTION
Examine areas and conditions under which TV & satellite reception systems are to be installed and
notify in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the
INSTALLATION
Install TV & satellite reception system equipments, including associated control devices as indicated, in
accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of applicable standards and in
accordance with recognized code of practices to ensure that installation complies with requirements
and serves intended function.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 7 of 8

16780
FALCON CLINIC
B.
manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's
torque requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening
torques specified in UL Standards 486A and B.
C.
Anchor mounting hardware firmly to walls, floors, or ceilings, to ensure enclosures are permanently
and mechanically secured. Provide all hardware and accessories for proper mounting.
D.
Provide equipment earthing connections for the TV & satellite reception systems units as required.
3.3
A.
PERSONNEL TRAINING
Building Operating Personnel Training: Train Owner's building personnel in procedures for starting up,
testing and operating TV & satellite reception system submit three operator's manual providing
installation and operating instructions for system.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 8 of 8

16780
FALCON CLINIC
SECTION 16790
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
General Provisions for Electrical Work section 16010 applies to work of this section.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
complete and make ready for operation by the owner public address system in accordance with
B.
The systems wiring & raceways shall be completely separated from any other system.
C.
The drawings issued with the specification indicate the approximate location of all apparatus. The
exact and final location shall be subject to the prior approval of the Engineer.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of main background music
system of types, and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
services for not less than 5 years. Provide main background music system produced by a
manufacturer listed as an Acceptable manufacturer in this section.
B.
Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes and the following
International Standards:
C.
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)

IEC 60189-1 : 86
IEC 60189-2 : 87
IEC 60189-3 : 90
IEC 60268
IEC 60268-1:85
IEC 60268-14:80
IEC 60268-16: 98
IEC 60581
IEC 60581-1:77
IEC 60581-3:78
IEC 60581-4:79
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Part 1: General test and measuring methods

Part 2: Cables in pairs, triples, quads and quintuples for inside installations
Part 3: Equipment wires with solid or stranded conductor, PVC Insulated, in
singles, pairs and triples third edition; (Amendment 1-1989)
Sound System Equipment.
Part 1: General
Part 14: Circular and Elliptical Loudspeakers; Outer frame Diameters and
Mounting Dimensions.
Part 16: Objective Rating of Speech Intelligibility by Speech Transmission
Index.
High Fidelity Audio Equipment and Systems: Minimum Performance standards
Part 1: General
Part 3: Record Playing Equipment and Cartridges.
Part 4: Magnetic Recording and Reproducing Equipment.
Page 1 of 11

16790
FALCON CLINIC
IEC 60581-5:81
IEC 60581-7:86
Part 5: Microphones.
Part 7: Loudspeakers.
ELECTRONIC INDUSTRIES ALLIANCE (EIA)

EIA ANSI/EIA-310-D (1992): Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE C62.41 (1991; R 1995): Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power
Circuits
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70 (2005) :
National Electrical Code
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 1449 (1996; Rev thru Jul 2002): Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturers data sheets & original catalogues for all of the equipment &
cables.
B.
Installation Instruction: Submit the Manufacturer's installation instructions for all of the public address
system equipment.
C.
D.
Riser diagram: Submit riser and block diagrams for the public address system indicating the type of
different components in the system, connections, interface with other systems, and arrangement of
the central equipment inside the rack cabinets, Power Requirements and Heat dissipation.
E.
Compliance list: submit a detailed point by point compliance statement with this specification. Where
the proposed system does not comply or accomplish the stated function or specification in a manner
different from that described and specified, a full description of the deviation shall be provided.
F.
Acoustic Simulation Study: Contractor to submit detailed acoustic simulation study for the sound
performance inside the mall areas, simulation to be by one of the latest advanced acoustic simulation
programs (EASE or CATT ACOUSTIC).
1.5
EQUIPMENT WARRANTY
A.
under terms of the manufacturers and dealers standard warranties for a period of not less than one
year from date of initial start-up and Engineer acceptance of the system and include labor and travel
time for necessary repairs at the job site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Refer To The " Schedule of Preferred Electrical Manufacturers & Suppliers ".
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 2 of 11

16790
FALCON CLINIC
2.2
GENERAL
A.
The public address system shall be centralized Background music system with the facility to
broadcast routine zone paging to loudspeaker zone, multiple zones or all call.
B.
The system shall consist basically of the following:

1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Metal rack cabinet(s) which shall incorporate:
Preamplifiers.
Compact disc players (CD / MP3).
DVD Players
Power conditioner (Main distribution panel).
Power Amplifiers including spare power amplifier(s).
Automatic Substitution unit for power amplifiers.
Audio Switching Matrix.
Monitor panels.
Interface with fire alarm system.
2.3
2.
Zone Paging Microphone shall be Located in the security console at basement level.
3.
Flush Mounted Ceiling Loudspeakers.
4.
Volume controls.
REQUIRED FEATURES
A.
The equipment shall be stacked in rack Cabinets with front glass door and latitudinal chassis support
elements. The design shall be such that all units may be drawn out from the front of the rack and
internal connections shall be long enough to permit withdrawal without prior disconnection.
B.
Electrical connections other than those of low level signal shall be effected by means of soldering
push-on space clips or multi-connector blocks. Low level signal wiring shall be of heavily braided
screened cable sheathed in PVC and connections as recommended by the manufacturer. Output
lines within the rack shall be run as twisted pairs heavily screened with tinned copper braid and
sheathed with PVC.
C.
Each active item of equipment shall have its own power supply circuit, be independently fused on the
live conductor and bear a front panel mains indicator light ON/OFF switch and standard cartridge type
fuse holder. A permanent inscription shall indicate the fuse rating.
D.
Positive electric contact shall be made between each equipment and the main racking assembly. The
racks shall be independently earthed and it is the responsibility of the contractor to ensure that hum
producing earth return loops are avoided.
E.
Amplifiers output shall be tested and rated in accordance with the I.E.C. Standard and 100 V line
matching techniques shall be used.
F.
All equipment shall be designed for a continuous trouble-free operation in the climatic conditions of
the site.
G.
All components and equipment shall be in full compliance with I.E.C safety regulations and be proofed
against tropical conditions.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 3 of 11

16790
FALCON CLINIC
H.
All units of the system shall be protected from the normal hazards of operation such as mismatch,
over-load, short- circuiting of output and connection mistakes etc.
I.
All items of equipment shall under any normal circumstances of operation be capable of withstanding
any surges which might be produced by sudden re-establishment of mains or standby power supplied
after a power failure.
J.
Heat limits as specified and guaranteed by the manufacturer shall under no circumstances be
exceeded. Fans, louvers and vents shall be provided to this effect.
K.
The two sides and the rear door of the rack(s) shall be capable of being opened to permit any
required maintenance at the rack.
L.
The system shall be sub-divided into zones to allow broadcasting of different BGM sources to
different zones at the same time in addition to routine zone paging.
M.
System shall be interfaced with the fire alarm & voice evacuation system to mute the BGM/paging in
case of fire.
2.4
SOUND PERFORMENCE
A.
The Contractor shall provide detailed Acoustic Study incorporating all of the ceiling, walls & floor
finishes as per the architectural drawings & specifications.
B.
Contractor to ensure the following minimum sound performance shall be achieved:
C.
2.5
1.
The Sound Pressure Level shall be 6 10 dB higher than the background noise level in each
area, loudspeaker tapping may differ from area to area to fulfill these requirements.
2.
Sound Transmission index (STI) shall be > 0.65 at least 85% from the mall area, worst point shall
not have STI less than 0.55.
3.
The sound shall be measured at 1.5 m above floor level (1m above floor level in seating areas) in
all normally-accessible areas.
Contractor shall be fully responsible to obtain the sound performance mentioned above, any needed
modifications, equipment or acoustic treatment etc shall be provided by the contractor under his
responsibility.
EQUIPMENT
A.
AUDIO POWER AMPLIFIERS

1.
The audio power amplifier output shall be fully protected against mismatch, overload,
short-circuit and eventual switching transients.
2.
An illuminated VU meter with ballistics corresponding to IEEE standards shall be mounted on the
front panel. A level control, ON/OFF switch, pilot light and panel mounted fuse shall be fitted.
3.
Balanced or single-ended 25, 50, 70 and 100 volt. Outputs shall be available at convenient screw
terminal strips.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 4 of 11

16790
FALCON CLINIC
4.
The audio power amplifiers shall be of rugged construction and shall have at least the following
technical specification :
a.
5.
B.
Power capacity
Sufficient to feed all connected Ceiling loudspeakers

plus 20 % spare capacity.
b. Total harmonic distention

c. Frequency response
d. Noise level
e. Sensitivity
f. Input Impedance
:
:
:
:
:
< 0.5% (20 : 20,000 Hz) at rated output.

40 - 20, 000 Hz 3 dB.
>75 dBu.
-20dB to + 4 dB.
50 K
Spare (stand-by) audio power amplifier(s) shall be to replace any faulty amplifier.
MULTI CD / MP3 PLAYER

1.
The CD Player shall have a capacity of 5 discs with built in HDCD decoder.
2.
The CD Player shall have One-control load and play, Continuous repeat of a pre-programmed
track selection & Latching pause control.
3.
Visible display of track number and of total playing time on the inserted disc shall be provided.
4.
The unit shall utilize an 8 times over sampling digital filter and advanced multi-level noise
shaping.
5.
The CD player shall have at least the following specifications:

Frequency response
Dynamic range
Single to noise ratio
Total harmonic distortion
Channel separation
Digital output
C.
D.
: 2 Hz to 20 KHz 3
dB dB
: 100
:
:
:
:
112 dB
0.0025%
98 dB
Coaxial
DVD PLAYER / RECORDER

1.
The DVD player/recorder shall utilize the latest technology in the video and audio processor.
2.
The audio D/A converter shall be 24-bit 96 kHz, with a dynamic range of 106 dB and a signal to
noise ratio of 115 dB. The total harmonic distortion shall be less than 0.002 % with DOLBY
digital and DTS digital output.
3.
The video D/A converter shall utilize 27 MHz, 10-bit technology. It shall be possible to read all
DVD zones on the same player.
CENTRAL EQUIPMENT RACK

1.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Equipment shall be mounted on 19 inch racks in accordance with EIA ANSI/EIA-310-D, with
dimension of 800 x 800 mm located as shown on the drawings.
Page 5 of 11

16790
FALCON CLINIC
E.
F.
2.
Equipment racks shall be provided with lockable front Plexi-glass door and rear metal door to
limit access to the equipment.
3.
Rack cooling shall be through top rack mounted fans, Fans shall be of the silent type.
4.
Rack's panels shall be factory finished with uniform baked enamel over rust inhibiting primer.
5.
Provide 20 % spare space in each rack cabinet for future extensions.
6.
Equipment shall be installed within the rack in a logical (signal path) sequence. Notwithstanding
this requirement, equipment requiring routing operation (e.g. switch and monitor panels) shall
be located at a convenient working height.
7.
The rack cabinet shall be equipped with power conditioner, power distribution units, earthing kit &
plinth Kit.
MONITOR PANEL
1.
A monitor panel shall be provided to monitor the output of each amplifier. An amplifier selector
switch (for 10 amplifiers), integral loudspeaker and calibrated loudspeaker gain control shall be
provided.
2.
The output of the monitor loudspeaker shall be muted when a microphone in the same room is in
use.
3.
Visual monitoring with a LED type VU meter shall be provided on the monitor panel to
simultaneously display the output level of each amplifier.
AUTOMATIC AMPLIFIER SUBSTITUTION UNIT

1.
G.
Automatically substitute the faulty amplifier by a spare one in case of error / fault in any operating
power amplifier, automatic substitution unit shall not replace the amplifier if the fault produced
by the loudspeaker network.
AUDIO SWITCHING MATRIX

1.
A microprocessor controlled, modular audio switching matrix shall be provided to assign any
audio input source to a designated any audio outputs, with the required priorities between
inputs.
2.
The audio switching matrix shall have audio 4 inputs for sound sources and 4 audio outputs to
feed the loudspeaker's Zones as indicated on the drawings.
3.
The audio switching matrix shall have all needed control inputs and outputs in addition to 20%
Spare.
4.
The audio switching matrix shall be of a modular construction.
5.
The audio switching matrix shall be provided with the software with facility of easy programming /
re-programming and operation of the all matrix functions (e.g. programmed priorities, fade-in,
fade out, combining facility,etc). All commands of programming and operation shall be
displayed on LCD.
6.
The audio switching matrix shall have automatic self diagnostic function; any fault shall be
appeared on the LCD display.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 6 of 11

16790
FALCON CLINIC
H.
7.
The audio switching matrix shall have the ability to be connected to a host computer via RS-232
interface, a laptop PC with all needed software to be provided with the matrix.
8.
The audio switching matrix shall be interfaced with fire alarm system to mute the sound level in
case of fire alarm condition, muting shall be in the alarmed zone only where evacuation
message shall be broad coasted from the fire alarm system.
9.
The audio switching matrix shall have at least the following minimum performance:
Frequency response
20-20000 Hz ( 0.5 dB)
Distortion
Less than 0.1 %
noise level
85 dB below rated output
Output level
0Bm line level (0.775 V), max. 14 dBm
Output impedance
< 600 ohm
ZONE PAGING MICROPHONE

1.
A Zone Paging microphone shall be installed in the security console, the microphone shall be
used for general routine paging to public address zones in the building (separate zone paging,
group of zones or all-call paging).
2.
The Zone Paging microphone shall be from the same manufacturer and series of the audio
matrix, suitable for flush / Desk mounted and shall comprise a high quality gooseneck
microphone double-signal chime tone and line preamplifier.
3.
The base unit shall be finished to the approval of the owners authorized representative.
4.
The base unit of the console shall incorporate

a. 20 illuminated zone push-buttons.
b. An "ALL CALL" switch for pre-selection of all zones.
c.
A row of latching switches for selection of zones receiving background music.
d. A background music source selector switch or switches and an verall music level volume
control (which shall not offset any other signals).
e. Visual indication (self-illuminated switch or associated LED) of which background music
source has been selected.
f.
Visual indication (self-illuminated switch or associated LED) of which zones have been
pre-selected for speech broadcast.
g. Visual indication (self-illuminated switch or associated LED) of which zones have been
per-selected for background music broadcast.
h. A non-latching "PRESS TO TALK" (PTT) switch.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 7 of 11

16790
FALCON CLINIC
5.
i.
A "Busy" indicator lamp or LED associated with each zone. This indictor shall be
illuminated when another signal (excluding background music) is being broadcast into
pre-selected zone or zones.
j.
An audible or visible pre-announcement chime indicator, to prevent premature speaking.
k.
A green LED annotated "PA AVAILABLE" which shall be illuminated when be system is
available for use.
l.
A yellow LED (preferably a pair), annotated PA FAULT, which shall be illuminated in the
event of a system fault.
The microphone shall have at least the following specification:

Type
Polar pattern
Front to rear ratio
Frequency range
Output level
Number of zones
I.
J.
:
:
:
:
:
:
Electret condenser
Cardioid (uni-directional)
Greater than 15 dB.
100-12000 Hz.
0 dB line level, 600 Ohm (balanced)
20 zones & all-call
MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL ( POWER CONDITIONER)

1.
The function of this panel is to filter and distribute the incoming mains supply to the various items
of equipment contained in the metal rack and to provide protection against wiring failure or
other short-circuit or overload.
2.
The panel shall be fed directly from one phase of the normal power supply. The main switch shall
be of the heavy duty type rated at least 1.5 times the calculated maximum current consumption
of the system.
3.
It shall be lockable by key in either ON or OFF position and shall feed directly through one main
fuse. The fuse shall be of the front panel mounting type with indicator lamp and shall be rated in
accordance with the regulations.
4.
Distribution shall be effected by means of suitable sockets at the rear of the panel.
CEILING LOUDSPEAKERS
1. The loudspeakers shall be of flush-mount ceiling type and shall be specially designed for
background music. They shall be installed as specified and as shown on the drawings.
2.
The loudspeaker shall be complete with metal grille and acoustic back-box.
3.
The loudspeaker shall have at least the following technical specifications:
Power handling capacity for ceiling type
: 6W
Power output selection
: 6, 3 or 1.5 W
Input voltage
: 100V
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 8 of 11

16790
FALCON CLINIC
K.
Frequency range
: 80 Hz- 16000 Hz.
Sensitivity
: 90 dB / 1W /1m
VOLUME CONTROLS
1.
The volume controls are intended for use in combination with loudspeaker lines in private /
closed areas.
2.
For volume control of groups of loudspeakers, the power handling capacity of the volume control
must be chosen in accordance with the power and number of the loudspeakers in the group.
3.
L.
INTERFACE WITH FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

1.
M.
Volume control may be achieved in seven steps with a switch corresponding 0, -3, -6, -9, -12, -18
dB and off. Override relay shall be provided to allow emergency spoken announcement always
at full volume regardless of the position of the volume control.
There shall be an interface between the Public Address system and fire alarm system, to mute
the background music / paging in the alarmed zone. (muting shall take place till resting of the fire
alarm control panel).
CABLES
1.
Speaker Cables shall be of the gauge required depending upon the cable run length and
wattage. In no case shall cable be used which is smaller than 18 AWG. Insulation on the
conductors shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or an equivalent synthetic thermoplastic not less
than 0.2 mm 0.009 inch. Cables shall be jacketed with a PVC compound. The jacket thickness
shall be 0.5mm 0.02 inch minimum.
2.
Microphone Cable conductor shall be stranded copper 20 AWG. Insulation on the conductors
shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or an equivalent synthetic thermoplastic not less than 0.2 mm
0.009 inch. Cable shall be shielded 100% of aluminum polyester foil with a bare 22 gauge
stranded soft copper drain conductor. Cables shall be jacketed with a PVC compound. The
jacket thickness shall be 0.5 mm 0.02 inch minimum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Rough-in locations of component ( i.e. speakers ) and obtain the owner's authorized representative
approval of locations before final installations. Install devices in accordance with system suppliers
instructions.
B.
Provide ceiling mounting speaker assemblies complete with back boxes and grilles in location as
shown on drawings.
C.
Include for system manufacturers authorized representative to perform final equipment connection,
system programming, testing and adjustments.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 9 of 11

16790
FALCON CLINIC
D.
Mount specified sound equipment in rack and connect components with required cabling. Speaker
cable terminations shall be punched down onto labelled connection blocks in terminal cabinet and
neatly tie wrapped, secured and identified. The racks shall be wired to dedicated AC circuits. Coordinate AC power cable and wiring installation with trade responsible for respective work. AC power
distribution within rack shall be accomplished by means of wiremold or approved equal plug strip. The
AC circuits distribution shall be exclusively switched and protected by the panelboard breakers
serving rack. Ground equipment racks in accordance with system manufacturers authorized
supplier/installer instruction, and provide insulated ground wiring to each main equipment rack of
background music system. The ground conductors shall extend to isolated ground bus of panelboard
feeding respective system equipment. The equipment racks shall be isolated from the floor by rubber
isolators and isolated from all connecting conduits.
E.
Provide amplifiers, music source units and control unit in rack mount enclosures in central equipment
room. Connect complete to speaker circuits and control circuits.
F.
Install all system wiring in conduit in accordance with certified "REVIEWED" wiring schematic shop
drawing. Ensure that all wiring is in accordance with the system supplier's recommendations and is
colour coded and properly identified at terminals. Sound system wiring shall be twisted pair copper
conductors, PVC insulated with overall PVC jacket and minimum size No. 16 AWG. Power and
communication wiring shall be run in separate conduits from each other. Run shielded cables
continuously without splices. All shielded signal cables shall have shields isolated from both the
conduit system and any other shielded cables. Speaker and DC control circuits are to be spliced only
in accessible junction boxes. Exact wiring types must be confirmed with the system manufacturers.
Low level audio signal wiring shall maintain a minimum 1 m separation from power conductors. High
level audio signals (100 Volt) shall maintain a minimum 0.5 m separation from power conductors.
G.
Do not splice wiring in conduit runs. Where required, make splices in proper junction boxes utilizing
terminal strips.
H.
All audio circuits shall be balanced to ground.
I.
All conduits containing audio system wiring shall be permanently bonded to a dedicated building
ground. All electronic equipment shall exclusively receive its technical ground via the isolated
equipment ground conductor run to AC outlets. Comply with manufacturers ground instructions.
J.
Confirm colour finishes of loudspeakers with the Architectural Consultant prior to ordering.
K.
All work shall be performed in accordance to the manufacturers instructions and requirements.
L.
The system shall be tested during the installation process so that any problems can be detected and
corrected as they occur. Evaluate the following:
1.
Safe rigging practices including safety cables.
2.
Safe grounding practices each component is earth grounded through its AC cord, rack rails or
both, and not produce audible hum.
3.
Hums resulting from ground currents.
4.
Proper system polarity.
5.
Susceptibility to radio frequency interference.
6.
Susceptibility to electromagnetic interference.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 10 of 11

16790
FALCON CLINIC
3.2
7.
Proper system gain structure.
8.
Consistency and accuracy of coverage.
9.
Adequate acoustic gain.
WARRANTY
A.
Provide the services of a system engineer to assist the personnel provided by the Employer during
the installation and commissioning period.
B.
Five (5) sets of instruction manuals shall be provided for the sound system. All manuals shall be in
the English language.
C.
Obtain from the manufacturer of the equipment a warranty that all equipment supplied will be free of
defects in labour, materials and workmanship and will perform satisfactorily in compliance with all
pertinent specification for a period of one year after commissioning.
D.
During the warranty period, the services of a factory representative qualified to advice on the
operation and maintenance of the equipment specified shall be provided by the manufacturer.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 11 of 11

16790
FALCON CLINIC
SECTION 16800
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special

Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B.
The requirements specified in this section apply to all related sections in this
Division. The requirements of all related sections, elsewhere in this division also
apply to this section unless specified to the contrary.
C.
General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 16010, applies to work of this
Section.
D.
Specification Section 15547: Mounting and Isolation of Mechanical and Electrical

Systems and related contract drawings apply to this section of the work.
F.
1.2
Specification Section 16110: Raceways, boxes and Fittings and related contract
drawings, apply to this section of the work.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, hospital specialty
items in accordance with Drawings and Specifications of medical consultant and the
specialists.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of hospital specialty

items, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not
less than 5 years. Provide hospital specialty items produced by a manufacturer
listed as an Acceptable Manufacturer in this section and as approved by
Architect.
B.
Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes,

KAHRAMAA, QCS, DIN/VDE, IEC, BS, and EN, NEC and applicable codes and
regulations pertaining to hospital specialty items. Provide hospital specialty items
which are UL listed and labeled. The entire hospital panel assembly to be UL
listed under UL 1047, Isolated Power System Equipment.
C.
System shall be installed by trades specializing in hospital specialty items

installation.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 1 of 6

16800
FALCON CLINIC
D.
1.4
In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more stringent
provision will govern.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for hospital specialty items.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
Refer to the attached manufacturers list.
2.2
ISOLATION POWER CENTER PANELS

A.
Isolation power center panels: Factory wired and tested, with a shielded low
leakage isolating transformer, primary and secondary circuit breakers and a line
isolation monitor.
B.
Enclosure
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
1.
2.5mm steel degreased, phosphatized, primed and finish painted with a

coat of baked enamel, except for the front trim which is to be of Type 304
stainless steel with a No. 4 brushed finish.
2.
Flush mounting unless otherwise stated on the plans; units through

8KVA, a maximum depth of 300mm.
3.
Flush trim panels with a hinged door, with keyed lock, to provide access
to the circuit breakers and line isolation monitor along with its provisions
for testing.
4.
Panel and transformer so designed that the heat generated by the

transformer under full load conditions will not affect the normal operation
of the circuit breakers and ground detector.
5.
Maximum front panel temperature not to exceed 30oC rise under full load
continuous operation.
6.
Provide certification of this temperature test to the Consulting Engineer

upon request.
7.
Entire section behind the hinged door of dead front design and all hinges
of the concealed type.
Page 2 of 6

16800
FALCON CLINIC
C.
D.
Transformer
1.
Wound with an electrostatic shield between the primary and secondary

windings grounded to the enclosure; electrostatic shield of such design
that it will prevent direct shorting of the primary winding to the secondary
winding and reduce the coupling of harmonic distortions between the
primary circuit and secondary circuits.
2.
Total leakage current to ground from the transformer secondary winding:

Not to exceed 25 microamperes on units 8 KVA and smaller units.
3.
Regulation: Certified not to exceed 2.6% at .8 PF at 20 C above the full

load continuous operating temperature in accordance with NEMA-ANSI
Standards.
4.
Single phase, 50-Hz, with primary and secondary voltages as listed in

the drawings and/or schedule.
5.
Class H rated insulation and the temperature rise limited at 55 C above

ambient under full load conditions when tested in accordance with
NEMA-ANSI Standards.
6.
240 oC UL recognized insulation system.
7.
Design sound level of the completed units not in excess of 30 decibels

for units up to 8 KVA.
Line Isolation Monitor ("Ground Detector").

1.
Dynamic type, in accordance with NEC Standards.
2.
To sound an alarm and illuminate a red lamp upon detecting potential

leakage current in the ungrounded systems, consisting of the leakage
currents of the isolation transformer, internal leakage current of the Line
Isolation Monitor, branch ungrounded circuit wiring, receptacles, lighting
fixtures, and apparatus plugged into the receptacles of either isolated
conductor to ground with 240 volts measured secondary voltage.
3.
E.
F.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Internal leakage current of the Line Isolation Monitor not to exceed 25

microamperes.
Include a calibrated millimeter of 5 ma. center scale reading provided on the front
face of the unit, as well as an approved test switch, a green signal lamp to
indicate a safe condition, momentary contact "silencer" switch to silence the
alarm buzzer, and a relay to automatically reset the green lamp, de-energize the
red-lamp, and place the alarm buzzer back in the alarm circuit upon clearing of
the hazardous leakage-current level condition; provide internal contacts and
terminals as required for extension to a remote Alarm Indicator.
Circuit Breakers
Page 3 of 6

16800
FALCON CLINIC
2.3
2.4
2.5
1.
2-pole with a minimum interrupting capacity of 10,000 amperes.
2.
Panels rated up to 8 KVA: A minimum capacity of 3 secondary 2-pole 10

ampere, No. 4 secondary 2-pole 30 Ampere and 9 secondary 2-pole 20
Ampere, 240 volt "quicklag" branch circuit breakers mounted on single
phase 2-wire bus bars connected to the output of the isolation
transformer by means of 10mm low-dielectric-loss type insulated
copper; refer to drawings for quantity and sizes of breakers.
G.
A 25mm green-color-insulated copper grounding conductor extending

continuously for common bonding of the grounding terminals of each of the
single receptacles to the copper grounding bus.
H.
Total inherent leakage current of the Isolated Power Center, including

transformer, receptacles and internal wiring, but not including the dynamic
ground detector, not to exceed 50 microamperes.
INTENSIVE CARE SERVICE COLUMN

A.
Intensive care service columns in operating rooms will be furnished and installed
by the owner.
B.
Electrical Contractor to install, wire and connect all electrical components

furnished with columns.
C.
Coordinate all work with intensive care service column Manufacturer and medical
gas piping work.
D.
Electrical Contractor shall provide and install all make-up wiring and/or modified
intensive care service column as required to meet the requirements indicated on
the drawings.
OPERATION AND ENDOSCOPY SERVICE COLUMN

A.
Surgical service columns in operating rooms will be furnished and installed by the
owner.
B.
Electrical Contractor to install, wire and connect all electrical components

furnished with columns.
STRIP TRUNKING UNIT

A. The strip trunking unit shall be constructed from aluminum with three compartments
for different electrical, light current and medical gases services.
B. Dimensions shall be not less than 25cm to accommodate the required services as
indicated on the drawings.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 4 of 6

16800
FALCON CLINIC
C. The strip trunking shall be installed horizontally for accommodating all services
required as indicated on the drawings and vertically until the false ceiling for making
all connections to the strip trunking.
D. Samples from the strip trunking complete with all services should be submitted for
approval.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
Examine conditions under which hospital specialty items are to be installed. Notify
Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Install hospital specialty items as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's

written instruction, requirements of applicable "Standards of Installation," and in
accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that installation
complies with requirements and serves intended function.
B.
Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of hospital specialty items with

other work.
C.
Anchor hospital specialty items firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring
equipment is permanently and mechanically secured. Provide all accessories for
proper mounting.

A.
Upon completion of installation of hospital specialty items, and after connection

to power source, test equipment to demonstrate compliance with requirements.
When possible,
field-correct malfunctioning equipment then retest to demonstrate compliance.
Replace equipment which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.
B.
Tests
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
1.
Test all ungrounded isolated systems by a qualified factory technician.
2.
Include a complete inspection of all connections and materials.
3.
Verify polarity.
4.
Check and record system current leakages and mark the system leakage
in each individual panel.
Page 5 of 6

16800
FALCON CLINIC
C.
5.
Simulate faults at each of the outlets being served by the isolating panel
of a magnitude high enough to make the total leakage, which the LIM
sees, just exceed the calibrated point to verify correct operation of the
LIM; the faults simulated at each outlet to include single resistive, single
capacitive, balanced capacitive, balanced resistive, and hybrid fault.
6.
Factory technician to instruct the Hospital maintenance staff in the use of

the panel and LIM as a leakage measuring device, and instruct them as
to how all their instrumentation used in Patient Critical Care Areas can
be measured and labeled as to leakage and a periodic test made to
ascertain good equipment performance.
7.
After all tests have been made, give written certification to the Hospital
and the Engineer that the system is in accordance with all Codes, all
good installation practices and the Specifications.
For all equipment, upon completion of all tests the factory technician is to:
1.
Hold a meeting with Hospital Medical and Maintenance Staff and

thoroughly explain the operation of the equipment installed and the need
and procedure of periodically testing and logging test results.
2.
Furnish log books to the Maintenance Department, and enter the first
readings of all panels in these log books and clearly instruct the Hospital
Maintenance Staff as to how future entries should be made.
3.
Answer completely and thoroughly at this time all questions that the
Hospital Staff might have.
4.
Properly notify Architect and Owner of testing dates and times so that
they may, at their discretion, witness any of the tests or meetings
conducted by the factory technician.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 6 of 6

16800
FALCON CLINIC
SECTION 16950
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
General provisions of Contract, including General and special Conditions and Division-1 (General
requirements), apply to work of this section.
B.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
1.3
Work includes providing all materials, equipment and accessories, required for testing and
commissioning of all systems, equipments and services relating to the electrical works.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards Compliance : Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, kahramaa regulations,
sixth may 2003, DIN/VDE, IEC, NEC, NEMA, ANSI and IEEE Standards, pertaining to the testing
and commissioning.
B.
C.
1.4
govern.
Testing and commissing of all electrical works shall be performed by qualified organization for
testing as detailed on part 2.
SUBMITTALS
A. Equipment Data: Submit manufacturer's data for testing and commissioning model No., type, size,
range, ... etc.
B. Testing Sheets: Submit a recommended test and commissioning sheets as per IEE wiring
regulations 16th. Edition, and NETA international electrical testing association INC.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
QUALIFICATION OF TESTING ORGANIZATION AND PERSONNEL

A.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Testing Organization
Page 1 of 14

16950
FALCON CLINIC
1. The testing organization shall be an independent, third party entity which can function as an
unbiased testing authority, professionally independent of the manufacturers, suppliers, and
installers of equipment or systems being evaluated.
2. The testing organization shall be regularly engaged in the testing of electrical equipment
devices, installations, and systems.
3. The testing organization shall use technicians who are regularly employed for testing
services.
SCHEDULE 1 - An organization having a Full Membership classification issued by the
International Electrical Testing Association meets this criteria.
SCHEDULE 2 - The testing organization shall submit appropriate documentation to
demonstrate that it satisfactorily complies with these requirements.
B.
Suitability of Test Equipment

1.
All test equipment shall meet the requirements and be in good mechanical and electrical
condition.
2.
Field test metering used to check power system meter calibration must be more accurate
than the instrument being tested.
3.
Accuracy of metering in test equipment shall be appropriate for the test being performed.
C.
Test instrument Calibration

1.
The testing organization shall have a calibration program which assures that all
applicable test instruments are maintained within rated accuracy for each test instrument
calibrated.
2.
The firm providing calibration service shall maintain up-to-date instrument calibration
instructions and procedures for each test instrument calibrated.
3.
Instruments shall be calibrated in accordance with the following frequency schedule:
4.
5.
6.
D.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
a.
Field instruments: Analog, 6 months maximum. Digital, 12 months maximum.
b.
Laboratory instruments: 12 months maximum.
c.
Leased specialty equipment: 12 months maximum.
Dated calibration labels shall be visible on all test equipment.

Records, which show date and results of instruments calibrated or tested, must be kept
up-to-date.
Calibrating standard shall be of higher accuracy than that of the instrument tested.
Test report
Page 2 of 14

16950
FALCON CLINIC
1.
The test report shall include the following:

a. Summary of project.
b. Description of equipment tested.
c. Description of tests.
d. Test data.
e. Analysis and recommendations.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 3 of 14

16950
FALCON CLINIC
2.
3.
E.
2.1
Test data records shall include the following minimum requirements:

a.
Identification of the testing organization.
b.
Equipment identification.
c.
Humidity, temperature, and other conditions that may affect the results of the
tests/calibrations.
d.
Date of inspections, tests, maintenance, and/or calibrations.
e.
Identification of the testing technician.
f.
Indication of inspections, tests, maintenance, and/or calibrations to be performed and

recorded.
g.
Indication of expected results when calibrations are to be performed.
h.
Indication of as-found and as-left results, as applicable.
i.
Sufficient spaces to allow all results and comments to be indicated.
The testing organization shall furnish a copy or copies of the complete report to the
owner and consultant.
Testing Personnel
1.
Technicians performing these electrical tests and inspections shall be trained and
experienced concerning the apparatus and systems being evaluated. These individuals shall
be capable of conducting the tests in a safe manner and with complete knowledge of the
hazards involved. They must evaluate the test data and make a judgment on the continued
serviceability or non-serviceability of the specific equipment.
2.
Technicians shall be certified in accordance with ANSI/NETA ETT-2000, Standard for

Certification of Electrical Testing Personnel. Each on-site crew leader shall hold a current
certification, Level III or higher, in electrical testing.
DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITY
A.
The Contractor
The contractor shall be responsible for all power switching of equipment and for providing
equipment in a ready-to-test condition. The contractor shall provide the testing organization
with the following:
1. A short-circuit analysis, a coordination study, and a protective device setting.
2. The most current set of electrical drawings and instruction manuals applicable to the scope of
work relative to the equipment under test.
3. An itemized description of equipment to be inspected and tested.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 4 of 14

16950
FALCON CLINIC
4. A determination of who shall provide a suitable and stable source of electrical power to each
test site.
5. Site-specific hazard notification and safety training.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 5 of 14

16950
FALCON CLINIC
B.
The Testing Organization

The testing organization shall provide the following:
1. All field technical services, tooling, equipment, instrumentation, and technical supervision to
perform such tests and inspections.
2. Specific power requirements for test equipment.
3. Notification to the contractor and consultant prior to commencement of any testing.
4. A timely notification of any system, material, or workmanship which is found deficient on the
basis of maintenance tests.
5. A written record of all tests and a final report.
2.2
WORK TESTS
A.
The consultant shall inspect and test at the makers' works, during manufacture and after
completion, all or any particular manufactured material, apparatus or equipment ordered by the
contractor for incorporation in the works, in order to prove that the material, apparatus or equipment
meets the requirements of this specification. The contractor shall notify the Owner's authorized
representative in advance of all such inspections and tests.
The contractor must arrange on his expenses for works tests to be attended by the Owner's
consultant for all tests specified in different sections of specifications.
B.
The Contractor shall submit to the Owner's authorized Representative, at the time of issue, three
copies of each and every order for bought in material, apparatus and equipment intended for
incorporation in the works.
Each such order shall clearly state whether the item(s) which it covers is or are subject to inspection
or test before dispatch to site.
C.
Upon completion of manufacture, or before dispatch in the case of stock items, all material,
apparatus and equipment intended for incorporation in the works shall be subjected, to the tests
specified in the relevant National Standard or elsewhere in this specification together with such
additional tests as may be required in order to prove compliance with this specification. When no
relevant British Standard exists, or the appropriate National Standard fails to specify tests, the
Contractor shall submit his proposals for the tests he requires to provide compliance with the
specification.
D.
The results of each and every test carried out in accordance with the provisions of this specification
shall be accurately and comprehensively recorded on a form of test certificate signed by the person
in charge of the testing procedure and countersigned by the contractor and four copies of every
such test certificate shall be submitted to the Owner's Authorized Representative.
E.
Every test certificate shall include, in addition to all other requirements the date and time of the test,
the ambient conditions, a fully detailed description of the test(s) carried out, the results obtained,
and any relevant performance curves.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 6 of 14

16950
FALCON CLINIC
F.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the Owner's authorized Representative is
advised in writing whenever material, apparatus or equipment is ready for inspection or test at his
own or his suppliers' premises. At least seven days notice shall be given, and due allowance shall
be made for this period of notice in drawing up the program of works.
G.
In cases where the manufacturer or supplier of material, apparatus or equipment relies upon type
tests to prove, either wholly or in part, the suitability of his product(s), then the Contractor shall
arrange for triplicate copies of certificates giving the results of such type tests to be submitted to the
Owner's Authorized Representative at the time the order is placed.
H.
No material, apparatus or equipment, from whatever source, shall be dispatched to site until the
Owner's Authorized Representative has had the opportunity to inspect it or has given written
authorization for dispatch.
I.
No inspection or testing by the Owner's Consultant nor the witnessing of satisfactory tests nor the
authorizing of dispatch to site shall in any way relieve the contractor of any of his obligations under
this contract, nor shall it in any way limit the right of the Owner's authorized representative to reject
such items after delivery to site if they subsequently prove to be defective or unsatisfactory or
unsuitable for their intended purpose.
J.
When the contractor has ordered equipment from a manufacturer who, in turn, has bought-in major
components from a secondary supplier, the Owner's Consultant shall have the right to elect to
inspect such components at the works of the secondary supplier, and the contractor shall ensure,
when placing his orders, that such rights are secured.
For the purposed of this clause, inter-departmental orders within the same organization shall be
treated in the same manner as orders involving separate organizations.
2.3
K.
The Owner's Consultant shall have the right to waive, at his sole discretion, the requirements
relating to his inspection of materials, apparatus, and equipment at the makers' works. The
exercise by the Owner's authorized Representative of this right shall not in any way relieve the
contractor of his obligation to carry out the prescribed tests and to submit test certificates.
L.
No work shall be painted or otherwise prepared for dispatch until it has been inspected by the
Owner's Consultant, or inspection has been waived and dispatch has been authorized.
M.
When one or more of the Contractor's purchase orders covers the supply of a number of like
components or items of equipment, the Owner's authorized representative shall have the right to
select that one item or component of each type and rating be subjected to type tests as described
in the relevant National Standard. Other similar items may then be subjected only to routine tests.
SITE TESTS
A.
The Contractor shall carry out all necessary checks and tests to prove that the completed
installations fully comply with specified requirements.
B.
Upon completion of the electrical installation, or any substantial section thereof, the installation, or
any substantial section thereof, the installation or that section and all of the associated electrical
equipment shall be subjected to the tests specified in the relevant National Standards and in the
IEE Wiring Regulations, together with such other tests as may be specified in order to prove
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 7 of 14

16950
FALCON CLINIC
compliance with the Specification.

C.
All of the required checks and tests shall be carried out in accordance with a program to be agreed
with the Owner's Authorized Representative, and facilities shall be made available for the Owner's
Authorized Representative to be present at all such checks and tests if he so desires.
D.
Tests not carried out in the presence of the Owners' Authorized Representative shall not be
regarded as valid for the purpose of the Contract, unless the Owner's Authorized Representative
shall have authorized the Contractor to proceed with the testing process in his absence.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 8 of 14

16950
FALCON CLINIC
2.4
E.
Every test certificate shall include, in addition to all other requirements, the date and time of the test,
the ambient conditions, a fully detailed description of the test (s) carried out, the result obtained,
and any relevant performance curves.
F.
No material, apparatus, equipment, or installation shall be covered or otherwise permanently

concealed from view until the Owner's Authorized Representative has had the opportunity to
inspect it, given written authorization for covering to proceed.
G.
No work shall have a final paint finish until it has been inspected by the Owner's Authorized
Representative or painting has been authorized, unless the final paint finish is necessary to provide
the necessary climate protection.
H.
No apparatus, equipment, plant, or installations will be recognized as complete until all of the
specified inspections and tests have been satisfactorily carried out.
I.
The Owner's Authorized Representative shall have the right to waive, at his sole discretion, the
requirements relating to his inspection of materials, apparatus equipment and installations and the
witnessing of tests thereon. The exercise by the Owner's Authorized Representative of this right
shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of his obligations to carry out the prescribed tests and to
submit test certificates.
TABLES
The following tables shall be used for inspection and test procedures item mentioned under each
specification section.
TABLE 1
Insulation Resistance Test Values
Electrical Apparatus and Systems
Nominal Rating
of Equipment in Volts
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Minimum Test Voltage, DC
Recommended Minimum
Insulation Resistance in
Megohms
250
500
25
600
1,000
100
1,000
1,000
100
2,500
1,000
500
5,000
2,500
1,000
8,000
2,500
2,000
15,000
2,500
5,000
25,000
5,000
20,000
35,000
15,000
100,000
Page 9 of 14

16950
FALCON CLINIC
46,000
15,000
100,000
69,000 and above
15,000
100,000
In the absence of consensus standards dealing with insulation-resistance tests, the Standards Review Council
suggests the above representative values.
Test results are dependent on the temperature of the insulating material and the humidity of the surrounding
environment at the time of the test.
Insulation-resistance test data may be used to establish a trending pattern. Deviations from the baseline
information permit evaluation of the insulation.
TABLE 3
Maintenance Testing
Transformer Insulation Resistance
Transformer Coil
Rating Type in Volts
Minimum DC Test Voltage
Recommended Minimum
Insulation Resistance in Megohms
0 - 600
1000
500
601 - 5000
2500
5000
Greater than 5000
5000
25000
In the absence of consensus standards, the NETA Standards Review Council suggests the above
representative values.
NOTE: Since insulation resistance depends on insulation rating (kV) and winding capacity (KVA), values
obtained should be compared to manufacturer's published data.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EVALUATION OF ELECTRICAL WORK DRAWINGS

A.
As soon as possible after award of contract, the testing qualified organization carefully examine a
set of electrical drawings with respect to routing of services and location of electrical equipment,
and shall report the results of the evaluation in writing to the consultant.
B.
The set of drawings examined by the origination shall be returned to the consultant with the
evaluation report, marked-up to indicate locations for electrical equipment, cable routing, any
required revision work.
SITE VISTIS DURING CONSTRUCTION

C.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
After careful review of the electrical work drawings and specifications, the testing organization
Page 10 of 14

16950
FALCON CLINIC
shall visit the site at frequent, regular intervals during construction of the electrical system to
observe routing of services. Locations of electrical equipment, workmanship, and anything else
which will affect testing, adjusting the system.
D.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
After each site visit, the organization shall report results of the site visit to the consultant, in
writing, with a copy to the owner, indicating the date and time of the visit, and detailed
recommendations for any corrective work required to ensure proper adjusting the system.
Page 11 of 14

16950
FALCON CLINIC
3.3
COMMISSIONING
A.
Following the satisfactory conclusion of inspections and tests on completed sections of the
Works, the Contractor shall duly commission each section of the electrical installation and leave it
in full working order. The term 'Commissioning' shall be deemed to include:
1.
The energizing of electrical distribution circuits and equipments which have previously
been inspected, tested, found to be satisfactory and capable of being energize with
complete safety.
2.
The setting of electrical protective devices and systems, where relevant, in accordance
with the directions of the Owner's Authorized Representative or, failing such directions, in
accordance with sound electrical engineering practice.
3.
The starting up of all electrically powered plant and equipment.
4.
The verification of the performance of all such plant and equipment by the carrying out,
where required, of further tests and the making of all necessary adjustments so as to
obtain optimum performance.
B.
Compliance with the requirements of this Section of the Specification shall not, by itself, in any
way relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations under the Contract.
C.
The Contractor shall ensure that all connections and adjustments are made correctly, and that
the installations and equipment are in a completely safe and satisfactory condition.
D.
All activities carried out by the Contractor in pursuance of the requirements of this section of the
Specification shall be carried out, or continuously supervised, by a competent and experienced
commissioning engineer.
E.
If considered necessary, the Owner's Authorized Representative will set up a Commissioning

Panel to oversee all activities relating to commissioning of installations, plant and equipment. The
Contractor shall provide appropriate representatives as members of the Panel to act in an
advisory capacity assisting the Owner's Authorized Representative in all matters relating to the
commissioning process.
F.
The Owner's Authorized Representative shall have power to appoint and independent
Commissioning Engineer to act on his behalf in the control of all activities relating to the
commissioning process, and in such matters the said Commissioning Engineer shall be deemed
to be and authorized representative of the Owner's Authorized Representative
G.
The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for ensuring that all switching operations and all work
on electrical circuits and equipment which have once been energized are carried out in a
thoroughly safe manner and shall operate, and rigidly adhere to, an approved 'permit-to-work'
system. For this purpose, the Contractor shall appoint an 'authorized person' as defined in the
Electricity (Factories Act) Special Regulations, and shall communicate the name of such person
in writing to the Owner's Authorized Representative.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 12 of 14

16950
FALCON CLINIC
H.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
In appropriate cases the Contractor shall nominate a particular employee as 'Switchgear

Operator' and shall ensure that all switchgear operations are carried out by the nominated person
and that such person is always available for this duty when required.
Page 13 of 14

16950
FALCON CLINIC
I.
The Contractor shall prepare a commissioning schedule detailing the plant to be commissioned,
the operations to be carried out, the time scale, with exact dates for specific operations, details of
requirements for power services, and attendance or provisions by others. This commissioning
schedule, in draft from, shall be submitted not less than four weeks in advance of the date on
which commissioning is to commence.
J.
If required by the Owner's Authorized Representative, the Contractor shall present the
information from the commissioning schedule in the form of a flodiagram or a PERT (Critical
Path) chart.
K.
The procedures to be followed by the Contractor for commissioning the electrical equipment and
installations shall be as directed by the Owner's Authorized Representative or, in the absence of
such directions, shall be proposed by the Contractor and submitted to the Owner's Authorized
Representative for approval.
L.
No connections or adjustments shall be made to plant or equipment which has already been
commissioned and set to work, except with the prior consent of the Owner's Authorized
Representative.
M.
No plant or equipment shall be charged, energized or operated without the prior approval of the
Owner's Authorized Representative. All applicable test certificates shall have been first submitted
to the Owner's Authorized Representative.
N.
All commissioning procedures shall be carried out in a safe and satisfactory manner and in
accordance with the provisions of the Factory Acts, the Health and Safety at Work etc. Act, and
the Electricity Regulations.
O.
Following completion of commissioning, each item of equipment or, where several items of
equipment are interdependent, the complete plant shall operate continuously and satisfactorily
under normal operating conditions for a period of 72 hours without defect of any kind. In the event
of any defect or mal-operation becoming apparent during this period the Contractor shall forthwith
determine the cause and rectify it by means of repair, replacement, adjustment or modification
and the reliability run shall be re-commenced. All materials, equipment and labor required to
locate and rectify any such defect shall be provided by the Contractor at his own expense.
P.
No plant, equipment or installation will be considered as complete until the prescribed

commissioning procedures have been satisfactorily carried out and the reliability run has been
completed without untoward incident.
Q.
The Owner's Authorized Representative shall have power to require that the whole of the plant,
equipment and installations, or selected parts thereof, be re-inspected and, if necessary, retested immediately before the end of the contractual maintenance period, and the Contractor
shall be responsible for making all necessary arrangements with the Owner.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 14 of 14

16950
FALCON CLINIC
SCHEDULE OF PREFERRED MANUFACTURERS & SUPPLIERS

16110 RACEWAYS, BOXES AND FITTINGS
1-
Allied
(For Metal Conduits & Accessories)
(U.S.A)
2-
Wheatland
(U.S.A)
3-
Marshall Tufflex
(For P.V.C Conduits & Accessories)
(U.K)
4-
EGA Tube / MK
(U.K)
5-
DECODUCT
(Dubai)
6-
Clipsal
(Italy)
7-
Barton
(U.K)
8-
Burn Tubes
(U.K)
9-
Thomas & Betts

(For Steel Back Boxes)
(U.S.A)
10-
Steel City
(For Steel Back Boxes)
(U.S.A)
11-
Roxtec
(For Fire Stopping Material)
(SWEDEN)
16114 CABLE TRAY

1-
DAVIS
(U.K)
2-
WIBE
(Sweden)
3-
EGA/MK
(U.K)
4-
NIEDAX
(Germany)
5-
SWIFT
(France)
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 1 of 7
SCHEDULE OF PREFERRED MANUFACTURERS &

SUPPLIERS
16999
FALCON CLINIC
16116 CABLE TRUNKING

1-
DAVIS
(U.K)
2-
WIBE
(Sweden)
3-
EGA/MK
(U.K)
4-
NIEDAX
(Germany)
5-
SWIFT
(France)
6-
BURN TUBES
(U.K)
16120 WIRES AND CABLES

1-
OMAN CABLES
(OMAN)
2-
Elsewedy
(Egypt)
3-
JADDAH CABLES
(SAUDI)
4-
PYROTENAX, BICC, AEI & WREXHAM

(For MICC CABLES)
FP 200 GOLD, Pirelli, AEI

(For Fire Resistant Cables)
(Italy)
6-
Raychem
(For Cable Terminations)
(U.S.A)
16140 WIRING DEVICES

1-
MK
(Type Should be approved by Arch.)
(U.K)
2-
Legrand
(FRANCE)
3-
Btichino
(Italy)
4-
Jung
(Germany)
5-
MEM
(U.K)
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 2 of 7

SUPPLIERS
16999
FALCON CLINIC
16150 Miscellaneous Control Equipment

1-
Siemens
(Germany)
2-
Merlin Gerin
(France)
3-
ABB
(Germany)
4-
Telemecanique
(France)
16170 SAFETY AND MOTOR ISOLATORS (DISCONNECTS)

1-
General Electric
(U.S.A)
2-
Westinghouse
(U.S.A)
3-
Siemens
(U.S.A)
4-
Square D
(U.K)
5-
MEM
(U.K)
16320 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER

1-
ABB
(Germany)
2-
Siemens
(Germany)
3-
Tesar
(Italy)
16425 LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

1-
ABB
(Germany)
2-
Siemens
(Germany)
3-
Merlin Gerin
(U.A.E)
4-
General Electric
(U.A.E)
16450 EARTHING SYSTEM

1-
Furse
(U.K)
2-
Erico
(Germany)
3-
Wallis
(U.K)
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 3 of 7

SUPPLIERS
16999
FALCON CLINIC
16470 DISTRIBUTION BOARD

1-
Siemens
(Germany)
2-
ABB
(Germany)
3-
General Electric
(U.S.A)
4-
Merlin Gerin
(France)
16485 CONTACTORS
1-
Switchgear and Distribution Boards Manufacturers
16490 AUTOMATIC REACTIVE POWER COMPENSATION (POWER FACTOR CAPACITORS

CORRECTION) ASSEMBLY
1-
Switchgear and Distribution Boards Manufacturers
16500 LIGHTING
A. Refer to drawings
B. Emergency Lighting System:
1-
JSB
(U.K)
2-
Cooper
(U.S.A)
16620 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)

A.
B.
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
U.P.S :
1-
Merlin Gerin
(France)
2-
Chlorid
(Italy)
3-
Siemens
(Germany)
4-
RWE
(Germany)
Batteries:
1-
Fiamm SLA Type.
2-
Oerlikon.
3-
Hawker.
4-
Sonnenschein.
(Germany/Japan/Italy/Europe)
Page 4 of 7

SUPPLIERS
16999
FALCON CLINIC
16625 EMERGENCY DIESEL GENERTOR PLANT

1-
Cummins
(U.S.A)
2-
Caterpillar
(U.S.A)
3-
Milsubishi
(U.S.A)
16722 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM AND VOICE ALARM SYSTEM

1-
Edwards Systems Technology (EST)
(CANADA)
2-
Notifier
(U.S.A)
3-
Siemens
(U.S.A)
4-
Simplex
(U.S.A)
5-
Honeywell
(U.S.A)
16723 IP CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM

1.
AXIS
(SWEDEN)
2.
BOSCH
(NETHERLANDS)
4-
VICON
(U.S.A)
3.
PELCO
(U.S.A)
4.
SIEMENS
(GERMANY)
5.
SONY
(Japan)
16725 ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM MONITORING SYSTEMS

1-
KABA
(U.K)
2-
Siemens
(Germany)
3-
CSI
(U.S.A)
4-
Senstar-Stellar
(Canda)
5-
American Dynamics
(U.S.A)
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 5 of 7

SUPPLIERS
16999
FALCON CLINIC
NETWORK ACTIVE EQUIPMENT

1.
Cisco
(U.S.A)
2.
Nortel
(U.S.A)
SECURITY CONSOLE
1.
MIDDLE ATLANTIC
2.
WINSTED
(U.S.A)
16750 STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM

1-
AMP
(U.S.A)
2-
Nordex
(U.S.A)
3-
Comscope (SYSTIMAX)
(U.S.A)
4-
Alcatel
(France)
5-
R&M
(SWITZERLAND)
16780 TV AND SATELLITE RECEPTION SYSTEM

1-
WISI
(GERMANY)
2-
HIRCHMANN
(GERMANY)
3-
KATHREIN
(GERMANY)
16790 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND VOICE ALARM SYSTEM

1-
BOSCH
(NETHERLAND)
2-
DYNACORD
(GERMANY)
3-
TOA
(JAPAN)
4-
BOSE / CROWN
(U.S.A)
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 6 of 7

SUPPLIERS
16999
FALCON CLINIC
16800 HOSPITAL SPECIALTY ITEMS

A-
FOR ISOLATION POWER CENTER PANELS
1-
SIEMENS
2-
SQUARE D
3-
ISOTROL
4-
BENDER
B-
FOR REMOTE INDICATOR ALARM

1-
SQUARE D
2-
ISOTROL
3-
BENDER
C-
FOR STRIP TRUNKING UNIT
1-
LEGRAND
(FRANCE)
2-
ACKREMAN
(GERMANY)
Rev: 0
Date: JULY.2010
Page 7 of 7

SUPPLIERS
16999

ELEC Specifications

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

ELEC Specifications

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

FALCON CLINIC

GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK

RACEWAYS, BOXES AND FITTINGS

WIRES AND CABLES

MISCELLANEOUS CONTROL EQUIPMENT

SAFETY AND MOTOR ISOLATORS (DISCONNECTS)

SWITCHGEAR ASSEMBLIES MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD

DISTRIBUTION BOARDS (POWER AND LIGHTING PANEL BOARDS)

MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS

AUTOMATIC REACTIVE POWER COMPENSATION

UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

EMERGENCY DIESEL GENERATOR PLANT

FIRE ALARM & VOICE EVACUATION SYSTEM

CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION & ALARM MONITORING SYSTEM

ACCESS CONTROL & ALARM MONITORING SYSTEM

STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM

TV & SATELLITE RECEPTION SYSTEM

PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM

HOSPITAL SPECIALTY ITEMS

TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

SCHEDULE OF PREFERRED ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS & SUPPLIERS

GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL

PREPARATION OF CONTRACTOR'S DRAWINGS

COMMISSIONING AND PERFORMANCE TESTING

CONDITIONS RELATING TO SUPPLIERS

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE CONTRACT

GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL

GENERAL DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Qatar General Electricity and Water Corporation.

That part of the project dependent upon or subsequent to the

DEFINITION OF "AGREEMENT", ACCEPTANCE" AND "APPROVAL"

GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL

- Agreed by or agreement of the consultant in writing

- Accepted or acceptance by the consultant in writing

GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL

ORGANIZATION OF THE WORK

EXAMINATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONDS

GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL

B. Verify all grades, elevations, dimensions and clearances at the site.

COORDINATION OF WORK WITH OTHER TRADES

PART 3 - DEFINITIONS OF TYPES OF ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS

GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL

TAKING DIMENSIONS FROM DRAWINGS

PART 4 - DEFINITIONS OF TYPES OF CONTRACTOR'S DRAWINGS

INSTALLATION DRAWINGS (shop drawings)

Site distribution and cable routes including 11KV routing.

Schematics for main and sub-main distribution.

Power distribution for all equipment.

GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL

The installation drawings must bear the contractors stamp certifying :

That it has checked the submitted drawings.

MANUFACTURERS' AND EQUIPMENT DRAWINGS

GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL

maximum electrical loading for each power cable

SWITCHGEAR, STARTER AND CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION PANEL DRAWINGS

Dimension underground utilities from permanent identifiable structural points.

GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 5 - DRAWINGS TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE CONTRACTOR

SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS AND EQUIPMENT

SIGNATURE ON CONTRACTOR'S DRAWINGS

GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 6 - INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR

INFORMATION LISTED IN CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

INFORMATION FOR MANUALS